Skip to main content

Full text of "Pictures of Indian life"

See other formats


r 

J     ■    ■ 

—  CJ) 

^00 

o== 

=co 

H  = 

==*d- 

o:^= 

==CO 

c 

Km 

^_ 

n  MJj- 

'=  -r— 

o== 

==o 

'  $\       >-==i 

go 

l/)^S 

cr  — 

> 

==-!— 

z 

==CD 

BBHH 

=  C* 

=  -■— 

CO 

PICTURES  of  INDIAN  LIFE 

By 

SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

WITH 
A  LIFE  SKETCH  OF  THE  AUTHOR 


FOREWORD  BY 

Dr.  Sir.  RASH  BEHARY  GHOSE 

K.T.  C.S.I.  CLE.,  D.L.,  etc , 


GANESH  &  CO.,  MADRAS 


%* 


CONTENTS 

Page. 

Publishers'  Note  v 

Foreword  vii 

Life  Sketch 

The  Great  King  on  his  throne 

The  Baboo 

Suttee  in  India 

April,  May  and  June 

One  of  the  last  Kings  of  Bengal 

A  Story  of  Patriotism  in  Bengal 

Brahmin  and  a  Plebian 

An  Orthodox  Ghost  Story 

The  Story  of  a  Lunatic 

The  Railway  Platform 

Behari  Sardar 

The  Perpectual  Slavery  of  India 

""Military  Examination 

Asia  the  Chosen  Place  of  God 

The  Lessons  to  be  learned  from  wild 
Dogs  ...     225 

The  Great  Inventor  of  a  Nation        ...     232 


1 

43 
48 

55 
62 

67 

72 

81 

86 

99 
108 

ii5 

157 
211 

218 


IV 


1  ! 


Pelting  of  Stoni-  I  >  dhi 

The  Agricultural  S        larshi[  ...     2 

The  Deterioration  Indiai  ...     256 


PUBLISHERS'   NOTE 

This  is  a  collection  of  the  Life  and 
select  writings  of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose 
the  founder  of  the  Amrita  Bazar  Patrika.  The 
biography  of  Shishir  Kumar  should  itself  prove  a 
mine  of  Indian  political  information  and  contains 
a  full  account  of  the  Indian  Administration  and 
the  reforms  introduced  by  Lords  Northbrook.Lytton, 
Ripon,  Duflerin  and  others  ;  and  when  one  such 
comes  to  be  written  the  world  will  see  how  this 
great  man  was  able  to  influence  all  these  high 
officials  and  thereby  contributed  his  share  to  the 
building  of  the  Indian  Nation.  The  essays  and 
anecdotes  included  in  this  volume  are  written  on 
every  conceivable  subject  and  his  political  writings 
are  so  exhaustive  and  of  such  perennial  interest 
that  they  are  always  a  source  of  inspiration  and 
guidance.  A  peculiar  vein  of  humour  and  origi- 
nality runs  through  his  writings  and  combined 
■"Wiliffreshness  and  vigour  they  are  of  enduring 
value.  Mr.  W.  8.  Caine,  that  great  friend  of  India, 
says  "J  fyeartily  commend  to  every  cultured  and 
earnest  Indian,  to  every  Christian  Missionary  and 
also  to  every  European  who  cares  to  look    beneath  the 


VI 

surface  of  Indian  life  and  thought  the  articles  from 
the 'pen  of  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  which  will  be  ren- 
dered doubly  interesting  by  the  careful  perusal." 

These  articles  originally  appeared  in  the 
Amrita  Bazar  Patrika  before  the  year  1898.  In 
view  of  the  permanent  value  of  these  literary  gems 
and  as  a  token  of  the  Publishers'  reverential 
admiration  and  tribute,  this  volume  is  presented  to 
the  public  so  that  the  rising  generation  may  reap 
the  benefit  of  them.  In  conclusion  the  Publishers 
are  highly  indebted  to  the  Proprietors  of  the 
Amrita  Bazar  Patrika  for  having  allowed  them  to 
present  the  book  in  this  form. 


FOREWORD 

The  author  of  these  Pictures  of  Indian  Life 
Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  was  in  many  ways  a 
most  distinguished  man — distinguished  by  quali- 
ties of  mind  and  still  more  distinguished  by  quali- 
ties of  soul.  The  story  of  the  founding  of  the  Amrita 
Bazar  Patrika  and  the  brilliant  success  it  achieved 
under  his  editorship  need  not  be  repeated  for  it 
has  passed  into  history.  I  will  only  say  that  no 
Indian  newspaper  was  more  eagerly  read  by  the 
public  or  more  disliked  in  official  circles  than  the 
Patrika.  Its  articles  were  always  full  of  humour 
and  sparkled  with  wit. 

A  fearless  champion  of  the  rights  of  his 
countrymen  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  engaged  himself 
in  the  establishment  of  the  Indian  League— a  body 
which  in  its  time  did  very  useful  work  and  paved 
the  way  tor  the  present  National  movement. 
Politics  however  did  not  absorb  all  his  energies. 
To  borrow  Disraeli's  words,  he  affected  the  mind 
of  his  generation  not  in  one  way  but  in  various 
dilutions.  He  was  a  man  of  intense  spiritual 
fervour  and  his  religious  works  which  have 
enjoyed  a  wide  circulation,  show  him  perhaps  at 
his  best.    Of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  it  may  be  truly 


Vlll 

said  that  he  broke  no  promise,  served  no  private 
end,  gained  no  title  and  lost  no  friends. 

The  writings  of  such   a  man    deserve  to  be 
made  known   all  over  India  and  I  commend  the 
following-  pages  to  my   countrymen  in  the  confi- 
dent   hope  that  they  will  derive  both  profit  and 
pleasure  from  them. 

Calcutta,") 
17-12-17.     J  RASH  BEHARY  GHOSE 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE. 

Ah,  when  shall  all  mew's  good 
Be  each  man's  rule,  and  universal  peace- 
Lie  like  a  lane  of  beams  athwart  the  sea, 
Thro'  all  the  circle  of  the -golden  year? 

Tennyson. 
To  write  a  history  of  the  life  of  Babu  Shishir 
Kumar  Ghose  within  the  small  compass  of   a  few 
pages  is  simply  like  playing1  with   an  edged  tool. 
This  great  man's  life  was  so  eventful  and  pregnant 
with  so  many  activities  for  the  good   of  his  race 
and  of  mankind  that  it  is  not  possible  for  us  to  give 
our  readers  more  than   a  mere  glimpse   into  his 
career.     Several  characteristic  features  governed 
his  whole  earthly  career.  They  were  world  patrio- 
tism, complete  self-effacement,  unquenchable  thirst 
for  the  love   of  God  and  firm  conviction  in   the 
eternity  of  man's  life.     Two  men  were  born  in  the 
early   days   of  the   present   century  that    bore   a 
■pc<£uiiaf  resemblance  to  each  other, — Babu  Shishir 
Kumar  Ghose  of  Bengal  and  Mr.  William  T.  Stead 
of  England.    Both  were  princes  of  journalists,  both 
were  great  philanthropists,  and  both  high  thinkers 
and  noble  spiritualists  of  the  age. 


SHISHIR   KUMAR    GHOSE 

• 

Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  was  born  in  the 
year  1842  in  the  village  of  Magura  (now  Amrita- 
bazar),  in  the  district  of  Jessore.  He  was  the  third 
of  the  eight  sons  of  Babu  Harinarayan  Ghose,  the 
leader  of  the  local  Bar.  Shishir  Babu  s  eldest 
brother  was  Basanta  Kumar,  who  was  a  precoci- 
ous youth  and  latterly,  an  absorbent  philosopher 
and  strong  moralist  from  whom  the  former  derived 
no  small  inspiration.  Shishir  Babu  was  a  genius 
a  ready  and  original  wit,  a  splendid  debater  and 
a  man  of  towering  intellect.  He  attained  to  a 
position,  which  was  and  still  is  an  object  of  envy 
to  most  of  his  countrymen.  Mr.  W.  S.  Caine  M.  P., 
a  devoted  friend  of  India,  wrote  in  1897  in  his 
short  sketch  of  Mr.  Ghose's  life  : — 

"  In  his  youth,  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  had  few 
of  the  advantages  now  possessed  by  young 
Indians.  His  education  was  local  and  elementary; 
and  he  owes  entirely  to  himself  and  his  extra- 
ordinary energy  of  character,  all  the  intellectual 
culture  he  possesses.  One  of  his  own  favourite 
sayings  is,  "time  is  the  best  gift  of  God  to  man", 
and  he  has  always  lived  up  to  this  principle. 
From  his  earliest  youth,  he  has  utilised  every  spare 
moment,  which  he  has  seized  in  passing*  to  "pi "  ir 
into  his  own  service,  for  the  improvement  of  his 
mind,  or  to  add  to  that  marvellous  store  of  know- 
ledge concerning  India  and  her  people,  which  is 
the  wonder  of  his  friends". 

2 


LIFE  SKETCH 

After  receiving  the  rudiments  of  education  at 
the  village  school,  Shishir  Kumar  came  to  Cal- 
cutta. Here  he  was  admitted  to  the  Hare  School 
and  passed  his  Entrance  examination  with  great 
credit  standing  fourth  in  the  general  list  and 
obtained  a  scholarship. 

The  early  days  of  Shishir  Kumar  were  spent 
in  the  development  of  physical  power.  While 
yet  a  boy,  he  proved  himself  an  expert  in  climbing 
trees,  in  riding,  running,  fencing,  swimming  and 
gymnastic  exercises.  Here  is  a  story  illustrating 
his  great  energy  and  wonderful  physical  power. 
In  his  native  village  there  was  a  reservoir,  called 
"Bhola-pukur'' — a  large  sheet  of  water,  which  few, 
if  any,  villagers  would  venture  to  swim  across. 
Shishir  was  asked  to  do  this,  and  he  did  it  more 
than  creditably.  Indeed,  he  swam  across  the  tank 
about  fifty  times  and  for  some  three  hours'  run- 
ning, to  the  great  pleasure  and  admiration  of  his 
friends  and  obtained  a  prize  from  the  Magistrate 
of  the  district. 

At  a  very  tender  age,  too,  Shishir  Kumar 
cultivated  the  art  of  music.  He  was  not  only 
successful  in  his  efforts  but  published  a  book  called 
'S'a'ngit  Shastra".  Latterly,  he  brought  his  know- 
ledge to  perfection  and  became  an  excellent 
musician,   both  vocal  and  instrumental. 

At  the  time  when  Shishir  was  a  boy,  Brah- 
moism    was    making     serious      inroads      upon 

3 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

Hinduism  in  Bengal.     As  a  man  of  an  intensely 
religious  turn  of  mind,  he  at  once   adopted  that 
religion,    while   still   a  youth.     But  in  the    latter 
part  of  his  life,  his  views  underwent  a  change  and 
he  became  the  shining  light — the  life   and  soul — 
of  Baishnavism.     He  was    a  man  of  strong  princi- 
ples ;    and   in  the  teeth  of   great  opposition  and 
despite  all  threats  of  excommunication,  he  gave 
his  sister  in  marriage  to  a  gentleman  belonging  to 
a  different  sect  of  Kayasthas.     So,  it  was  he  who 
took  the  first  step  to  combat  the  present-day  social 
evils.  Subsequently,  he  became  an   ardent  votary 
of  spiritualism  and  a  sincere  admirer  and  follower 
of  "Sri  Gauranga", — the  Prophet  of  Naaia.  Every- 
one in   Bengal  is  well  aware  that  it  was  Shishir 
Kumar  who  turned  the  tide  of  popular  belief  in 
favour  of  the  noble  teachings  of  this   the   latest 
Prophet  and  re-established  the  claims  of   "Bhakti- 
yoga." 

From  his  verv  bovhood  Shishir  Kumar  was  a 
lover  of  humanity.  In  conjunction  with  his 
brothers  he  inaugurated  an  association  called 
"Bhratri-Samaj."  the  chief  aim  of  which  was  to 
raise  subscriptions  to  defray  the  expenses  of  a 
dispensary  and  hospital,  which  they  hao."  c&a. 
blished  in  their  native  village.  Indeed,  his  idea 
was  to  make  his  village  a  model  one  in  every 
respect,  to  cultivate  self-help,  co-operation  and 
brotherhood  amongst  the  villagers.  And  in  loving 

4 


LIFE    SKETCH 

memory  of  his  mother,  he  changed  the  name  of  his 
village  to  Amrita   Bazar  after  the   name    of   his 
mother      "  Amritamoyee."      With     indefatigable 
efforts,  the  brothers  headed  by  Shishir  Kumar  also 
founded   some    Brahmo   churches,    girls  schools, 
night  schools   for     cultivators,   as     also    a    high 
English  school   and    a  post    office-      So  greatly 
imbued    were   the    brothers     with    humanitarian 
principles  that  careless   of  catching  the  contagion 
during  epidemics  of  cholera,  they  would,  under 
his  leadership,  go  about  in  the  village  with  supplies 
of  medicines  and  thus  greatly  help — in  lowering 
the  rate  of  mortality.     For  all  this,    Babu   Shishir 
Kumar  was  highly   eulogised   in   several  official 
reports  of  Mr.  James  Munro,  the  then  Collector  of 
Jessore,  who  was  a  great  friend  of  Shishir  Kumar 
and  often  visited  the  village  to  watch  its  onward 
progress.     Indeed,  so  struck   was    Mr.  Munro  by 
the  growing  importance  of  the  village,  that  he  at 
one  time  agreed  with  Babu  Shishir  Kumar,  when 
requested  by  him  to  remove  the   headquarters  of 
the  district  to  that  village. 

The  journalistic  career  of  Shishir  Babu  com- 
menced in  the  small  village  of  Magura.  He  was 
» L-isax^l^eighteen  years  old  when  he  contributed  a 
series  of  articles  to  the  "Hindu  Patriot"  protesting 
against  the  oppression  of  ryots  by  the  all-powerful 
indigo  planters.  These  letters  created  great  sensa- 
tion among  the  local  authorities.    Mr.  Molony,  the 

5 


SHISHIR    KUMAR  GHOSE 

District  Magistrate  -of  Jessore,  threatened  to 
prosecute  him  if  he  did  not  cease  writing.  But  he 
continued  his  mission  undauntedly,  and  so  great 
was  his  desire  for  serving  his  motherland,  that  at 
last,  he  was  able  to  liberate  the  helpless  ryots  from 
the  hands  of  the  despotic  planters.  Some  of  these 
articles  of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  found  their  way 
into  the  Indigo  Commission's  report,  and  they 
display  his  remarkable  sagacity,  strong  com- 
monsense,  power  of  expression  and  clear,  scathing 
style  and  mastery  over  the  English  language  even 
in  those  days  when  he  was  a  mere  stripling. 

The  names  of  Messrs.  Munro  and  O'Kinealy 
are  very  intimately  connected  with  the  life  of  Babu 
Shishir  Kumar  Ghose.  It  was  at  their  instance 
and  under  them  that  Shishir  Babu  served  for  a 
time  as  a  Deputy  Collector.  At  this  time  he  was 
able  to  introduce  many  valuable  reforms  in  his 
own  native  district.  But  a  man  of  strong  in- 
dependence, he  did  not  long  find  Government 
service  to  his  liking.  So  he  gave  up  his  appoint- 
ment and  started  a  newspaper,  the  "Amrita  Bazar 
Patrika",  after  the  name  of  his  village.  The  initial 
difficulties  which  Shishir  Babu  had  to  contend 
with  in  order  to  make  his  paper  a  success-  aflw*»«=: 
well-known  to  bear  repetition  here.  However, 
if  his  village  had  so  long  its  dispensary,  post 
office,  various  schools  and  associations  and  a  fully 
equipped  market,  it  now  had  the  proud   distinc- 

6 


LIFE    SKETCH 

tion  of  having  a  printing  press  and  a  newspaper, 
a  glorious  position  for  a  Bengal  village  in  the 
interior  in  those  days,  unconnected  by  railways, 
and  which  even  many  towns  at  the  time  could  not 

boast  of. 

It  has  now  grown  into  a  household  story  in 
this  part  of  the  country,  and  everyone  knows  that 
the  "Patrika"  was  first  started  with  only  a  wooden 
printing  press,  without  a  compositor  or  even  a 
pressman,  and  that  Shishir  Babu  had  to  do  every- 
thing- sinsrlehanded  as  did  Bennett  in  the  early 
days  of  the  "New  York  Herald".  But  still  during 
the  government  of  Lord  Lytton  and  Sir  Ashley 
Eden  when  the  Vernacular  Press  Act  was  passed, 
—and  it  is  an  open  secret  now  that  the  slowgrind- 
ing  legislative  machinery  was  thus  moved  to  stifle 
this  paper  to  death  in  infancy, — Shishir  Kumar 
converted  it  within  a  single  night  from  a  heb- 
domadal to  an  English  weekly  to  the  mortifica- 
tion of  his  enemies,  to  his  own  safetv,  and  to  the 
admiration  of  both  the  people  and  the  Govern- 
ment. The  birth  of  the  "Amrita  Bazar  Patrika'' 
marks  an  epoch  in  the  journalistic  life  of  India. 
The  "Patrika"  may  not  be  the  oldest  paper  in 
^jvcTutftry,  but  it  is  undoubtedly,  so  far  as  Indian 
politics  is  concerned,  the  oldest  usherer  of  a  new 
light.  The  late  poet  Nobin  Chunder  Sen,  wrote 
in  his  autobiography,  "whatever  heavy  sighs  I 
have  heaved  and  whatever  tears  1  have  shed  for 

7 


SHISHIR  KUMAR   GHOSE 

the  love  of  my  motherland,  in  my  short  poems  on 
Jessore  and  the  battle  of  Plassey,  to  some  extent 
they  are  the  outcome  of  my  association  with  and 
instructions  from  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose. 
He  and  his  "Patrika"  are  the  pioneers  of  patriotism 
in  our  country". 

The  "Patrika"  soon  grew  into  something-  like 
a  terror  for  the  European  authorities,  made  a  name 
for   itself   and    became    noted    for  being   honest, 
upright    and    independent     in     views.      For    the 
amusement  of  the  reader,  we  give  here  a  petty 
incident  of  its  early  career.     It  so  happened  once 
that  a  certain  bund  was  being  forcibly  cut  by  some 
indigo  planters.     The  ryots  stood  up  against  this, 
as  it  meant  a  great  loss  to  them.     They  applied 
to  the  Magistrate,  who  appointed  one  Mr.  Mitra, 
a  police  Inspector,  to  look  into  the  matter.    The 
latter,  on  reaching  the  spot  requested  the  European 
planters    who  were  disturbing  the    peace  of  the 
village,  not   to  do  so,  as  it  was  the  order  of  the 
Magistrate.     The  haughty  planters  made  light  of 
Inspector  Mitra's  warning.  There  upon  the  officer 
arrested  some    of    them.     This  greatly  surprised 
them  and  they  enquired  if  the  Inspector  belonged 
to  the  "Patrika"  party.  This  story  only  lllust.i'aTks 
the  'fearless  conduct  of   the    "  Patrika  "  and  the 
wholesome  terror  it  inspired  in  even  an  important 
and   powerful  body  like  the  planting  community. 
Such  instances  may  be  multiplied  almost  ad  infi- 

8 


LIFE  SKETCH 

nitum  but  our  limited  space  does  not  permit  this 
extravagance. 

The  "  Patrika  "  was   hardly  more  than  four 
months     old,    when    a   libel   suit  was   instituted 
against  it  by  a  European  Deputy  Magistrate.     It 
lasted  eight  months   and  ruined   the   proprietors 
financially.     But  the  successful  advocacy  of  that 
well-know  criminal  lawyer,  Mr.  Monmohan  Ghose, 
on  behalf  of  Shishir  Babu,  led  to  his  acquittal.  It, 
however,   proved   a  blessing  in   disguise,    for  it 
secured  great   popularity   to   the   paper.  At  this 
time  malaria  broke  out  in  Jessore  in  so  '  virulent 
a  form  that  Shishir  Babu  had   to  leave  his  ever 
dear  Magura  for  Calcutta.  Notwithstanding  many 
inconveniences    and     pecuniary    difficulties,    the 
"  Patrika  "  now  gradually   became  an    influential 
organ  of  public  opinion  in  Bengal  and  caused  a 
great  stir  in  the  country.  Mr.  Caine  wrote  in  his 
biography  of  Shishir  Babu  ;  "The  brilliant  editing 
of  the  paper  by  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose,  who  almost 
killed  himself  by  hard  work  and  anxiety  quickly 
brought  it  back   to    its  old    issue,  and  eventually 
far  beyond  it,  until  it  became  the  most  influential 
newspaper  in  Bengal,  and  probably  in  all  India, 
"vttieYe  it  circulates  from   the   Himalayas  to  Cape 
Comorin.    For  thirty  years  it  has  been  one  of  the 
most  potent  factors  in  Indian  society  and  politics; 
and  during  that  period  there  has  been  no  solid 
and  lasting  reform,  which  does  not  owe  much  to 

9 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

its  influence  and  advocacy.  To  my  mind,  it  is 
the  most  courageous  and  outspoken  journal  in  all 
India.  It  is  read  by  the  Viceroy  and  his  Council, 
and  is  alike  the  organ  of  Indian  prince  and  Indian 
peasant." 

Under  the  auspices  of  the  Strachey  Brothers 
with  a  view  evidently  to  undermine  the  Perman- 
ent Settlement  in  Bengal,  the  Government  of  Lord 
Mayo  imposed  a  new  cess  upon  the  land,  still 
known  as  the  Road  Cess.  Sir  George  Campbell 
created  two  new  classes  of  subordinate  executive 
officers  named  Sub-Deputies  and  Kanungoes,  and 
lowered  the  position  of  judges  by  what  is  known 
as  the  system  of  parallel  promotion.  The  then 
Law  Member,  Sir  J.  Stephen,  by  the  introduction 
of  his  Criminal  Procedure  Code,  made  the  Police 
all-powerful  in  the  country.  All  these  resulted  in 
violent  agrarian  riots  in  Pabna.  The  "Patrika" 
manfully  stood  against  these  measures;  and  as 
the  other  papers  of  Calcutta  were  quite  innocent 
of  any  Moftussil  experience,  it  devolved  upon  it 
to  vehemently  attack  these  measures  and  lay  bare 
their  hollowness  and  undesirability. 

It  was  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  who  first  intro- 
duced cartoons  and  skits  in  Indian  joirrn 
His  skit,  "  Political  Geometry  ",  created  such  a 
tremendous  sensation  that  scores  of  Civilians 
purchased  the  issue  in  which  it  appeared.  The 
•'Hindu   Review"  says:     "The   "Patrika"  came 

10 


LIFE   SKETCH 

to  special  prominence  under  the  Lieutenant 
Governorship  of  Sir  George  Campbell,  (1870-73), 
whose  attempt  to  restrict  higher  education  with 
the  avowed  object  of  diverting  the  public  funds, 
thus  set  free,  to  the  diffusion  of  primary  education, 
aroused  opposition  from  the  educated  class.  And 
in  their  criticism  of  Sir  George  Campbell's  act  and 
policy,  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  and  his 
brothers, — for  the  "Patrika"  has  always  been  a 
journalistic  joint  family, — adopted  a  tone  of  biting 
satire  and  undisguised  abuse,  which  first  shook 
people's  nerves  somewhat  violently,  and  then 
gradually  put  a  new  courage  and  self-conscious- 
ness into  them  ". 

He  was  a  past  master  in  pun  and  lampoon, 
railery  and  repartee.  Ready  wit,  rugged  force, 
caustic  satire,  and  native  humour  ran  through 
all  his  writings,  and  the  gems  that  thus  glistened 
in  his  productions  were  of  such  real  lustre  as 
to  have  hardly  their  equal  in  the  writings  of  any 
other  we  can  think  of.  The  simplicity  of  his  style 
and  the  originality  of  happy  expression  were  the 
marked  features  of  his  literary  productions. 

His  power  of  reply  and  repartee  was,  again, 
ma-fvo9l<5us,  whether  it  was  the  "pioneer"  or  the 
"Times,''  no  other  paper  ever  got  the  better  of 
the  "  Patrika "  in  this  respect.  In  logic  and, 
debating  powers  also  he  stood  out  unique. 

Gradually  Shishir  Kumar  began  to  grow  more 

11 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

and  more  popular  in  the  country.     He  joined  the 
British    Indian     Association     and    soon    became 
acquainted  with  all  its  members.     But  very  shortly 
afterwards,    he   found   that   the  Association   was 
more  a  show  than  a  really  useful  institution,  and 
so  he  made  up  his  mind  to  make  it  truly  powerful. 
He  proposed  to  Rai  Kristo  Das  Pal  Bahadur  and 
others  that  the  subscription  should    be    reduced 
from  Rs.  50  to  Rs.  5  per  annum,  so  as  to   come 
within  the  reach  of  the  middle    classes,  but  his 
suggestion  was  not  listened  to.     So  he  founded 
another  Association  called  the  "Indian   League," 
with  which  the  names   of  many  great  men,   such 
as  Sir  Rash   Behari  Ghose,  the  late  Mr.  Ananda 
Mohan  Bose,    Babu    Kali  Charan   Banerji,    Hem 
Chunder    Banerji,    Grish    Chunder     Ghose     (the 
dramatist)  and  Sir  Romesh  Chunder  Mitter,  were 
very  closely  connected.     It  was  a  creation  of  Mr. 
Ghose's  own  brain,  and  let  a  distinguished    Euro- 
pean say  what  it  achieved   "  'The  Indian  League' 
is   identified   in  the  social    and  political   develop- 
ment of  India,  with  many  most  important  reforms, 
notably   that   of  trial  by  jury,  and  the  Municipal 
system,  which  containing  the  germs  of  represen- 
tative government,  led  on  to  the  establis-ntffui*  of- 
the  elective  system  municipally  as  well  as  in  its 
higher   development   of   elected    members  of  the 
Provincial  and  Viceregal  Councils." 

As  will  be  clear  from  the  above,  Shishir  Kumar 

12 


LIFE  SKETCH 

was  really  the  founder  of  the   present  system    of 
Council   Government  in   India.   Let   us  now  say 
how    it  came   about.   A   grand  meeting,    to    dis- 
cuss  the   advantages    of   the   municipal  elective 
system,    of    the  Indian   League   was  held  under 
the    presidency    of  Babu   Kali    Charan  Banerji. 
The    proceedings    attracted     the    notice    of    his 
Honour  Sir  Richard  Temple,  the  then  Lieutenant 
Governor   of    Bengal.     The     latter    called    upon 
Shishir   Babu  and   asked  him   it  he  was  willing 
that    the   elective  system  should  be  introduced  in 
the   municipal   bodies  in  the  country.    And    this 
was  the   first  time  but  by  no  means  the  last  that 
Shishir  Kumar   had  the  opportunity  of  having  an 
interview   with  the  governor  of  the  province.  To 
make  matters  clear,  let  us  quote  here  a  few  lines 
from   the    conversation  that  took  place   between 
Shishir  Babu  and  His  Honour  on  this  memorable 
occasion  : — 

L.  G. — So  you  want  the  elective  system?  Do 
you  think  the  citizens  are  fit  for  such  a  boon  ? 
S. — Yes,  your  Honour,  quite  fit. 
L.  G. — You  see,  I  am  agreeable.  But  if  I 
grant  you  the  privilege,  there  will  be  such  astrom 
GV'opposition,  that  the  Government  of  India  will 
be  obliged  to  go  against  me. 

S. — Will  it  please  your  Honour,  if  I  say,  that 
India  must  have  the  beginning  of  self-government, 
and  your  Honour  must  be  the  man  to  initiate  it? 

13 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

L.  G. — Well,  I  shall  take  the  risk,  but  see  that 
the  middle  classes  join  you  in  a  body.  Let  us 
have  the  entire  middle  classes  on  our  side. 

S. — I  shall  induce  every  voter  in  Calcutta  to 
support  your  Honour.  We  have  the  largest  house- 
owner,  Hiralal  Seal,  on  our  side. 

As  expected,  a  vehement  attack  was  made  by 
the  British  Indian  Association  and  the  Anglo- 
Indian  community.  But  in  the  words  of  Mr.  W.  S. 
Caine,  it  may  be  said,  "mainly  by  the  help  of 
Shishir  and  "  Amrita  Bazar  Patrika",  it  was 
carried  out  in  the  face  of  the  fierce  opposition". 

Babu  Shishir  Kumar  was  the  pioneer  also  in 
the  matter  of  technical  education  in  India,  and 
the  way  in  which  he  brought  into  being  the  Albert 
Temple  of  Science  was  something  miraculous.  For 
some  time  past  Shishir  Babu  had  been  advocating 
the  cause  of  technical  education  in  India.  Now 
somehow  he  had  come  to  know  that  Babu  Harish 
Chunder  Roy  of  Mymensingh  was  willing  to 
contribute  Rs.  50,000  towards  the  improvement 
of  his  scheme,  if  only  the  Lieut.  Governor  would 
ask  him  to  do  so ;  and  that  at  Berhampur  there 
were  two  brothers,  named  Lachmipat  and 
Dhanpat  who  were  being  compelled  "bv"  Wr. 
Mackenzie,  the  District  Magistrate,  to  pay  Rs. 
50,000  each  for  the  Berhampur  College.  Shishir 
Kumar  thought  over  all  this  and  began  to  devise 
means  to  secure  the  money  so  as  to  materialise 

14 


LIFE    SKETCH 

his  ideas  into  a  fiat  accompli.  He  at  last  started 
for  Belvedere  the  residence  of  the  Lieut.  Gover- 
nor. It  was  9  o'clock  in  a  winter  evening-  that 
he  waited  upon  Sir  Richard.  It  was  in  fact  the  eve 
of  Prince  Albert's  visit  to  Calcutta.  Let  us 
reproduce  here  the  conversation  he  had  with  his 
host  for  the  edification  of  our  readers  : — 

S. — The  Prince  is  coming  to-morrow  early  in 
the  morning  and  your  Honour  is  going  to  Diamond 
Harbour  to  receive  him  ? 

Sir  Richard. — Yes. 

S. — No  sooner  does  the  Prince  come,  you  will 
be  lost  to  us,  for  you  will  be  too  busy  with  him. 
We  want  to  commemorate  the  Royal  visit  by 
establishing  the  most  needed  institution  in  the 
country,  a  technical  college. 

Sir  Richard. — Yes,  a  technical  college  is  the 
need  of  the  country.  But  you  will  need  a  large 
sum  of  money.     Have  you  secured  it? 

S.  Almost. — Only  if  your  Honour  will  be  so 
good  as  to  help  me. 

Sir  R. — In  what  way  ? 

S. — Babu  Harish  Chunder  Ray  of  Mymen- 
singh  and  Messrs.  Lachmipat  and  Dhanpat  of 
BeihcuUfmr  are  each  willing  to  contribute  Rs. 
50,000.  Your  Honour  may  tell  them  that  this  is 
the  best  way  to  use  the  money. 

Sir  R. — Very  well,  if  they  come  to  me,  I  may 
persuade  them. 

15 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

S. — But  you  are  going  away  to-morrow  at 
6  A.  M.  My  plan  is  this.  It  is  now  9.  30  P.  M.  If 
you  will  kindly  give  me  letters  to  the  three  gentle- 
men asking  them  to  see  you  before  6  A.  M.  in  the 
morning,  I  will  arrange  the  rest. 

Sir  Richard  smiled  and  said  : — What  you 
suggest  is  improper  from  the  beginning  to  the 
end.  I  don't  know  them.  Yet  I  am  required 
privately  to  ask  them  to  come.  When  they  come, 
I  am  to  ask  them  to  oblige  me  by  contributing 
Rs  50,000/-  each.  It  would  be  highly  improper 
for  me  to  interfere  with  the  arrangements  that 
Mr.  Mackenzie  has  made  with  his  people  for  the 
improvement  of  a  college  in  his  district. 

At  last,  however,  Shishir  Babu  was  able  to 
prevail  upon  the  Lieut.  Governor,  and  a  meeting 
under  his  presidency  was  held  in  the  premises  of 
the  National  Theatre  and  the  former's  efforts  were 
crowned  with  success  to  the  great  mortification  of 
his  opponents.  The  Albert  Temple  was  establish- 
ed, and  got  a  subside  of  Rs.  8,000-  per  annum 
from  the  Government. 

Sir  Richard  Temple  was  succeeded  by  Sir 
Ashley  Eden.  He  was  a  man  of  peculiar  whims. 
He  did  not  like  the  bold  tone  of  the'  "*?irmrita 
Bazar  Patrika"  and  so  he  wanted  to  moderate  it 
by  converting  it  into  a  Government  paper.  He 
had  already  won  to  his  side  Babu  Kristo  Das  Pal 
of  the  "Hindu  Patriot"  and  other  Bengali  leaders 

16 


LIFE  SKETCH 

and  he  thought  it  quite  easier  to  buy  off  Shishir 
Babu,  who  was  then  living  a  hand-to-mouth  exist- 
ence and  had  to  support  a  large  family  of  some  30 
members.  Dear  readers,  think  for  a  moment  the 
situation  !  On  the  one  hand  was  the  tempi  ing 
offer  of  Sir  Ashley  Eden  at  a  time  of  stress  and 
struggle,  and  on  the  other,  his  duties  to  his  mother- 
land. He,  however,  never  gave  any  thought  to 
the  former  but  decided  in  favour  of  the  latter. 
Here  are  some  extracts  from  the  conversation  that 
followed  between  His  Honour  and  Shishir  Babu: — 
Sir  A. — I  know  you  are  a  friend,  and  so  I 
shall  make  no  ceremony  with  you.  I  say,  why 
do  you  abuse  us  in  that  way  ?  That  I  am  a  friend 
of  the  Bengalees  is  well-known.  So  Lord  North- 
brook  showed  me  some  of  your  articles  which  were 
so  abusive  that  I  did  not  know  what  to  say.  I 
had  to  hang  down  my  head  in  shame. 

S. — Your  Honour  says  that  we  have  been 
abusive,  but  pardon  my  impertinence.  I  chal- 
lenge anyone  to  show  one  abusive  expression  in 
our  writings.  Besides,  the  law  keeps  the  most 
reckless  newspapers  in  the  land  in  check.  It  we 
had  written  anything  seditious,  the  Government 
woulcf'lfiave  pounced  upon  us.  Since  the  Gov- 
ernment has  not  ever  meddled  with  us,  that  is  a 
proof  that  we  are  in  our  writings  always  within 
the  bounds  of  law. 

Sir  A. — The  Government   is    very  gencous 

17 
S— 2 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

and  you  take  advantage  of  its  generosity. 

S. — But  can  your  Honor  point  out  any  expres- 
sion which  is  abusive,  scurrilous,  or  even  imperti- 
nent ? 

Sir  A.— Oh!  You  mean  that  you  don't  use 
abusive  terms.  I  know  that  you  are  very  "chalak" 
(clever)  in  that  respect.  You  don't  call  us  rob- 
bers, thieves,  cheats,  and  murderers,  or  as  many 
other  words.  But  one  can  see  at  a  glance,  by 
going  through  your  writings,  that  you  mean 
nothing  else.  Lord  North  brook  showed  me  some 
of  your  former  issues  which  he  kept  in  his  box. 

In  this  way  Sir  Ashley  tried  to  seduce  Shishir 
Kumar,  but  the  latter  was  so  strong  and  so  deter- 
mined that  it  was  found  impossible  to  make  him 
deviate  from  the  right  path.  When  the  Lieutenant 
Governor  received  the  curt  reply  that  Shishir 
Kumar  did  not  care  for  the  promised  privileges 
and  that  famous  retort  that  there  should  be  at 
least  one  honest  journal  in  the  country,  he  became 
sored  with  anger  that  he  even  did  not  hesitate 
to  hold  out  threats  to  the  latter.  "  Mind  this," 
said  he  "in  six  months  I  shall  drive  you  away  from 
Calcutta."  He  now  kept  his  word  so  far  as  to 
withdraw  the  grant  that  had  been  madefy  his 
predecessor  to  the  Albert  Temple  of  Science,  while 
it  was  at  this  time,too,that  the  vernacular  Press  Act 
(that  new  fetter  on  Sir  Ashley's  legislative  anvil) 
was  passed  to  ruin  the  editor  of  the  "Patrika." 

18 


LIFE    SKETCH 

It  would,  indeed,  be  a  mistake  to  suppose  that 
the  influence  of  the  "Patrika"  was  at  this  or  any 
other  time  confined  to  Bengal  alone.     As  the  late 
Mr.  Caine  used  to  say,  "the  "Patrika"  is  alike  the 
organ   of  Indian  Prince  and  Indian  peasant"  and 
so  really  it  was.     Every  educated  Indian  knows 
that  it  was  Shishir  Babu  and  his  paper  that  came 
to  the  rescue  of  Mulhar  Rao   Gaekwar  when  he 
was   sought  to    be    ruined    by    Col.   Phayre,  by 
showing  that   according  to  its  own  promise  the 
Government  was  not  justified  in  interfering  with 
the  internalaffairs  of  a  Native  State.  It  was,  again, 
Shishir  Babu  who  wrote  vigorously  advocating  the 
cause  of  the   Dowagar    Rani   of  Rewa  and   the 
Begum  of  Bhopal  against  Sir  Lepel  Griffin  ;  and 
he  was  at  last  successful  in  securing  justice  by 
bringing  the  case  to   the  notice  of  Lord  Dufferin. 
In  short,  the  "  Patrika  "  appeared  to  have  become, 
by  this  time,  the  mouth-  piece  of  Indian  princes. 
The  services  of  Shishir  Babu  in  connection  with 
the  Beames  and  Gilgit  affairs  are  too  well-known 
to  need  repetition.     It    must,  however,  be   said, 
that  it  was  to  his  friend,  Mr.  Charles  Bradlaugh, 
a  distinguished  and  influential  M.  P.,  that  some  of 
the    successes  were  due.  His  friends  in  England 
in  those   days   were   Messrs.    Bradlaugh,   Caine, 
William,  Digby  and  W.  T.  Stead. 

When  on  his  arrival  here  in  India  as  Viceory 
and  Governor  General,  Lord  Ripon  expressed  his 

19 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

svmpathy  with  the  Indian  mill-owners,  it  was  the 
"Patrika"  that  opposed  this  view  of  His  Excellency, 
on  the  ground  that  the  people  of  India  should 
first  be  given  the  opportunity  of  saving  their 
lives  and  then  of  saving  their  time.  But  afterwards 
Shishir  Babu  came  to  realise  the  noble  character 
and  high  ideals  of  Lord  Ripon  and  not  ^nly 
became  a  great  friend  of  His  Excellency  but  very 
much  influenced  his  administration.  Mr.  Primrose, 
his  Private  Secretary,  was  also  a  great  friend  of 
Shishir  Babu.  The  Allahabad  Criminal  Case,  the 
Webb  Case, '  and  the  subsequent  Viceregal 
resolution  on  them  clearly  testify  to  the  influence 
of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  over  Lord  Ripon's 
Government.  It  is  well  known  that  Lord  Ripon 
introduced  self-government  in  India,  but  very 
few  people  know  that  the  subject  of  this  sketch 
was  his  right-hand  man  in  this  connection:  On 
the  eve  01  his  Lordship's  departure  from  India» 
Shishir  Kumar  with  folded  hands,  bent  his  knees 
before  Lord  Ripon,  and  prayed  :  "My  Lord,  you 
can  oblige  me  eternally  by  granting  my  people 
the  privilege  of  trial  by  jury."  Lord  Ripon  replied, 
"  my  'Jear  sir,  rise  and  oblige  me.  You  pain  me 
very  much.  I  have  already  given  up  cha'^e,  and 
I  cannot  do  anything  now.  Very  well,  I  promise 
I  shall  speak  to  Lord  Dufferin  about  it." 

It   is   impossible  to  show   by    instances,  in  a 
small    compass,    what     towering    influence    the 

20 


LIFE    SKETCH 

-•Patrika''  used  to  possess  at  the  hands  of  Babu 
Shishir  Kumar.  In  the  memorial  meeting  of  Babu 
S.  K.  Ghose  held  after  his  death  at  the  Town 
Hall  of  Calcutta,  Dr.  S.  K.  Mullick  related  a 
story.  He  said  that  during  his  long  stay  in  London 
whenever  he  paid  a  visit  to  the  India  Office,  he 
found  all  the  Indian  and  English  newspapers 
lying  on  the  table,  but  he  always  missed  the 
"Patrika."  On  enquiring  this  fact  of  Mr.  Onslow, 
the  then  Under-Secretary,  he  was  told  that  the 
"Patrika,''  as  it  gave  a  true  and  reliable  version 
of  Indian  affairs  from  the  peoples  point  of  view 
was  preserved  in  a  special  file  for  use  of  the 
Secretary  of  State.  Indeed,  the  "Patrika'  was 
conducted  on  such  original  lines  that  it  always 
was  a  perennial  source  of  delight  not  only  to  its 
Indian  but  European  readers.  Many  Europeans 
used  to  read  it  to  enjoy  the  wordy  battles  that 
continuously  went  on  between  the  "Patrika''  and 
the  then  influential  Anglo-Indian  papers,  and  to 
their  mortification  the  indomitable  and  sharp-wit- 
ted "  Patrika''  could  never  be  cornered,  on  the 
other  hand  the)*  were  always  made  the  laughing 
stock  of  the  public  by  superior  talents  of  Babu 
Shishirlvumar.  A  beautiful  skit  published  in  the 
"Parsee  (new  Hindi)  Punch"  at  the  time  very 
properly  explained  the  situation.  Babu  Shishir 
Kumar  was  depicted  as  a  snake-charmer  and 
the    "Pioneer"    and  the    "Times  of  India''   were 

21 


SHISHIR    KUMAR  GHOSE 

represented  by  two  big  hooded  snakes  who  were 
being  played  by  the  charmer  to  the  sound  of  his 
flute  (tumri). 

When  the  illustrious  Mr.  Hume  was  forming 
schemes  in  his  mind  to  weld  India  into  a  nation  by 
the  organisation  of  a  national  assembly,  he  came 
to  Mr.  Ghose  to  take  his  counsel  on  this  matter. 
The  latter  requested  him  to  infuse  that  idea  into 
the  minds  of  the  masses,  and  he  promised  Mr. 
Hume  to  show  the  way  of  doing  it.  The  Jhinker- 
gacha  Mass  Meeting  of  the  13th.  March  1886,  was 
a  practical  example  of  what,  Shishir  aimed  at.  It 
was  quite  a  new  departure  in  the  politics  and 
political  methods  of  India  and  was  so  successful 
in  essentially  teaching  the  general  public  to  learn 
to  take  an  interest  in  their  country  and  its  affairs 
that  it  proved  quite  alarming  to  the  opponents  of 
Indian  progress  and  so  famous  it  became  that 
even  mention  was  made  about  it  in  some  Ameri- 
can and  English  journals,  at  a  time  when  Indian 
affairs  scarcely  came  in  for  any  notice  in  them. 
Mr.  Ranade  had  come  to  pay  a  visit  to  the  Editor 
of  the  "Patrika";  and  he  said  that  Lord  Dufferin 
was  of  opinion  that  it  was  aimed  at  doing  a  great 
thing,  but  failed  to  do  it  owing  to  the  ne^ject  of 
his  countrymen. 

The  above  is  only  a  short  sketch  of  the  politi- 
cal life  of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose.  It  is  very 
difficult  to   judge  the  man  from  this  brief  resume, 

22 


LIFE  SKETCH 

but  still  we  fervently  hope,  the  reader  will  be  able 
to  form  some  slight  idea  of  him.  The  biography 
of  Shishir  Kumar  should  itself  prove  a  mine  of 
Indian  political  information  and  contain  a  full 
account  of  the  Indian  administration  and  the 
reforms  introduced  by  Lords  Northbrook,  Lytton, 
Ripon,  Dufferin  and  others;  and  when  one  such 
comes  to  be  written  the  world  will  see  how  this 
great  man  was  able  to  influence  all  these  high 
officials  and  thereby  contributed  his  share  to  the 
building  of  the  Indian  nation. 

Babu  Shishir  Kumar  was  a  voluminous  writer. 
He  has  written  on  every  conceivable  subject  and 
his  political  writings  are  so  exhaustive  and  of  such 
perennial  interest  that  they  are  always  a  source 
of  inspiration  and  guide  to  the  present  conductors 
of  the  "Patrika".  A  peculiar  vein  of  humour  and 
originality  runs  through  his  writings,  and  com- 
bined with  freshness  and  vigour  they  are,  of  endur- 
ing value.  Unfortunately,  however  only  some  of 
his  political  articles  have  been  embodied  in  a 
book  called  the  "  Indian  Sketches."  A  second 
volume  of  the  book  was  being  printed,  but  for 
obvious  reasons  the  attempt  was  given  up. 
Hund'/feUs  of  volumes  of  "Indian  Sketches''  can 
still  be  published  from  collection  of  articles  from 
the  old  files  of  the  "  Patrika  ". 

.   A  keen   observer  will  be  able  to   see  that  a 
certain  link  of  harmony  and  increasing  popularity 

23 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

extends  from  his  private  to  his  public  life,  i.e.  his 
life  as  father  or  guardian  of  a  family  to  his  life  as 
a  benefactor  of  his  countrymen  and  guardian  of 
their  interests.  It  is  true  that  there  are  some  men 
in  India  who  could  claim  greater  erudition  or 
wider  knowledge  of  the  world  besides,  but  none 
there  has  been  who  have  had  greater  insight  into 
the  pDlitical  position  and  needs  of  their  own  native 
land. 

We  shall  now  give  only  one  instance  to  show 
how  the  misery  of  men  moved  the  heart  of  Babu 
Shishir  Kumar  so  violently  that  he  would  not 
have  any  rest  till  he  found  some  remedy.  In  his 
younger  days  he  saw  a  horrible  death  by  snake- 
bite. The  painful  picture  always  troubled  his  mind 
till  after  20  years'  patient  labour  and  investiga- 
tion he  was  able  to  unearth  the  available  remedy 
and  place  it  before  the  public  in  the  form  of  a 
booklet  called  "  Snakes  :  Snake-bites  and  their 
treatment."  The  book  has  since  been  translated 
into  several  vernacular  languages  and  commands 
a  wide  sale.  We  cannot  resist  the  temptation  oi 
quoting  the  following  interesting  account  of  the 
snakes  in  Bengal  from  that  book : 

"I  was  sitting  with  the  Police  Officer  inTnarge 
of  the  station  at  Gopalnagore,  then  in  the  district 
of  Nuddea,  now  in  Jessore.  It  was  during  the 
great  flood  of  187 1.  I  had  sought  his  protection 
to  procure  me  a  boat  to  convey  me,  across  the  sea 

24 


LIFE  SKETCH 

of  water  which  surrounded  me,  to  my  destination. 

Just  then  intelligence  was  brought  to  us,  that 
a  troupe  of  malvadyas  have  caught  hundreds  of 
snakes,  in  a  village  close  by.  We  sent  for  them 
with  their  snakes,  and  they  came.  We  saw  the 
snakes  that  they  had  caught,  but  said  they  ;  "Will 
you  go  to  see,  Sir  ?  It  is  a  sight  to  see.  It  is  snakes 
and  snakes,  all  round.  We  have  never  seen  so 
many  together,  no  man  ever  did."  And,  as  a 
matter  of  fact,  we  saw  a  sight  which  has  been  the 
good  fortune  of  a  few  people  to  witness.  The 
sight  we  saw  will  never  fade  from  my  memory. 

We  soon  organized  an  expedition.  We  took 
three  mals.  The  Sub-Inspector  of  Police,  a  strong 
man,  took  his  doublebarrelled  gun.  We  entered 
the  boat  at  about  n  in  the  morning.  It  was  a 
small  boat,  and  was  rowed  by  two  men.  The 
current  was  favorable,  and  the  boat  ran  like  a  dog 
in  pursuit  of  a  jackal.  We  had  not  to  follow  the 
course  of  a  canal  or  a  river,  for  we  were  in  a  vast 
sheet  of  water.  It  would  have  looked  like  a  sea, 
but  for  the  trees  and  huts,  which  yet  shewed  their 
heads  above  water.  The  flood  was  then  at  its 
highest,  and  the  people  in  great  distress. 

We  took  the  straight  course  over  huts  and 
trees,  and  in  this  manner  we  crossed  the  village 
of  Gopalnagore.  We  then  entered  an  open  space, 
and  saw  in  the  dim  horizon  the  marsh  of  Choital, 
our  destination.     The  place  was  recognized  by  the 

25 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

presence  of  a  couple  of  tall  palm  trees.  We  rowed 
all  of  us,  and  though  the  tiny  boat  swang  to  and 
fro  by  our  vigorous  efforts  at  rowing,  we  had  not 
much  to  fear.  For,  by  a  pole  we  kept  measuring 
the  water  all  the  way,  and  though  it  was  deep 
here  and  there,  generally  our  passage  lay  over 
shallow  water. 

And  at  last  we  entered  the  heel  (marsh)  of 
Choital.  It  is  a  low  land  and  paddy  is  grown 
there,  but  here  and  there  were  high  spots,  where 
there  were  trees.  This  big  field  has  a  diameter 
of,  say,  six  miles.  It  is  all  plain  land,  with  the 
exception  of  a  few  trees  which  shewed  their  heads 
above  water.  On  the  first  tree  on  our  way,  we 
saw  only  a  few  snakes  and  an  iguana.  But  the 
mals  told  us  that  the  grand  scene  was  yet  before 
us. 

Before  us,  we  saw  in  that  vast  sheet  of  water, 
a  couple  of  palm  trees,  a  few  date  trees,  and  a 
banian  tree.  The  heads  of  the  palm  trees  were 
about  thirty  feet  above  water,  the  banian  tree 
covered  a  large  space  of  land,  and  the  date  trees 
only  shewed  their  leaves.  The  palm  trees  were 
examined  by  us  first.  We  saw  that  the  snakes 
have  coiled  round  the  trunks  of  these  trfEs  from 
the  bottom  to  the  top.  There  was  no  empty  space 
visible  on  the  trunks. 

At  the  bottom,  we  saw  a  few  kraits,  and  we 
saw  there   a  black  one  which  is  the  biggest  we 

26 


LIFE    SKETCH 

have  ever  seen.  But  though  we  saw  a  few  kraits 
and  a  few  black  snakes  here  and  there,  all  the 
others  were  only  keutas.  There  was  not  cobra 
there,  nor  any  hamadryad.  The  snakes  not  only 
coiled  round  the  trees,  but  were  found  to  have 
coiled  one  above  the  other.  It  was  thus  all  black 
from  bottom  to  top.  The  branches,  which  are 
thorny  in  palm  trees,  have  been  avoided,  but  the 
leaves  had  given  space  to  as  many  as  they  could 
hold.  We  did  not  disturb  them  in  their  position 
of  rest  in  the  palm  trees. 

From  there  we  proceeded  to  the   date  trees. 
All  the  leaves  were  covered  by  the  snakes.     The 
three  mals  stood  to  catch  them.     The  rower  who 
was  in  the  front  was   pushed  behind,   and  one  of 
the  mals  took  his  oar.     He   rowed  vigorously  and 
caught  a  branch  of  a   date   tree.     As  soon  as  he 
caught  the  branch,  thousands  of  keutas  fell  from 
it  into  the  water.     The  fellow  not  only  caught  the 
branch,  but  pulled   it,  and  the   head  of  our  small 
boat  was   thus  made   to    penetrate    through  the 
branches.     It   was  then    a  truly   exciting  scene* 
Hundreds  and  thousands  of  snakes  began  to  let 
themselves  drop  from  the   branches  in   the  water, 
and  our  boat  was  soon  surrounded  by  thousands 
of  swimming  keutas. 

The  Police  Officer  shrieked  in  anger  and 
terror,  "Let  go  the  boat,  you  haramjadas*  cried  he, 
,'they  will  soon  fill  our  boat."  But  I  was  enthralled 

27 


SHISHIR  KUMAR    GHOSE 

with  the  scene,  and  had  not  the  power  of  feeling 
any  terror.  The  mals  were  engrossed  in  the  work 
before  them,  and  they  had  no  ear  to  listen  to  the 
commands  of  the  officer.  They  buised  themselves; 
in  catching  the  snakes,  and  were  not  at  all  dis- 
posed to  remove  the  boat  from  the  position  which 
it  had  been  forced  to  take. 

In  a  second  or  two  the  swimming  snakes 
invaded  our  boat.  Of  course  it  was  not  their 
object  to  bite  or  swallow  us,  but  they  found  a 
floating  substance  in  our  boat,  and  they  wanted 
to  make  it  a  resting  place.  The  officer  was  stand- 
ing with  his  gun  in  his  hand,  and  I  told  him  to 
leave  it  and  take  a  pole  to  protect  the  boat  from 
the  snakes.  So  both  he  and  I  took  a  pole  each, 
and  so  also  did  each  of  the  boat  men.  The  snakes 
swam  all  around  us  with  only  their  heads  above 
water.  They  appeared  like  a  shoal  of  fish.  We 
began  to  splash  all  round  our  boat  with  the  poles, 
with  a  view  to  drive  them  away.  But  their  number 
was  too  many  for  us.  And  a  good  many  touched 
our  boat  in  spite  of  the  beating  of  the  water. 

They  tried  to  climb  the  boat,  but  they  could 
not.  They  could  not  raise  their  heads  much 
above  water;  and  it  is  altogether  doubtful, 
whether,  even  left  to  themselves,  they  could  climb 
the  boat.  But  surely  they  were  not  given  much 
time  to  make  the  effort.  The  boat  was  small ;  we 
were  standing   and  beating  the    water  with  our 

28 


LIFE  SKETCH 

poles;  the  mals  were  catching  the  snakes  ;  and 
all  these  made  the  tiny  thing  reel  like  a  drunken 
mehter,  and  prevented  the  snakes  to  gain  a  hold  of 
the  boat.     But  greater  danger  was  a-head  of  us. 

The  head  of  the  boat  had  penetrated  the 
dense  branches  of  the  date  tree,  and  the  mals 
were  catching  the  snakes.  They  were  not  catch- 
ing the  reptiles  at  random,  but  selecting  the  big- 
gest !  A  keuta  is  a  creature  which  is  rarely  met 
with.  A  mal  will  purchase  one  from  a  comrade 
for  more  than  rupees  ten.  But  here  they  had  such 
a  large  number  to  select  from,  that  they  avoided 
the  smaller  ones,  and  thought  only  of  catching 
the  biggest  which  they  could  reach. 

Now  their  attempt  to  catch  the  biggest  created 
more  than  one  serious  danger  for  us.  If  a  big 
snake,  which  they  had  fixed  their  eyes  upon  to 
catch,  was  not  accessible,  they  dragged  the  boat 
deeper,  and  this  took  our  tiny  vessel  almost  into 
the  bosom  of  the  branches  of  the  date  tree.  Just 
bear  in  mind  that  all  these  branches  had  keuta 
upon  them,  each  containing  hundreds  and  more. 
The  mals  were  catching  the  snakes;  the  branches 
of  the  tree  covered  the  boat  partially,  but  covered 
them  completely.  Keutas  hung  over  their  heads 
and  licked  their  foreheads.  Snakes  came  in  con- 
tact with  their  ears,  arms,  and  backs.  But  the 
viah  cared  not. 

When    the  boat    came  in    contact   with  the 

29 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

branches,  we  raised  an  alarm.  For  there  was 
nothing  to  prevent  the  snakes  creeping  over  the 
branches  and  entering  our  boat.  But  we  forgot 
our  own  danger  when  we  saw  to  which  the  mals 
had  subjected  themselves.  They  were  all  "  un- 
shaved"  keutas,  and  one  touch  of  their  fang  and 
the  strongest  man  would  have  dropped  down  dead 
on  the  spot  in  five  minutes !  These  snakes  sur- 
rounded the  mals.  Every  one  of  the  three  mals 
might  have  been  bitten  by  one  thousand  keutas  at 
that  moment. 

We  forgot  our  danger,  and  indeed  at  that 
moment  none  of  us,  the  mals  included,  was  in  his 
proper  senses.  I  recollect  seeing  a  keuta  licking 
the  fore-head  of  a  mal,  and  having  cried  aloud 
and  given  him  a  warning.  But  the  warning  had 
not  much  effect.  The  mal  only  lowered  his  head 
an  inch  or  so,  to  avoid  the  contact  of  the  tongue 
of  the  keuta.  One  of  them  muttered,  without 
however  stopping  in  his  work,  "No  fear,  Sir:  at 
such  times  they  do  not  bite/''  "But  they  do  bite," 
said  I,  "during  inundations."  "Yes,  but  if  they 
are  hurt,"  was  the  laconic  reply.  The  mals  de- 
ceived me  with  a  view  to  work  uninterruptedly. 
The  snakes  do  bite  during  floods,  button  that 
occasion,  th  e  sight  produced  extraordinary  excite- 
ment which  deprived  the  mals  of  their  senses. 
When  we  forgot  the  danger,  it  is  no  wonder  that 
they  should.     Besides,  they  had  gone  well  pro vi- 

30 


LIFE   SKETCH 

ded  with  lancets,  and  sone  cords.  Familiarity 
breeds  contempt,  and  the  mals  have  great  con- 
tempt for  these  reptiles.  On  that  occasion  this 
contempt  was  heightened  by  their  large  number. 

We  too  caught  the  contagion,  and  forgot 
temporarily  our  fear  of  the  snakes,  and  entered 
into  the  pleasures  of  the  exciting  work.  The 
snakes  swam  in  shoals  round  our  boat,  but  we 
became  indifferent  to  their  presence.  Those  in 
the  date  tree  had  an  easy  access  to  our  boat,  but 
we  gave  up  the  thought  of  driving  them  away. 
Every  minute  the  number  of  swimming  snakes 
was  increasing.  For,  hundreds  were  dropping 
down  from  the  branches  of  the  date  trees  every 
second,  and  the  heads  of  the  snakes  blackened 
the  water  all  around  us.  The  date  tree  shewed 
no  more  snakes — on  that  side  where  our  boat  was 
— except  a  few  small  ones  here  and  there. 

The  mals  then  wanted  to  go  to  the  other  side 
of  the  date  tree,  but  we  objected  and  desired  to  see 
the  banian  tree.  The  boat  was  turned  towards 
it,  and  we  rowed  over  shoals  of  snakes.  They 
tried  to  give  way  to  our  boat,  but  the  crowd  was 
so  great  that  they  could  not  move  at  their  plea- 
sure. When  we  left  the  date  tree,  a  athought  struck 
us  to  make  a  search  of  the  boat  to  see  whether 
any  snake  had  been  able  to  find  its  way  into  it  or 
not.  It  was  when  we  had  left  the  date  tree  that 
we  felt,  that  we  had  been  in  great  danger  so  long. 

31 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

The  banian  tree  was  quite  close,  and  its  big" 
trunk  was  about  three   feet  above   water.     J  ust 
above    the  trunk  there  were   two  big    branches 
stretching     slantingly     in     opposite     directions. 
Between  these  two  sat  a  wild  cat.     It  was  utterly- 
helpless,   and   was   surrounded   by  keutas   on  all 
sides.      But   he  lived   in   peace   with  them.     O  r 
rather  the  snakes  lived  in  peace  with  him.     As 
our  boat  approached  towards  the  tree.the  creatur  e 
looked  at  us  piteously,  and  the  sight  excited  my 
pity.     There  was  no  ferocity  of  the  wild  cat  in  his 
look.     But  bang  went  the  gun  and  the  cat  fell  in 
the  water  beneath.     While  I  was  gazing   at  the 
cat,  the  Sub-Inspector  was  steadying  his  aim  at  it 
from  behind,  from  the  moving  boat.     The  cat  fell, 
as  also  a  few  snakes,    shot  dead  or  wounded,  for 
the  gun  was  charged  with  small  shots. 

This  exploit  of  the  Police  Officer  I  did  net 
like,as  it  shewed  neither  courage  nor  any  delicacy 
of  feeling.  But  the  cat  was  only  wounded  if 
wounded  at  all,  for  it  reached  the  trunk  again, 
though  it  took  a  new  position  which  concealed  it 
from  our  view. 

We  gazed  at  the  tree — it  was  a  canopy  of 
snakes.  The  metis  wanted  to  catch  more  snakes 
but  I  opposed.  They  had  caught  enough,  and  no 
snake  could  be  caught  from  the  banian  tree 
without  incurring  serious  danger.  So  we  only 
gazed  at  the  snakes,  at  their  beauty,  their  variety, 

32 


LIFE  SKETCH 

and  their  movements.  As  for  their  doings,  they 
did  nothing.  They  coiled  round  the  branches, 
sometimes  one  above  the  other,  and  kept  quiet  and 
immovable.  The  beauty  of  their  heads  surpasses 
description  but  this  beauty  was  only  seen  when 
they  were  moving  about  or  raising  themselves 
up  in  anger  or  terror,  which  they  only  did  when 
teased  by  us.  The  variety  was  so  great  that  it 
seemed  to  us  that  each  snake  belonged  to  a 
separate  species.  One  had  a  yellow  hood,  the 
next  one  a  white,  and  the  next  a  white  and  red- 
dish, and  so  on.  The  colour  of  the  skin  also  differed 
in  this  manner.  The  kewias  have  no  doubt  more 
than  a  hundred  variety. 

While  gazing  at  the  snakes,  a  vial  cried  in 
excitement:  "Lo:  there  is  a  bara  bharee  samp  (very 
big  snake.)"  The  other  two  mals  saw  it  at  once, 
but  we  could  not.  It  was  on  a  branch  high  above 
our  heads.  We  could  not  however  identify,  which 
snake  was  meant.  But  while  we  were  looking  for 
the  "very  big  snake,"  one  of  the  mals  was  rowing 
the  boat  towards  the  trunk.  The  trunk  was 
reached,  and  he  caught  it,  left  the  boat,  and  began 
to  ascend  the  tree! 

No\v  this  we  could  not  permit.  The  man 
wanted  to  ascend  a  big  tree,  every  available  space 
of  which  was  covered  bv  the  most  deadlv  of  all 
snakes.  There  his  expertness  and  his  agility  would 
avail  him  little.     We  bawled  out  to  him  in  tones 

33 
S-3 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSL 

of  anger  to  come  down  instantly.  But  the  man 
said,  bara  bharee  samp,  and  paid  no  heed  whatever 
to  our  commands.  I  threatened  to  shoot  him  if  he 
did  not  come  down,  but  he  repeated,  "the  snake 
was  very  big,  Sir!  '  The  fact  is,  the  temptation 
before  him  was  great,  he  could  not  resist  it.  The 
mals  who  were  in  the  boat  were  intently  gazing  at 
the  snake,  and  muttering:  "he  won't  be  able  to 
catch  it.     Its  position  is  bad.'' 

But  my  eye  was  fixed  towards  whom  I  con- 
sidered the  doomt :-d  man.  As  he  moved  on  the 
branches,  there  was  a  rustle  amongst  the  snakes. 
A  good  many  fell  from  the  branches,  and  some 
moved  up  before  the  man.  These  disturbed  the 
others,  which  were  sleeping  quietly.  Some  find- 
ing their  progress  barred,  were  coming  back 
towards  the  man.  The  proceedings  of  the  man 
would  have  caused  amusement  if  the  matter  were 
not  serious.  He  wTas  moving  over  a  branch  in  all 
fours.  Now  he  sat  to  give  the  snakes  an  opportu- 
nity of  making  way  for  him.  When  the  way  was 
clear  for  a  few  paces,  he  advanced  a  little  and 
waited  again.  The  snakes  which  were  coming 
towards  him,  he  pushed  away  with  his  hands.  In 
this  manner  he  employed  his  feet  too.  But  the 
snakes  shewed  no  disposition  to  bite  him.  None 
raised  its  hood,  or  hissed  in  anger.  It  was  because 
they  were  not  touched.  Those  caught  in  the  date 
tree  shewed  a  good  deal  of  ferocity,  but  then  their 

34 


LIFE   SKETCH 

tails  had  been  caught.  In  the  banian  tree  none 
was  touched,  and  those  which  were  touched  were 
shoved  into  the  water. 

The  man  then  caught  hold  of  another  small 
branch.  It  was  on  the  branch  where  the  big  snake 
was.  He  began  to  crawl  over  it  with  great  care 
and  difficulty,  for  the  branch  was  small.  And 
then  we  saw  the  big  snake — it  was  a  jet  black 
keuta.  At  the  approach  of  the  mal,  the  snake 
shewed  signs  of  uneasiness,  and  then  it  moved. 
Just  as  it  was  eluding  his  hand,  the  mal  caught 
hold  of  the  tail.  If  the  snake  had  then  turned 
round  and  attacked  him,  the  only  way  of  saving 
himself  was  to  throw  it  down  below.  But  the 
snake  acted  otherwise.  There  was  a  small  branch 
before  it,  and  it  coiled  its  head  round  it,  and  held 
it  firmly.  The  mal  pulled  it  by  the  tail,  but  the 
snake  shewed  no  signs  of  giving  way.  The  man 
then  held  the  tail  by  both  the  hands  and  began  to 
pull  with  all  his  strength.  In  the  struggle  and 
under  the  excitement,  he  lost  his  balance. 

The  branch  was  about  sixteen  feet  above 
water,  and  he  fell  down  with  a  splash  into 
the  water  below.  There  was  silence  for  a  few 
seconds,  for  the  water  was  rather  deep  there, 
and  he  had  gone  to  the  very  bottom  by  his  fall 
from  such  a  height.  I  thought  it  was  all  over 
with  him,  but  he  rose  again.  He  was  not  cowed, 
but  was  on  the  contrary  in  the  highest  spirits,  and 

35 


SHISHIR    KUMAR  GHOSE 

he  cried  :  "  I  have  it,  here  it  is."  While  he  said 
this  lie  raised  his  hand,  which  had  clasped  the 
tail  of  the  snake  !  Surely  the  tail  was  in  his  grasp! 
Another  mal  from  the  boat  caught  the  tail  and 
dragged  the  snake  up.  The  third  held  it  in  the 
middle,  and  then  it  was  put  into  a  jar.  Under 
ordinary  circumstances  a  snake  like  that  would 
have  demanded  the  exertions  of  two  or  three  men 
to  catch  it.  But,  then,  fortune  was  against  it.  It 
was  caught  in  a  position  where,  none  of  its 
predecessors  perhaps  had  ever  been  caught. 
Talking  of  position,  it  had  every  advantage  over 
the  mal.  If  the  man  had  not  fallen  from  the  tree, 
the  snake  would  have  never  been  secured,  for  it 
was  not  in  the  power  of  the  mal  to  compel  a  big 
snake  like  that  to  let  go  its  hold  of  the  branch. 
And  then  in  the  water,  it  could  not  have  also  been 
caught.  But  the  fall  hurt  it,  for,  in  spite  of  its 
strength,  it  is  a  tender  creature  ;  and  in  spite  of 
its  ferocity,  it  is  usually  timid.  The  fall  hurt  it, 
and  gave  it  such  a  fright,  that  it  never  raised  its 
head  when  it  was  put  into  the  jar. 

I  came  back  to  Gopalnagore  at  about  4  P.  M. 
On  the  following  day  I  wrote  to  the  Lieutenant- 
Governor  of  Bengal,  to  the  Commissioner  of  the 
Nuddea  Division,  and  to  the  Magistrate  of  Nuddea 
to  take  prompt  measures,  for  the  destruction  of 
the  snakes.  I  wrote  to  them  that  at  a  trifling  cost 
Government    could    destroy,  millions   of  snakes. 

36 


LIFE    SKETCH 

The  Magistrate  asked  for  permission  of  the 
government  to  do  it,  and  the  latter,  wrote  to 
the  Magistrate  for  report.  At  last  it  was  admitted 
that  my  suggestion  deserved  consideration,  and 
the  cost  was  sanctioned.  But  then  the  flood  had 
subsided,  and  the  snakes  had  entered  their  holes! 
The  heel  of  Choital  is  to  this  day  notorious  for 
its  Keutas." 

True  perhaps   that  there   are    some  who   by 
virtue  of  birth  and  wealth,  rank  and  riches,  Govern- 
ment  titles  and  University  distinctions,  scientific 
training  and   forensic  skill,   pushing   nature  and 
power  of   gal  have  thrust   themselves  so  well  for- 
ward either  in  the  estimation  of  ihe  ruling  race  or 
the  notice  of  the  outside  world,   as   to   throw  him 
in  the  background ;    but  when    it   comes  to  the 
judging  of  any  man  by  the  standard  of  real  work- 
steep,  up  hill,  pioneer  work.and  of  genuine  untiring 
zeal  and  services  to  the  cause  of  his  country  and 
country   men,   it   is  Babu  Shishir  Kumar's  name 
that  occurs  first  and  foremost.     He  was  a  veritable 
patriarch,    a    veritable   patriot,   and    a     veritable 
spiritualist.  Dr.  James  Coates  a  well-known  author 
and   spiritualist   of   Scotland   writes   in  his   short 
sketch  of  Shishir  Babu  : 

Perhaps  one  of  the  most  interesting  points  in 
the  Babu's  career  to  us  is  that  he  is  a  veritable 
patriarch.  He  might  have  been  translated  from  the 
plains  of  Mamre  of  the  days  of  Abraham  to   the 

37 


SHISHIR  KUMAR  GHOSE 

India  of  to-day.  Although  a  modern  journalist, 
business  man,  dealer  in  landed  estates,  and  posses- 
sing several  interests  in  public  affairs,  he  is  also 
the  father — patriarch — of  one  of  the  largest  fami- 
lies in  India.  The  family  of  which  he  is  the  head 
consists  of  his  brothers,  their  wives,  children  and 
grandchildren  ;  of  his  own  direct  descendants, 
children  and  grand-children.  Add  to  these  the 
servants  and  hand-maidens  or  other  dependants 
of  the  several  distinct  branches,  all  dewelling 
within  the  s^me  compound,  sleeping  there  and 
messing — eating  at  the  same  tables,  or  whatever 
their  equivalent  may  be  in  the  true  Indian  home. 
But  this  is  not  all.  This  very  remarkable  family 
— the  members  of  which  are  spiritualists — are  co- 
operators,  all  working  or  interested  in  or  depend- 
ent on  the  various  enterprises  initiated  by  the 
head  of  this — probably  the  largest  family  of  the 
patriarchial  order  in  India  today-  Such  a  farmh- 
and such  a  community  of  interests,  where  all  are 
working  in  harmony,  for  the  good  of  each  and  all 
is  not  thinkable  by  us  with  our  ideas  of  family  life, 
yet  these  Hindus  do  so  in  love  and  harmony. 
The  secret  is  the  binding  influence  of  the  veritable 
patriarch's  moral  and  spiritual  power.  He  is 
regarded  by  his  family  and  by  large  numbers  of 
the  community  as  saint  on  account  of  his  ardent 
piety  and  lovableness  of  his  character.  There 
have  been   many  saints    in  history,  and  some  of 

38 


LIFE    SKETCH 

them  have  not  been  particularly  lovable.  Yet,  this 
man,  who  has  been  no  worker  of  miracles,  is 
revered  as  a  saint  by  his  country-men,  in  his  life 
time.  Probity  in  his  dealings,  marked  self-abne 
gation,  devotedness  to  the  welfare  and  happiness 
of  those  of  whom  he  is  the  family  head,  have 
brought  him  the  respect  and  high  merit  in  which 
he  is  esteemed.  That  he  was  an  intellectual  force 
there  is  no  doubt,  or  he  would  not  have  been 
honoured  by  the  government,  but  it  is  through 
being  a  moral  and  a  spiritual  force  that   he  has 

made  his  mark. 

"  It  is  a  strange  story  for  us  who  are  inclined 
to  think  that  we  excel  in  the  excellence  of  the 
family,  and  are  a  pattern  to  the  world,  as  far  as 
the  meaning  of  home  is  concerned,  yet  this  Hindu 
proves  that  we  have  no  monopoly  of  virtues, 
albeit  we  claim  such  high  civilization  and  Chris- 
tian virtues.*' 

During    the  latter  part     of   his    life,   Shishir 
Kumar  founded   a  monthly  journal,  called   "  The 
Hindu  Spiritual  Magazine."     It  is  quite   a  depar- 
ture from  the  orthodox  Hindu  spiritual  ideas,  as  it 
does  away  with  the  theory  of  re-incarnation.  Not- 
withstanding much  opposition  to  this  belief  of  his 
from   several   influential   quarters,   Shishir  Babu 
was  able  to  maintain  his  own   reputation.     This 
periodical  is   still  being   conducted  together  with 
the  "Patrika"  as  successfully  as  before,   especially 

39 


SHISHIR   KUMAR  GHOSE 

through  the  zeal,  skill  and  labours  of  Babu  Moti 
Lai  Ghose,  a  life-long  co-adjutor  and  fourth 
brother  of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  and  of  Babu 
Piyush  Kanti  Ghose,  his  eldest  son  and  a  veritable 
chip  of  the  old  block.  Babu  Moti  Lai  Ghose,  the 
able  successor  of  Shishir  Kumar,  is  now  growing 
old  to  take  any  large  active  part  in  the  public 
affairs  of  the  country.  So  the  onerous  duty  of 
editor  has  largely  devolved  upon  Piyush  Babu, 
and  he  has  proved,  during  the  last  few  years,  that 
inspirations  from  his  father  far  from  falling  flat 
upon  him  have  entered  his  very  blood  and  mar- 
row and  made  him  a  successful  successor  of  his 
father  and  uncle. 

The  life  of  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose  can 
conveniently  be  divided  into  three  parts, — social, 
political,  and  spiritual.  We  have  already  said 
something  about  the  first  two,  and  we  should 
now  say  a  little  about  the  last  one.  It  is  not  an 
easy  task  for  us  to  write  about  his  spiritual  life. 
We  will  therefore  do  what  little  we  can  by  quota- 
tions from  his  life-sketches  from  the  pens  of  some 
profound  writers  and  thinkers  of  the  day.  Dr. 
J.  M.  Peebles,  the  great  publicist  and  tourist  of 
America,  says ; — "  Babu  Shishir  Kumar  Ghose 
was  no  ordinary  personage.  He  was  not  only 
an  upright  and  conscientious  man,  not  only 
a  broad-minded  thinker  and  reformer,  but  he 
was    in    the    best   sense    of   the  word,    a    saint, 

40 


LIFE  SKETCH 

— a  saint  whose  soul  was  a  fire  with  devotion 
to  India,  politically  and  religiously,  and  in  a 
wider  sense,  to  the  whole  world  of  humanity — 
symbolised, — "  We  are  Brothers  All.  "  Again  Dr. 
Peebles  says,  "  Never  can  I  forget  to  the  end 
of  mortal  life  my  close  social  communion,  a  blend- 
ing of  America  and  India  with  the  lamented 
originator  and  editor  of  the  "Hindu  Spiritual 
Magazine''.  He  was  a  thinker,  a  scholar,  and  a 
brilliant  torch  of  intellectual  progress.  He  was 
also  an  affectionate,  unassuming  man,  and  yet 
really  great ;  for  all  true  greatness  is  based  upon 
goodness,  intelligence,  and  consecration  to  the 
benefit  of  all  tribes,  races  and  nations.''  He  lived 
the  life  of  a  saint  and  in  Vaishnava  Bhajanas 
(Kirtans)  he  went  into  ecstatic  trances.  He  has 
left  behind  a  large  number  of  Bhaktas  (devotees) 
who  worship  him  daily  even  to  this  day.  His 
Bengali  religious  works  are  the  saviours  of  quite 
a  large  number  of  sinners  and  they  in  a  manner, 
bi ought  on  a  new  era,  in  the  religious  thoughts 
of  Bengal. 

As  a  token  of  his  undiminishing  love  and 
devotion  to  Lord  Gauranga  and  for  the  benefit 
of  mankind,  Shishir  Babu  has  left  a  few  works 
upon  His  life  and  teachings.  These  works  are  ; — 
(i)  "  Lord  Gauranga  or  Salvation  for  All",  (in 
English)  (2)  "  Amiya  Nimai  Charit",  (3)  "  Kala- 
chand  Gita",  and  many   others  in  Bangali.     So 

4i 


SHISHIR  KUMAR    GHOSE 

great  was  his  love  for  the  religion  of  Sri  Gaur- 
anga  that  he  also  published  a  monthly  journal  in 
Bengali  called  "  Vishnupriya  Patrika"  which  was 
after  some  time  made  a  weekly  and  named 
Vishnupriya  and  Ananda  Bazar  Patrika.''  This 
latter  paper  did  very  useful  work  in  the  field  of 
Vaishnavism  and  politics  for  a  large  number  of 
years.  From  a  careful  perusal  of  his  books  and 
articles  in  the  "  Vishnupriya "  one  will  rise  a 
better  and  wiser  man  and  find  himself  in  the 
right  position  to  judge  of  Shishir  Babu  as  a  re- 
ligious preacher.  His  was  a  life  truly  lived  for 
he  began  as  a  social  reformer,  developed  into  a 
politician  and  at  last  ended  as  a  fervent  religious 
reformer  and  a  spiritualist.  Johnson  said  of  Gold- 
smith, that  whatever  he  undertook  he  shed  lustre 
on,  and  let  us  say  with  Johnson,  that  whatever 
Shishir  Babu  touched,  he  touched  to  better  it. 


42 


THE  GREAT  KING  ON  HIS  THRONE 

The    irresistible    King   sat    on  His    Golden 
Throne,   surrounded    by   His   beloved   ministers, 
whom  His    subjects,   divided  into   diverse   races, 
called  Prophets.  He  ruled  with  such  consummate 
wisdom  that   every  one  thought  that   the  race   to 
which  he  belonged,  was  the  most  favourite  or  the 
Lord  Sovereign.  His  laws  were  so  simple  that  every 
one  could  know    what  they    were.  But   more  :  He 
made  the  obedience  to  His  laws  a  source   of  profit 
to  His  subjects,  and  disobedience  that  of  loss.  The 
King,  however,    lived  at  a  distance,   far   from  the 
reach  of  His  subjects  ;  and  this  led  those,  who  had 
foolishly  created  perverse  tastes  for  themselves,  to 
break  the  laws  and  bring  misery  upon  their  heads. 
When  thus  afflicted,    they    sent    petitions  to   the 
King,  and   for  this  they   had  neither  to  pay  for 
stamps   nor   any   other  fees.     All   their  petitions 
reached  the  foot  of  the  Throne  direct  and    without 
cost. 

As  the  King  sat,  a  petition  reached  the  foot  of 
th  Throne,  which  the  Private  Secretary  took  up 
and  read.  It  was  from  the  Abyssinians  who  begged 
protection  from  the  invasion  of  the  Italians.  No 
sooner  was  the  petition  read  than  another  was 
taken   up   by   the    Secretary.     It   was   from   the 

43 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

Italians  who   prayed   for   victory  over  the  Abys- 
sinians. 

The  King  wanted  to  know  the  grounds  upon 
which  they  prayed  for  His  intervention.  The 
Secretary  said  in  reply  that  the  Abyssinians 
claimed  to  be  the  only  loyal  subjects  of  His  Majesty, 
while  the  Italians  preferred  the    same  claim. 

The  King  smiled,  and  addressing  a  minister 
said  :  "Jesus,  My  beloved  son,  they  both  belong  to 
you.  It  is  for  you  to  advise  Me  how  to  satisfy  both 
parties." 

Jesus  said,  "My  revered  Father,  wiiy  dost 
Thou  call  them  my  own  ?  I  told  them  distinctly 
that  it  would  not  do  to  call  me  "good"  and  disobey 
the  laws.  I  have  told  them  that  murder  is  murder 
whether  committed  on  the  high-ways  or  on  the 
battle-field.  I  have  told  them  that  they  are  all 
brothers  and  must  love  one  another.  I  cannot  call 
them  my  own,  who  disobey  Your  laws  and  then 
selfishly  throw  all  the  responsibility  upon  my 
shoulders.'' 

The  King  again  smiled,  and  ordered  the  peti- 
tions to  be  filed  with  the  remark,  that  the  parties 
must  take  the  consequence  of  their   own  acts. 

Just  then  a  petition  came  from  Emperor 
William.  Emperor  William  wanted  to  keep  Alsace 
and  Lorraine  in  his  possession  and  prayed  for  the 
assistance  of  the  King.  He  proposed  in  his  petition, 
that  if  the  King  afforded   the  necessary   help,  he, 

44 


THE  GREAT  KING   ON  HIS  THRONE 

the  Emperor,  would  offer  the  King,  in  return,  his 
hearty  thanks,  and  praise  Him  and  proclaim  His 
glory. 

The  King  again  turned  to  Jesus  and  said. — 
"How  is  it  that  Emperor  William  thinks  me  such 
an  idiotic  fool?  His  idea  is  to  bribe  me  by  a  few 
good  words  to  help  him  in  pursuit  of  his  selfish 
ends.  Let  the  petition  of  Emperor  William  be  filed 
without  any  order." 

The  Armenians  sent  a  petition  for  protection 
from  the  Sultan,  and  the  Sultan  did  the  same  to 
protect  himself  from  the  Christian  Powers.  The 
King  addressed  Mahomet  and  said,  "Beloved 
Friend,  what  have  you  to  say  to  this?''  Mahomet 
replied  :  "Brother  Jesus  is  in  a  better  position  to 
give  the  reply  than  I  am.  Previously  my  followers 
were  the  stronger  party,  but  his  are  now  the 
masters  of  the  situation." 

Just  then  petitions  reached  the  Throne  from 
the  battlefield  in  Chitral.  The  Christian  prayed 
for  victory,  and  the  Mussalmans  prayed  for  the 
same  thing.  The  Christians  charged  the  Mussal- 
mans with  being  followers  of  a  pretender  and  false 
Prophet,  and  the  Mussalmans  charged  the  Christi- 
ans with  being  unbelievers  and  therefore  enemies 
of  the  King  whom  it  is  therefore  meritorious  work 
to  kill. 

Both  Jesus  and  Mahomet  were  appointed 
arbitrators  to  settle  this  dispute.  How  it  was  clone 

45 


PICTUR1    •  LIP1 

a  ii,  ih 
■ 
\  petiti  I 

•jh-ss  <.i  the  the 

.     The  I 

■ 

■ 
with  ;  '•' 

K  iman.     11< 

-  that  he  ha  - 

rill  m 

•  ie  King 

that    ■ 
inhabite  1    ;    •  it    <li  I    i 

kn-  :.    wh 

Pi    ph<  t 
I 
difttributt 

the  a  -      I'i: 

imm< 
I   infinite  (»1»  King        \n«1 

in  return  what  the  i  bum 

.  ith     \i 
posso 
them  ;  .iil.1  b  ( 

The  Kin  .       •■  I  .  »  hat  tin 

•  • 
1  <!■                  aJl.    Fust,  ;. 


THE   GREAT  KING  ON  HIS  THRONE 

laid  down  by  me  and  bring  misery  upon  them- 
selves;  secondly,  the}',  every  one  of  them,  will 
have  to  come  here  in  a  short  time,  leaving  all  their 
possessions  behind,  to  render  an  account  for  their 
actions.  They  will  have  to  explain  why  they 
committed  murder,  why  they  stole,  and  why  they 
did  other  unlawful  things.''  Then  turning  to  Jesus, 
the  King  said  sorrowfully  :  "Ami  was  it  for  this 
that  you,  my  beloved  son,  bled?" 


THE  BABOO. 

[The  following  is  an  extract  from  the  unpubli- 
shed diary  of  a  globe-trotter  in  India.] 
It  was  at  Cawnpore,   that  I   first  heard   of  that 
strange  animal  of  Bengal,  of  which  so  much  has 
been  spoken  and  written.     I  was  expecting  every 
moment  my  friend  with  whom  I  was   staying,  for 
it   was  past    office  hours,  when    he    rushed    in, 
apparently  in   a  great  fury,    and  threw  himself 
prostrate   upon  a  sofa.     I   soothingly  inquired   of 
him  the  cause  of  his  illhumor,  and  he  said  that  his 
"Baboo   would  be  the   cause  of   death  to  him." 
"What  was  a  Baboo?"  thought  I.     I  had  heard  of 
baboons  and  seen   some  of  them  in    Africa,    but 
never  a  baboo.     I  asked  what  was  a  baboo,  and  at 
this  simple  query,  my  friend  laughed  immodera- 
tely, till  tears  trickled  down  his  cheeks.     "Never 
heard  of  or  saw   a  baboo  in  your   life?''  said  he. 
"Well,   a  baboo   is  a  strange   animal   and  very 
vicious  too,"     I  was    a  little  annoyed    at  his   un- 
seasonable merriment  and    told   him   so,    but  he 
apologised    and   told   me  that  a  baboo  not  only 
vexed  but  also  amused  him  a  great  deal. 

*  la  the  beginning- the  Bengal  Zemindar  was  the  object  of 
wrath  to  the  average  Englishman  in  India.  When  that  class  had 
been  very  much  humbled,  the  wrath  was  transferred  to  the 
"Baboos"  of  Bengal,  by  which  expression  were  meant  those 
natives  of  Bengal  who  had  learnt  the  English  language. 

48 


THE  BABOO 

I  wanted  to  see  his  baboo,  for  I  was  informed 
that  the  baboo  had  its  own  and  separate  quarters. 
I  requested  my  friend  to  send  for  its  keeper  to  come 
along  with  the  animal ;  but  to  my  astonishment  I 
was  told  that  his  baboo  roamed  at  large  and  did 
not  need  the  services  of  a  keeper.  Well,  what 
was  then  a  baboo?  I  petulantly  asked.  My 
friend  said  that  it  was  an  animal  from  Bengal 
which  was  his  constant  tormentor.  It  annoyed 
and  irritated  him  very  much,  and  it  oftentimes 
roused  his  worst  passions,  "It  will  approach  you 
when  you  don't  want  him  and  stick  to  you,  and  at 
last  render  you  a  helpless  idiot."— 

I  interrupted  him  and  inquired  why  then  he 
kept  a  baboo  at  all.  He  said,  because,  he  could 
not  help  it ;  "  every  European  has  a  baboo  and  it 
is  impossible  to  do  anything  in  this  country  with- 
out its  help.  Baboo  labour  is  cheap,  and  the 
baboos  are  very  useful  animals." 

I  did  not  fullv  understand  what  my  friend 
meant ;  his  words  mystified  me  more  than  ever, 
and  I  inquired  why  he  did  not  break  those  which 
proved  vicious. 

Friend. — They  are  all  vicious,  and  as  to  break- 
ing them  I  dare  not.  They  have  paws  and  teeth 
and  they  can  both  scratch  and  bite. 

Trotter. — Are   they   more  ferocious  than  the 
Bengal  tiger  and  the  African  lion? 
Fr.— The  baboo  is  a  very  gentle  creature,  indeed. 

49 
S-4 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

Tr. — Why,  then,  don't  you  shoot  him  down 
whenever  you  find  him,  despite  his  cheap  and 
useful  labour? 

Fr. — Shoot  a  baboo!  I  would   rather  cut   off 
my  right  forefinger.     I  dare    not  even  flog    him, 
and  I  am  obliged  even  to  humour  him  and  treat 
him   as    a   fellow-being.     Shoot  a    baboo!    You 
don't  know  what  would  be  the  consequences  of 
such  a  rash  act.    Shoot  a   baboo  and  he  will  no 
doubt  be  dead,  but  then  the  other  baboos  of  the 
country, — thousands  and  tens  of    thousands,  will 
join  together,  and  raise  such  a  piercing,  terrible 
awful,  unearthly  howl  that  it  will  shake  the  nerves 
of  the  boldest  amongst  us.   They  will  howl  from 
street  to  street,  from  town  to  town,  from  province 
to  province,  from  Calcutta  to  Bombay. 

Tr. — I  see,  I  see,  the  baboos  are  then  a  species 
of  apes  which  I  saw  in  large  numbers  in  America. 
They  are  called  howling  monkeys,  of  a  brown 
color,  with  a  capacious  pouch  under  their 
chins. 

Fr. — They  are  not  howling  monkeys,  my 
friend,  but  they  more  closely  resemble  the  human 
species,  though  I  must  tell  you  that  the  lower 
orders  are  now  and  then  mistaken  for  apes  and 
shot  by  the  Europeans.  But  you  are  going  down 
to  Calcutta :  you  will  see  plenty  of  them  there. 
You  will  see  baboos  also  in  all  the  Railway 
Stations,  for  baboo  power  is  absolutely  necessary 

5o 


THE   BABOO 

to  make  the  cars  go,  but  my  last  injunction  to  you 
is,  avoid  a  baboo! 

On    the   following-    morning    I   purchased   a 
Calcutta  ticket,  and  before  getting  into  'the  train, 
closely  examined  the  engine  which  waited  there 
for  some  time,  to  see  where  the  baboo  power  was 
applied.     There  the  engine  stood  just  like  other 
engines  I  had  seen  in  England  and  other   places  ; 
and  I  could  not  see  where  the  baboos  were  yoked. 
I  inquired  of  the  engine-driver,  and  evidently  not 
understanding  me,  he  pointed   out  to  me  one  of 
the  office  rooms.     Just  then  the  bell  rang  and  I  was 
obliged  to  go  in.     There  were   some   other  Euro- 
peans in  the  car,  and,  as  I  was  putting  my  luggage 
into    order    the    door    of  the  compartment    was 
violently  shut   by    a  gentleman   who,     evidently 
highly  incensed,  told   to    a   fellow-passenger,   "  a 
rascally   baboo    was   coming     in."     Though    the 
gentleman  was  unknown   to  me,  I  could  not  help 
inquiring,  with  a  shudder,  whether  the  door  had 
been  properly  shut,  for  I  felt  a  little  nervous.     He 
said  it  had  been  shut  but  not  locked.  I  then  inquired 
where  the  baboo  then  was,  for  I  longed  to   have   a 
peep  at  him  from  such  a  safe  place,  surrounded 
as  I  was  by  my  countrymen  ;  but  he  said  that  the 
baboo   had   been    kicked   out,    and   had   perhaps 
entered  another  compartment. 

I  then  thought  within  myself  that  the  "yahoos" 
of   Swift   were   probably   the  baboos    of   Bengal. 

5i 


PICTURES    OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

Most  anxious  was  I  to  see  how  the  baboos  helped 
the  motion  of  the  train,  but  I  could  not.  At 
every  station  the  guard  called  out  "baboo,  baboo;" 
but  as  the  car  moved  immediately,  I  thought  that, 
that  was  an  encouraging  word  to  the  baboos  to 
do  their  duty  better.  There  was  a  Civilian 
Magistrate  pi  up-country  sitting  next  to  me,  and 
to  him  I  confidently  said  how  anxious  I  was  to  see 
a  baboo.  "Do  no  such  a  thing,"  said  he,  "his  very 
touch  is  contamination.  I  have  tried  to  close  my 
doors  against  him.  I  wish  I  had  succeeded."  "Why 
do  you  allow  them  to  come  to  you  !"  said  I.  "Very 
difficult  to  resist  them,"  muttered  he. 

There  was  a  missionary  gentleman  in  the  com- 
partment who  crossed  himself  when  the  name  of 
the  animal  was  mentioned,  and  said  that  it  was 
on  account  of  these  baboos,  that  he  could  not 
propagate  his  faith.  The  Magistrate  said  that  the 
baboos  were  the  greatest  foes  of  the  Civilians  ; 
they  ought  to  be  put  down  at  all  cost.  There 
was  a  medical  man  who  swore  that  he  would  take 
the  first  opportunity  of  transferring  himself  to  a 
station  where  there  were  no  baboos.  A  baboo 
had  made  him  very  uncomfortable  in  his  present 
post  and  deprived  him  of  his  practice.  There  was 
an  engineer  too,  who  clenched  his  fist  and  well 
nigh  broke  the  door  by  striking  it,  while  he  cursed 
the  meddlesomeness  of  his  baboo. 

The    Magistrate   hissed  "baboo/     The   mis- 

52 


THE   BABOO 

sionary  cursed  the  "baboo."  The  Doctor  swore 
at  the  "baboo."  And  every  one  hissed  "baboo'' 
between  his  teeth. 

All  this  was  enough  for  me.  I  did  not  choose 
to  encounter  a  baboo  just  then,  as  my  revolver  was 
out  of  order.  "Well  you  will  find  plenty  of  baboos 
at  the  Howrah  Station,"  wickedly  observed  the 
Magistrate,  and  a  cold  tremor  came  over  me. 

How  to  avoid  them,  was  the  thought  that 
engrossed  my  mind.  Calcutta  was  at  last  reached, 
my  companions  boldly  opened  the  door  and  came 
down  upon  the  platform,  but  somehow  or  other 
the  late  talk  had  made  me  a  little  nervous,  and  I 
was  not  prepared  to  come  across  a  baboo  just  then. 
So  I  loitered  and  peeped  through  the  doors  to  see 
whether  there  were  baboos  on  the  platform,  and 
what  they  were  like ;  but  the  porters  teased  me 
very  much.  I  asked  them  in  English  whether  there 
were  any  baboos  roaming  there  at  large,  and  a 
porter  ran  away  apparently  to  beckon  some  body. 
Forthwith  came  a  native  gentleman  ;  and  with 
that  respectful  demeanour  which  they  always 
preserve  before  Europeans,  he  inquired  what  I 
wanted.  What  could  I  say  ?  I  said  I  must  alight, 
and  the  gentleman  very  obligingly  helped  to 
remove  my  luggage  to  the  platform.  But  I  was 
still  in  the  car  and  very  anxious  :  I  was  constantly 
directing  my  glance  towards  the  platform.  The 
gentleman    again    enquired    to  know    whether  I 

53 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN    LIFE 

wanted  anything  more.  "Well,"  I  stammered,  "my 
dear,  dear — s — sir,  are  the  b — b — baboos  all  gone!':' 
'Not  all"  said  he.  "Where  are  they?"  I  whis- 
pered in  his  ear.  He  enquired,  why  I  asked.  "My 
d-dear  s-sir,  not  so  loud,  I  simply  want  to  know," 
said  I.  He  said  :  "Well,  sir,  I  am  a  baboo."  "You, 
a  baboo !"  shrieked  I.  My  brain  reeled  and  I 
fainted  awav ! 


SUTTEE  IN  INDIA 

It  has  been   always  assumed  that  Sutteeism,  that 
is,  the  practice  of  a   disconsolate  woman  burning 
herself  to  death  with  the  dead  body  of  her  hus- 
band, is  a  barbarous   institution,   and  the    British 
Government  conferred  a  benefit  by  abolishing  it. 
We    shall  show  that  these  assumptions  have  no 
basis  to  stand  upon.  A  Suttee  occurred  but  very 
rarely    in  India.  Of  course,    when  the  institution 
was  abolished,  the  Government  had  to  state  that 
more   Suttees  occurred  than  what    actually    did. 
The   East   India  Company  were   deservedly   un- 
popular  with  the   people    of  England,  and   they 
wanted  to  stand  well  with  their  countrymen.  They 
selected  the  Suttee  question  for  their  purpose,  and 
they  represented  that  the  horrible  evil  was  a  com- 
mon spectacle.  As  in    the    case    of   the    Age    of 
Consent  Act,  the  existence  of  the  evil    was  esta- 
blished by  "cases0    which  had  no  real    existence, 
and  the  East    India   Company    took  great   credit 
irom  the    civilized  world  by  abolishing  it. 

But,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  Suttees  occurred  very 
rarely,  once  in,  say,  fifty  years  in  a  part  of  the 
country,  with  a  population  of  several  millions. 
Whenever  a  Suttee  occurred,  tombs  of  the  hus- 
band and  the  Suttee  were  erected  to  commemorate 

55 


PICTURI  :     \N  I. ll 

the   g  event,   and    these    I  unbs    carefully 

preserved  by  the  idantBoi  tin-  Suttee    So  it 

i>  possible  even  now  t  >  ascertain  how  m 

I  u  Bengal  within  the  last  two  hundi 

i  only   "  h  tomb  in  this 

vast  |  s  one  sncfa  tomb 

also  in  t!  it  ami  holy  cky    oi   Benares.     The 

ent  ha  arred    iust  alter  the    advenl  oi  th»- 

tgbsh,  and  tin  t.>ml>s  <-t  tht-  couple  nefally 

preserve  I.    We    ha       sen  a  ver)    lew    in  other 

pla 

It  hen  th 

u  omen    \a  an' 

•    ■  n  ■  mi  ■ 
When  a  do 

c  Sutfc  had  toui  eata 

Every  o  ;«»i  the  honor  tailed, 

and   it   «  BS  00  ■    i    thousand 

that  had  the  glory.    Th»-  tests  simply  were  thai 

lissuadc  bet  ir»m 
the  sacrifice,  and  it  was  wbei  ied 

in  carrying  all  her  people  with  he  she  » 

perni  lie  with  her  hits  The  following 

:ount  of   a  Suttee-  is  taken  from    her  friends  wIm 
to  >k  parr  in  the  ceremony. 

We    saw    in    the   Bankura  district  -mall 

tombs  on  the  banks  of  a  small  lake  We  enquti 
of  the  man  who  was  with  us.   oi  the  r.  diis 

,v  spectacle  in  a  purely  Hindoo  vill  ued 

5* 


SUTTEE   IN   INDIA 

so  close  to  the  house  of  the  Gossains.  He  said : 
"  The  tombs  contain  the  ashes  of  the  Suttee  and 
her  husband,  who  were  both  burnt  on  this  very- 
spot.  The  Suttee  belonged  to  the  family  of  the 
Gossains,  and  there  may  be  persons  yet  living 
who  could  give  you  an  account  of  the  whole  affair." 

On  hearing  this,  a  strange  emotion  seized  us, 
and  we  knelt  by  the  tomb  of  the  lady,  and  then 
prayed  with  clasped  hands :  "Teach  us,  noble 
soul,  Sacrifice;  teach  us  Devotion  and  Fidelity; 
teach  us  Love." 

The  village  is  in  the  district  of  Bankura,  and 
called  Gader  Dehee,  whe^e  resides  the  Gossain 
family,  celebrated  throughout  that  part  of  the 
country.  We  were  led  to  an  old  man  who  had 
himself  assisted  in  the  ceremony,  being  the 
younger  brother  of  the  husband  of  the  lady.  He 
was  twenty-two  when  his  brother  died; 
his  brother  was  fortv-nve,  and  the  ladv,  the 
Suttee,  was  twenty-five.  The  event  happened  59 
years  ago,  and  so  the  old  man,  who  related  the 
story  to  us,  was  then  81.  The  name  of  the  husband 
of  the  lady  was  Brahmananda  Gossain,  and  he 
died  of  fever  in  the  morning.  Now  we  shall  speak 
in  the  words  of  the  narrator  :  "  She  wept  not, 
bui:  sat  by  the  dead  body  of  my  brother.  How  we 
:  wished  that  she  could  give  vent  to  her  feelings, 
frand  relieve  herself.     But  no,  she  sat  and  uttered 

(neither  a  sigh  nor  a  groan.     At  last  she  rose  and 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

proceeded  straightway  towards  the  Thakur  Baree 
of  God  Sree  Krishna.    There  she  went,  followed 
by  many  men  and  women,  and  prostrated  herself 
before  the  holy  Image  of  God.  There   she  stood, 
and  began  to  divest  herself  of  the  ornaments,  that 
she  had  on  her  person.  One  by  one  she  took  them 
off  and  placed  them  at  the  feet  of  the  God,  for  the 
first   time    speaking  in  these  words  :  "Here,  my 
Lord,  take  them,  1  need  them   no  longer."    And 
then   she   slowly  came  back  to  where  the  body  of 
her    husband     was     lying     covered.    She    ihen 
addressed  her  brother-in-law  and  said  :  "Prepare 
for  the  ceremony  of  cremation,   and   you   know  I 
can't  live  without  him.     I  must  accompany  him." 
Though  her  relations,  friends  and  neighbours 
had  all  suspected    that    something  serious    was 
impending,  the  first  announcement   was  received 
with  a  shock  which  could  not  be  described.   Then 
followed    dissuasions     and     they    all    began    to 
dissuade  her  to  no  purpose.   The  uncle-in-law,  the 
mother-in-law,   whom  a  Hindu  lady  is   bound  to 
revere    next    to    God,    commanded,    and     then 
earnestly  pleaded  to  her  to  forbear ;   but  she  was 
not   to   be   moved.     Then     came    the    Guru    the 
Purohit,  whom,  as  her  spiritual  guides,   she   was 
bound  to  obey  ;  they  tried  their  best,  but  she  was 
as  firm  as  rock. 

Time  rolled  on,  and  she   wavered    not  for  a 
moment.     Then  the   last   device  was  resorted  to 

58 


SUTTEE  IN  INDIA 

Her  fears  were  appealed  to ;  they  described 
to  her  the  horrible  and  painful  sufferings  of  a 
living  being  upon  a  funeral  pile.  At  first  she  dis- 
dained to  give  replies  to  their  appeals  to  her  fears, 
but  at  last,  when  obliged  to  say  something,  she 
said  :  "You  need  not  be  anxious ;  my  soul  has 
fled  with  my  Lord.  As  for  bodily  sufferings,  I  shall 
shew  you  that  I  need  not  apprehend  them."  There 
was  a  lamp  burning,  according  to  the  usual 
custom  by  the  corpse,  and  she  put  one  of  her 
fingers  upon  the  slow  flame  of  the  lamp  and  burnt 
it  without  winking.  Crowds  had  then  collected 
from  all  parts  of  the  country.  It  was  then  about 
4  p.  m.  and  the  corpse  was  carried  to  the  burning 
ghat  on  the  bank  of  the  small  lake,  only  about  a 
couple  of  hundred  yards  from  the  house,  and  the 
lady  followed,  followed  by  thousands  of  men  and 
women,  chanting  "Haribole."  The  crowd  then 
began  to  collect  dry  faggots,  and  heaps  were 
gathered  in  a  moment. 

While  the  funeral  pile  was  in  the  process  of 
being  prepared,  the  corpse  was  bathed,  and  the 
lady  herself  performed  her  ablutions.  She  then 
put  on  vermillion  on  her  forehead,*  and  dressed 
herself  in  a  new  Saree  (cloth  for  ladies)  and  then 

*  Women  who  have   husbands    alone  have    the   privilege  of 

putting  on   the  vermillion.      The  vermillion  shewed  that  she 

disdained  to    live  as   a  widow.     Indeed,   before   ascending  the 

funeral  pile  she  dressed   herself  as   a  new   bride   going  to  hrr 

husband. 

59 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

slowly  ascended  the  funeral  pile.  Her  hair  was 
properly  adjusted  by  her  friends,  and  they  adorn- 
ed her  with  garlands  and  wreaths  of  flowers.  The 
crowd  then,  with  tearful  eyes,  begged  of  her  bless- 
ings and  some  tokens  from  her  to  be  kept  in 
remembrance  of  her  self-sacrifice.  She  was  sup- 
plied with  cowries,  plantains,  betel-nuts,  &c,  and 
she  began  to  throw  handfuls  of  them  amongst  the 
crowd.  She  then  laid  herself  by  the  corpse  of  her 
husband  in  the  posture  of  a  warm  embrace.  She 
gave  the  order,  and  the  pile  was  lighted  in  several 
places  and  there  was  at  once  a  blazing  fire.  The 
Suttee  raised  her  right  hand  and  began  to  utter 
the  name  of  "Hari,"  turning  her  hand  round  and 
round.  This  was  followed  by  loud  responsive 
shouts  of  "  Haribole  "  from  the  crowd.  She  was 
dead  before  the  fire  had  reached  her  sacred  person. 
The  lady  had  no  child." 

But  we  inquired:  "  How  was  it  that,  you 
being  many  thousands,  you  say,  almost  a  hundred 
thousand,  you  could  not  prevent  a  fragile  lady 
from  burning  herself?'' 

To  this  the  old  Brahmin  replied  :  "It  could 
not  be  done.  She  sat  there  as  a  statue,  the  most 
beautiful  woman  in  the  world.  There  was  no 
sorrow  on  her  face ;  on  the  contrary,  it  beamed, 
as  it  were,  with  ecstacy  ;  and  it  seemed  that  light 
was  emitting  from  her  wmole  body.  She  was 
simply  unapproachable  and  irresistible,   and  the 

60 


SUTTEE    IN   INDIA 

seething  mass  stood  transfixed  with  awe  before 
her.  It  was  not  possible  fof  man  to  go  against 
her  wishes,  the  greatest  of  monarchs  could  not 
have  done  it." 

When  the  real  spirit  of  Sutteeism  descends 
to  a  lady  she  becomes  irresistible,  and,  though  the 
Government  has  stopped  it,  Suttee  may  occur  even 
now  any  day.  It  is  not,  therefore,  quite  correct 
to  say  that  the  Government  has  stopped  it,  it  has 
stopped  of  itself. 

The  description  given  above  of  the  Suttee 
tallies  exactly  with  cases  to  which  Europeans 
have  been  eye  witnesses. 


APRIL,  MAY  AND  JUNE 

In  those  early  days  when  gods  did  not  disdain 
to  come  down  from  their  celestial  abodes  to  hold 
converse  with  men  below — that  such  thing's  hap- 
pened, the  Bible  is  our  witness — the  fishermen  of 
Bengal  prayed  to  Heaven  to  be  protected  from 
thieves.  Their  god,  for  each  caste  had  its  own, 
came  down  to  listen  to  what  they  had  to  say. 
The  fishermen  said  that  their  custom  was  to  spread 
nets  in  rivers  at  night  and  watch.  But  the  river- 
breeze  induced  sleep,  and  when  they  fell  down 
overpowered  by  it,  the  thieves  stole  all  the  fishes 
that  were  netted.  They,  therefore,  prayed  for 
something  to  neutralize  the  effects  of  the  river- 
breeze.  Their  god  was  moved  to  pity  and  gave 
them  mosquitoes  as  a  remedy  against  drowsiness. 
Thus  came  mosquitoes  in  India,  says  the  legend 
of  the  fishermen. 

The  Bannias  amassed  gold,  and  were,  in  like 
manner,  robbed  by  thieves.  They  prayed  to  their 
god  to  afford  them  some  protection  from  the 
robbers  of  their  hard-earned  property.  The  god 
came  down  and  said  that  fishermen  had  got 
mosqaitoes,  and  those  insects  ought  to  be  a 
sufficient  protection  to  them  also.  The  Bannias 
said  that  they  had  acquired  a  bad  name  for  them- 

62 


APRIL,  MAY  AND  JUNE 

selves  by  their  economical  habits.  They  were 
considered  stingy,  so  stingy  indeed,  that  even  the 
mosquitoes  have  been  affected  by  this  foul  rumour. 
Indeed,  they  have  been  so  scared  away  by  the 
rumour  that  they  (the  mosquitoes)  avoided  them  as 
they  did  not  expect  a  drop  of  blood  from  them.  They 
wanted  something  more  potent  than  mosquitoes. 
On  reflection,  the  god  gave  them  poisonous  snakes. 
Thus  came  these  reptiles  in  India.  The  terror  of 
being  bitten  by  snakes  which  glided  about  at  night, 
gave,  in  those  days,  sufficient  protection  to  the 
Bannias  from  thieves. 

Thus  did  India  get  its  scourges,  one  by  one, 
obtained  by  the  people  themselves,  by  their  selfish 
folly.  But,  at  one  time,  a  national  prayer  was 
offered  up  to  all  the  gods  of  the  country.  The 
gods  had  desired  the  people  to  live  in  peace,  and 
treat  all  men  as  brethren  and  perform  all  religious 
sacrifices.  The  people  followed  the  rule  of  life 
thus  laid  down  by  the  thirty-threee  millions  of 
gods  for  them.  The  result  was  disastrous ;  for, 
they  forgot  to  fight  and  thus  became  objects  of 
attack  to  all  ungodly  and  powerful  nations. 

When  the  entire  nation  prayed,  all  the  gods 
came  down,  and  these  thirty-three  millions  of 
celestial  beings  with  their  consorts  looked,  says 
the  legend,  like  a  swarm  of  glow-worms.  They 
filled  the  whole  heaven,  and  were  yet  fifty  miles 
deep  !     The  people   with  folded  hands  prayed  to 

63 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

the  gods  to  be  protected  from  the  invaders  of  their 

country. 

The  god  of  the  fishermen  thus  replied 
addressing  the  people,— "You  ought  to  have  no 
fear  of  any  invader.  I  have  given  your  country 
mosquito.  No  foreign  nation  will  consequently 
care  to  come  to  India.''  The  people  submitted 
that  mosquitoes  would  be  no  protection  at  all. 

The  eod  of  the  Bannias  then  said  that  he  had 
given  them  poisonous  snakes,  and  surely  no  nation 
would,  alter  that,  venture  to  come  to  India.  The 
people  again  demurred. 

The  thirty-three  millions  of  gods  with  their 
consorts  then  held  a  consultation  amongst  them- 
selves, but  could  arrive  at  no  definite  and 
satisfactory  conclusion.  One  goddess  interrupted 
the  proceedings  by  declaring  that  she  would  do 
the  needful.  She  would  give  cholera,  and  that 
would  afford  the  most  adequate  protection  to 
India  against  all  invaders.  The  name  of  this  ever 
to-be-feared    goddess   is  Ola  Debi  or  the   Cholera 

Goddess. 

The  deluded  people  of  India  accepted  the  gift 
with  joy,  but  they  were  not  yet  satisfied.  The 
gods  held  another  conference,  and  they  at  last 
succeeded  in  arriving  at  a  definite  conclusion. 
Thev  said  that  invasions  of  India  could  only  be 
made  by  powerful  nations,  and  powerful  nations 
come     from     cold     countries.     To     make    India 

64 


APRIL,  MAY  AND  JUNE 

intolerable  to  such  people,  the  country  ought  to  be 
made  hot.  Thus  two  hot  months  were  given  to 
India — the  months  of  Baisakh  and  Jaishta.  The 
gods  calculated  that  any  nation  from  the  cold 
countries,  however  tenacious  of  purpose,  would  be 
compelled  to  flee  from  their  beloved  India,  when 
subjected  to  the  heat  of  April,  May  and  June. 

The  overpowering  heat  which  makes  the  life  of 
every  inhabitant  of  the  Indian  plains  miserable, 
reminds  us  of  the  above  legend  which  we  heard 
in  our  early  days ;  and  which  is  still  believed  in 
by  the  ignorant  masses  of  the  country  as  true.  If 
you  ask  them  to  explain  how,  in  spite  of  the 
mosquitoes,  the  cobras,  the  cholera  and  the  heat, 
India  has  been  taken  possession  of  by  a  nation 
hailing  from  a  cold  country,  the  believers  in  the 
above  legend  will  tell  you  that,  in  this  iron  age, 
the  gods  have  been  rendered  powerless  by  men. 
And  are  not  the  English,  they  will  tell  you,  a 
nation  powerful  enough  to  defy  even  the  ordinan- 
ces of  so  many  gods  as  thirty-three  millions.  ? 

We  are,  however,  disposed  to  agree  with  the 
gods  that  the  heat  of  April,  May  and  June  ought 
to  be  sufficient  terror  to  any  people  from  any  cold 
country.  The  gods  were  right  in  their  calculation, 
but  they  had  no  idea  of  the  tenacity  of  purpose  of 
an  Englishman.  Many  of  those  Englishmen  and 
Scotchmen,  who  come  to  India  to  earn  money  by 
entering  service,  do  not  act  wisely.     They  do  no 

65 
S-5 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

good  to  themselves  in  any  way, by  coming  out  here. 
India  is  as  much  dreary  to  them,  as  Siberia  is  to 
a  Russian  prisoner.  They  have  to  leave  society 
behind  to  find  no  society  here.  They  have  to  live 
alone  in  the  midst  of  millions  of  aliens.  They 
have  to  leave  dear  surroundings  of  their  early 
days  to  live  amongst  strangers.  They  have  to  do 
the  same  thing  over  again,  all  the  days  of  their 
lives.  Their  pay  is  fat  no  doubt,  but  their  work 
is  hard  too.  They  have  barely  time  to  enjoy  the 
necessary  sleep  of  seven  hours.  The  heat  is 
unbearable  for  a  native  :  it  can  well  be  conceived 
how  dreadful  it  must  be  to  inhabitants  of  cold 
countries.  It  is  true  they  earn  some  money  ;  but 
what  of  that  ?  When  in  their  old  age  they  go 
home  with  their  bags  of  money,  they  find  them- 
selves again  in  the  midst  of  strangers,  with  no 
friends  and  no  congenial  spirits  to  make  their 
existence  bearable.  All  that  they  gain  is  that  they 
die  rich,  if  that  is  any  consolation  at  all.  The  best 
thing  tor  them  is  for  most  of  them  to  go  home. 
Let  those  who  can  spend  their  days  on  hills  alone 
remain  for  the  purpose  of  ruling  the  country. 


ONE  OF  THE  LAST  KINGS  OF 
BENGAL. 

When  the  Bengalees  were  independent,  they 
were  a  warlike  race.  Martial  spirit,  like  Goddess 
Lakshmi,  is  fickle,  and  travels  from  one  nation  to 
another.  A  nation  which  is  weak  now,  may 
become  strong  under  the  impulse  of  circumstances. 
This  can  at  once  be  proved  by  a  reference  to 
history.  The  Bengalees  were  at  one  time  not 
only  a  warlike,  but  also  a  conquering,  race.  This 
was  under  the  Sen  Kings  of  the  province.  These 
Sens  are  Kayasthas  according  to  Ayin  Akbari, 
and  Vaidyas  according  to  popular  belief. 

The  most  warlike  of  these  Sen  Kings  was 
Vijoy.  He  conquered  Assam,  Madras  and  Ceylon, 
and  sent  a  fleet  to  the  West  by  the  Ganges,  with 
what  result  is  not  known.  But  the  martial  spirit, 
the  nation  began  to  decline  after  the  reign  of 
Vijoy.  Bengal  was  at  last  wrested  by  the 
Mussalmans  from  the  hands  of  its  old  King,  Laksh- 
man  Sen. 

He  is  called  Lakshmania  by  the  Mussalman 
authors.  But  popularly  it  is  believed  that  the  last 
Sen  King  of  Bengal  was  Lakshman  Sen  who, 
when  the  Mussalmans  came,  was  eighty  years  of 
age.     When  the  Mussalmans  invaded  Bengal,  he 

67 


PICTURES   OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

fled  without  offering  them  any  battle.  TheMussal- 
man  authors  refer  to  a  legend  in  connection  with 
this  King  of  Bengal.  It  is  this:  Astrologers  had  pre- 
dicted that  if  his  mother  gave  him  birth  at  a  certain 
auspicious  moment,  he  would  live  to  reign  eighty 
years  in  Bengal.  His  mother  was  big  with  child, 
when  his  father  died.  The  auspicious  moment  was 
approaching ;  but  the  infant  in  the  womb  was  in  a 
hurry  to  be  born,  and,  indeed,  he  would  have  come 
down  two  hours  before  the  auspicious  moment, had 
not  the  mother  adopted  a  sure  means  of  preventing 
it.  She  had  herself  hung  up  by  the  two  feet,  with 
the  head  downwards.  She  was  taken  down  at  the 
proper  time  ;  and  when  she  gave  birth  to  her 
child  (Lakshman  Sen)  he  was  immediately  pro- 
claimed King.  The  mother,  however,  died  of  the 
means  she  had  adopted  to  secure  eighty  years' 
reign  for  her  son. 

After  Vijoy  Sen,  the  Bengalees  devoted  them- 
selves to  arts,  sciences,  and  literature.  Mithila  was 
the  centre  of  the  Naya  philosophy,  but  Bengal 
soon  after  eclipsed  that  famous  seat  of  learning. 
The  Naya  (logic),  the  Tantra  (religious  philo- 
sophy), literature,  mathematics  and  poetry,  etc., 
engrossed  the  attention  of  the  higher  classes  of 
Bengalees  during  the  days  of  the  last  Sen  Kings 
01  Bengal. 

The  last  King,  Lakshman  Sen,  was  himself  a 
great  poet,  and   he  surrounded  himself  by  poets. 

68 


ONE  OF  THE  LAST   KINGS  OF  BENGAL 

His  wife  was  a  poetess,  so  was  his  son,  so  was  his 
daughter-in-law,  and  so  were  his  ministers.  The 
great  Jaydeva  was  the  first  poet  at  his  court,  and 
his  rival  was  Umapati  Dhar.  This  Umapati  Dhar 
was  a  Suvarnabanik.  Dr.  Rajendra  Lala  Mittra 
mistook  him  for  a  Brahmin,  however.  Jaydeva 
talks  of  this  Umapati  in  his  great  book,  the  best 
lyrical  poem  in  the  world,  theGeeta  Govinda.  We 
said  Lakshman  Sen  was  himself  a  poet ;  some  of 
his  pieces  are  extant,  and  they  are  written  in 
Bengalee  characters. 

Fancy  the  spectacle  of  a  King  and  his  cabinet 
devoting  themselves  to  poetic  pleasures !  The 
village  communities  took  care  of  themselves  ;  and, 
being  too  strong  for  the  governors,  remained 
virtually  independent.  The  King  could  be  only 
approached  by  a  subject  with  a  Sloka  (couplet)  in 
hand.  There  was  no  other  way  of  having  access 
to  him.  A  good  sentiment,  a  happy  simile,  or  an 
apt  metaphor  carried  the  day    with  him. 

The  King  had  once  sent  his  son  to  a  distant 
part  of  his  dominions  on  some  business.  The  wife 
of  his  son  pined  away.  The  son  could  not  come 
home  without  the  permission  of  the  King,  his 
master  ;  nor  could  he  himself  venture  to  ask  it. 
But  the  wife  of  his  son  conceived  and  carried  out 
a  bold  plan.  She  entered  the  bed-chamber  of  the 
King,  her  father-in-law,  when  he  was  out,  and 
wrote  a    couplet  which    is  known  to   almost  all 

69 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

pandits  versed  in  Sanskrit.  But   there  is  no  harm 
in  giving  a  translation  of  the  couplet.  It  is  this  : — 

"The  clouds  are  pouring  without  intermission, 
and  the  peacocks  are  dancing  with  joy  ;  on  such  a 
day,  death  or  my  beloved  alone  can  remove  my 
suffer  in  gs." 

The  King,  on  entering  his  room  for  his  after- 
noon nap,  saw  the  couplet  on  the  wall,  and  was 
deeply  moved.  On  inquiry  he  learnt  that  it  was 
the  work  of  his  daughter-in-law  !  He  left  his  bed, 
and  immediately  sent  an  express  for  his  son. 

On  another  occasion,  the  King  absented  him- 
self from  home  for  a  considerable  time  to  the 
detriment  of  business,  because  of  his  love  for  a 
low-born  damsel.  His  son  sent  him  two  couplets 
which  were  addressed  to  a  river.  They  may  be 
translated  thus:  "'Generally  cool  art  thou,  O  river ! 
and  transparent  by  nature.  Thou  art  thyself  not 
only  pure,  but  makest  every  thing  pure  by  thy 
touch.  But  more.  Art  not  thou  the  life  of  all  living 
things?  Why  then  dost  thou  flow  downwards?" 

The  penitent  King,  of  course,  hastened  to 
his  capital.  When  the  Mussalmans  came,  the  King 
was  eighty  years  old.  It  is  further  said  he  had  no 
heirs.  He  called  all  the  philosophers  of  his  court 
together.  They  were  all  poets  and  pious  men  ; 
and  none  of  them  had  any  taste  for  fighting,  They 
all  addressed  the  King  in  these  terms  :  Life  was 
like  a  drop  of  water  on  a  lotus  leaf.  The  object  of 

70 


ONE  OF  THE  LAST  KINGS  OF  BENGAL 

■life  was  salvation.  It  was  only  mad  men  who 
fought  for  the  acquirement  of  earthly  blessings.  It 
was  a  horrible  sin  to  shed  the  blood  of  an  animal; 
how  much  more  horrible  then  it  was  to  shed 
human  blood  1  Let  the  Mussalmans  enjoy  the 
blessings  of  the  world.  They  were  fools  to  en- 
danger their  hereafter  for  such  worthless  advan- 
tages. They  must  endanger  it,  if  they  possessed 
them  at  the  cost  of  others.  "Let  us."  said  they, 
"enjoy  the  nectar  that  flowed  from  the  lotus  feet  of 
Sree  Krishna." 

English  education  has  effected  a  good  deal  of 
change  in  the  instincts  of  the  Hindus  of   Bengal. 
But  yet  the  feelings,  which  guided   the  last   Sen 
King  and  his  advisers,  have  not  lost  their  hold 
completely  upon  their  minds.     Political  agitation 
and  political   privileges  are  ideas  imported  from 
the  West,  and  the  Bengalees  have  not  been   able 
to  acclimatize  them  yet  in  their  country.     What 
the  rulers  need  to  keep  them  contented  is  to  leave 
them   alone,  with  the  enjoyment  of   their  simple 
food,  domestic  enjoyment,  intellectual   pleasures, 
and  religious  exercises.     If  the  rulers  of  the  land 
had    not  tried    to    interfere    with    the    domestic 
arrangements  of   the   Bengalees  and   with  their 
cherished   objects  and  notions,  they  would  have 
grown  no  political  institution  or  newspaper  in  our 
country. 


A  STORY  OF  PATRIOTISM 
IN  BENGAL.* 

The   death   of    our   lamented    countryman,    Mr. 
Ganesh  Vasudev  Joshi  of  Poona,  and  the  attempt 
of  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  Bengal  (Sir  Ashley 
Eden)  to  snub  Mr.  O'Donnell,    a  District   Magis- 
trate, for  directing  public  attention  to  the  abuses 
of  the  indigo  planting  system  in  Behar,  reminds 
us  of  a  promise,  we  had  made  to  a  friend,  of  dis- 
closing to  the  world  the  secret  of  the  origin  of  the 
great     indigo   disturbance   in   Bengal    in    which 
millions   of  indigo    ryots    and    other    Bengalees 
shewed  a  degree  of  patriotism,  self-sacrifice  and 
devotion  scarcely  witnessed  in  the  annals  of  the 
world  before.   People  in  jail  refused  to  sow  indigo 
though  solemn  promises  were   held  out  by   the 
authorities  to  set  them    free  ;    to    rebuild    their 
houses,    which    had    been    destroyed     by    their 
opponents,  the  planters ;  and  to  restore  to  them 
their  families,  wives  and  children  who  had  been 
roaming  in  the  country  as  beggars.  People  refused 
to  sow  indigo  even  for  a  year.     Thousands  thus 
preferred  indescribable  miser yto  handling  indigo 
seed  again. 

*  This  appeared  in  1880  in  the  Ameita  Bazar  Patrika. 

72 


A  STORY  OF  PATRIOTISM   IN  BENGAL 

The  rulers  of  the  Empire  know  not  the  origin 
of  this  great  combination.  It  is  yet  a  mystery  to 
them  as  to  how  a  combination  of  the  apathetic 
Bengalee  ryots,  a  combination  in  which  about 
five  millions  of  men  took  part,  was  brought  about 
so  secretly  and  so  suddenly  without  the  authorities 
knowing  anything  about  it.  We  shall  disclose 
the  secret  to-day,  for  the  benefit  of  the  rulers  of 
the  land.  There  is  no  longer  any  need  for  secrecy 
as  both  the  noble  heroes  of  our  story  are  dead. 

In  the  village  of  Chougatcha,  district  Nadia, 
lived  two  gentlemen,  Babus  Vishnu  Charan 
Biswas  and  Digambar  Biswas.  They  were  both 
men  of  some  property  :  Babu  Vishnu  Charan  was 
a  small  Zemindar,  and  Babu  Digambar,  a 
Mahajan,  that  is,  he  lent  money  and  paddy  on 
interest.  They  were  not  acquainted  with  the 
English  language,  but  they  were  men  of 
indomitable  perseverence  and  courage.  They 
were,  besides,  men  of  heart,  and  had  a  large 
share  of  that  intelligence  which  generally  cha- 
racterises a  Bengalee  gentleman.  Both  of  them 
served  as  Dewans  of  several  indigo  factories  in 
the  district  of  Nadia,  and  they  were  obliged  to 
leave  service  in  disgust,  as  Dewans  of  indigo 
factories,  who  had  hearts,  had  to  do  in  those  days. 

In  those  days,  the  indigo  planters  of  Bengal 
governed  the  country  with  despotic  sway.  Sir 
Frederic  Halliday  was  not  aware  of  the  real  state 

73 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

of  affairs,  and  the  planters  found  in  him  a  warm 
friend  and  supporter.  So  much  so  that  the 
ignorant  ryot  had  been  led  to  believe  that  the 
Government  had  a  share  in  all  the  indigo  concerns 
of  the  country.  The  more  intelligent  believed 
that  the  Lieutenant-Governor  was  personally 
interested  in  some  indigo  factories.  At  least,  the 
planters  never  failed  to  give  circulation  to  that 
rumour,  to  the  damage  of  that  worthy  statesman's 
character.  In  short,  the  planters  obtained  the- 
support  of  the  executive,  from  the  police  constable 
to  the  head  of  the  province,  in  their  acts  oM 
spoliation  and  oppression.  1 

They  held  courts,  criminal  and  civil,  andJ 
awarded  all  sorts  of  punishment.  They  confined 
men  in  their  own  jails,  and  sometimes  did  much 
worse.  They  were  not  respectors  of  persons ;  and 
Zemindars  and  ryots  trembled  before  them.  In 
short,  they  were  the  absolute  masters  of  the 
persons  and  properties  of  the  people,  and  they 
never  failed  to  exercise,  to  the  fullest  extent,  the 
despotic  powers  they  possessed.  The  ryots  meekly 
suffered,  for  they  had  no  help.  If  they  resisted, 
their  villages  were  plundered,  and  sometimes 
burnt  down  and  some  of  them  murdered.  The 
Magistrates  punished,  not  the  planters,  but 
the  injured  ryots.  The  ring-leaders  were  sent 
to  prison  on  alleged  charges  of  damaging 
indigo    crops    and     others    too     numerous     to 

74 


A  STORY  OF  PATRIOTISM   IN  BENGAL 

mention  and  this  kept  the  people  in  a  quiet 
state. 

It  was  during  the  government  of  Sir  Frederic 
Halliday,  that  this  system  of  growing  indigo 
was  pushed  to  its  uttermost  limits.  Previously 
the  planters  fought  amongst  themselves,  and 
thus  enhanced  the  value  of  the  indigo  ryot,  and 
he  obtained  protection  from  rival  planters.  But 
the  shrewd  planters  saw  their  mistake,  and  formed 
themselves  into  a  body,  for  the  purpose  of  avoid- 
ing these  internal  dissensions.  From  that  day 
the  indigo  ryots  of  Bengal  became  utterly  help- 
less. And  when  everything  was  rife  for  an  out- 
burst, Babus  Vishnu  Charan  and  Digambar 
applied  the  lighted  match  to  the  fuse.  It  took 
however,  two  years  to  ignite  the  whole  country. 

Babu  Vishnu  Charan  left  the  planter's  service 
in  disgust.  He  saw,  and  was  made  to  do,  things 
which  shocked  his  feelings  ;  and  he  at  last  came 
to  the  determination  of  not  serving  the  planters, 
but  to  expel  them  from  the  country,  if  possible. 
He  knew  that  the  planters  never  resorted  to  law- 
courts  unless  they  were  forced  by  circumstances. 
Law  was  expensive  ;  but  this  deterred  them  not  so 
much  as  the  idea  that  going  to  the  law-courts 
would  cause  damage  to  their  prestige.  "Why 
should  I  allow  that  damaging  idea  to  be  circulated 
that  I  am  not  strong  enough  to  subdue  refractory 
ryots  and  that  I  have  a  master  in  the  hakims?" 

75 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

thought  the  average  planter.  Babu  Vishnu  Charan 
thought  that  the  first  thing  necessary  was  to 
defy  the  planter  ;  the  second  to  fight  a  battle  and 
win  it ;  and  the  third,  to  rouse  the  whole  country. 
He  knew  that  the  first  battle  won  would  secure  to 
him  allies.  The  ryots  had  been  goaded  to  despera- 
tion for  they  were  reduced  almost  to  the  condition 
of  Carolina  slaves  in  spite  of  the  law-courts  with 
which  the  country  was  studded. 

He  counselled  with  Digambar  Biswas  who 
heartily  entered  into  the  plot.  It  was  just  at  the 
time  when  Nana  Saheb  was  organizing  his  revolt. 
Nana's  efforts  were  directed  against  the  Govern- 
ment, those  of  the  two  Biswases  against  the 
planters.  The  first  thing  that  they  did  was  to 
prevent  the  ryots  of  their  village  from  sowing 
indigo,  and  to  promise  them  protection.  They 
sent  envoys  to  other  villages  to  induce  the  ryots  to 
join  in  the  combination,  and  engaged  the  services 
of  renowned  lathials  (clubmen)  whom  they  brought 
from  the  east,  i.  e.,  Barrisal.  All  the  villages 
declined  to  join  them  except  one,  and  to  that 
village  they  sent  eight  spearsmen  for  its  protection. 
The  planter,  who  was  thus  defied,  resolved  to  nip 
the  rebellion  in  the  bud,  and  collected  about  a 
thousand  men,  about  one  hundred  of  whom  were 
regulars.  Mind  all  these  preparations  were  being 
made  within  eight  to  ten  miles  of  the  sudder 
station,  the  town  of  Nadia ! 

76 


A  STORY   OF  PATRIOTISM    IN  BENGAL 

The   planters  spread   a  rumour  to  the  effect 
that  they  would  attack  the  village  of  Chougatcha 
on  a  certain  day,  and  in  the  morning  of  that  day 
actually     advanced    towards    it.     But     wheeling 
round  suddenly,  they  attacked  the  village  which 
had  joined  the  two  Biswases.     The  villagers  had 
entrenched    themselves    within    an    impenetrable 
fence  ;  but,  deceived  by  the  rumour  of  the  planters, 
they  had  sent  away  four  out  of  the  eight  lancers 
they    had  for  their   own    protection   to  help  the 
garrison  of  chougatcha.     They  were  thus  taken 
at  a  disadvantage,  and  found  themselves  surround- 
ed by  one  thousand  men.     The  fence  protected 
them  for   a  time,  but  eventually  the  village  was 
taken    by    assault   and    plundered,    one    of    the 
Sharkiwallas  or  spearsmen  being  wounded,  who 
subsequently  died  in  the  factory. 

So  the  first  battle  was  lost,  and  the  combina- 
tion might  have  collapsed,  but  for  an  extremely 
lucky  circumstance.  About  that  time,  the  district 
of  Nadia  was  in  charge  of  a  young  and  zealous 
officer  who,  unlike  the  majority  of  his  brother 
Magistrates,  had  no  particular  partiality  for  the 
planters.  The  fact  of  the  dispute  came  to  his 
notice,  and  taking  an  elephant,  he  came  to  make 
inquiries  personally.  He  found  that  the  planters 
were  the  aggressive  party,  and  he  began  to  deal 
even-handed  justice.  This  encouraged  the  ryots 
a  little,  and  Babus  Vishnu  Charan  and  Digambar 

77 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

freely  supplied  them  with  funds  for  law  and  other 
expenses.  The  name  of  this  Englishman,  to 
whom  Bengal  is  for  ever  indebted,  is  Mr.  R.  L 
Tottenham,  lately  one  of  the  Judges  of  the 
Calcutta  High  Court. 

This  officer  was  transferred  from  the  district, 
for  evincing  his  zeal  on  behalf  of  the  wronged, 
but  the  leaders  of  the  combination  tried,  by  all 
means  in  their  power,  to  keep  up  the  spirit  of  the 
ryots  who  had  thrown  off  the  yoke  of  the  planters. 
It  was  at  this  time  that  the  patience  and  patriotism 
of  the  Biswases  were  sorely  tried.  The  planters* 
scouts  kept  watch  day  and  night  for  the  purpose 
of  waylaying  them.  They  could,  therefore,  only 
travel  by  night  when  leaving  home.  Thev  were 
under  the  constant  apprehension  of  being  invaded 
in  their  own  village  by  overwhelming  numbers, 
and  they  slept  with  their  swords  drawn.  They 
engaged  the  services  of  a  large  body  of  lathials, 
who  kept  guard  over  the  village  day  and  night. 
Almost  all  the  villagers  had  sent  away  their 
families  to  live  in  the  houses  of  relatives. 

Any  ordinary  man  would  have  succumbed  to 
the  series  of  troubles  which  beset  the  Biswases, — 
troubles,  a  faint  idea  of  which  we  have  given 
above.  But  they  had  other  troubles  from  unexpec- 
ted quarters.  The  ryots,  for  whom  they  were 
suffering  so  much  in  every  way,  did  not  feel  that 
they  were  as  much  obliged  to  them,  as  the  Biswases 

78 


A  STORY  OF   PATRIOTISM   IN  BENGAL 

were  to  them  for  joining  in  the  combination. 
Comes  one  ryot  to  say  :  "I  owe  so  much  to  the 
planter,  and  I  cannot  pay  it.  If  I  join  him,  he 
will  make  over  the  bond  to  me.  If  you  pay  the 
amount  I  join  you."  The  Biswases  did  pay  the 
amount.  The  planters  obtained  decrees  against 
many  ryots,  but  the  money  was  ungrudgingly  paid 
by  the  Biswases.  There  were  ryots  who  were 
rascally  enough  to  lay  blackmail  upon  the  Biswas- 
es simply  for  their  forbearance  in  not  going 
against  them  ! 

Another  village  joined  them,  and  another. 
Within  the  course  of  a  year  and-a-half,  they  found 
the  factory  tottering.  The  ryots  had  become  then 
the  stronger  party.  The  tidings  spread  far  and 
wide  that  the  indigo  ryots  had  fought  and  won 
against  the  planters.  This  the  ryots  could  never 
believe  before.  Babus  Vishnu  Charan  and 
Digambar  shewed  by  their  disinterested  patriotism 
that  it  was  possible,  even  for  little  men  like  them, 
to  wage  a  war  with  the  formidable  planters  of 
Bengal  and  that  successfully.  The  prestige  of 
the  planters  was  thus  utterly  destroyed.  The  ryots 
of  Lokenathpore  concern  in  the  same  district  were 
the  next  to  take  up  arms,  and  within  the  course 
of  two  years,  from  the  time  the  patriots  had  taken 
into  their  head  to  form  a  combination  against  the 
planters,  the  whole  of  Bengal  was  up  against 
them. 

79 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

The  Babus  examined  their  accounts  and 
found  that  the  whole  affair  had  cost  them  only 
seventeen  thousand  rupees,  a  large  sum  consider- 
ing that  they  were  only  middle-class  men,  but 
ridiculously  small  when  the  gigantic  results 
obtained  were  considered.  They  never  made 
speeches,  nor  did  the  newspapers  parade  their 
good  works.  Their  names  are  not  even  known, 
and  this  is  the  first  time  that  we  are  induced  to 
give  publicity  to  their  doings.  Both  of  them  have 
left  descendants,  but  babu  Digambar  was  ruined, 
and  his  son  is  not  in  comfortable  circumstances 
now. 


BRAHMIN  AND  A  PLEBIAN 

India  owes  more  to  England  than  she  can 
ever  repay,  is  a  sentiment  we  found  in  the  columns 
of  an  Anglo-Indian  paper  a  few  days  ago.  This 
is  very  well-known  to  the  people  of  this  country, 
and  always  acknowledged  by  them  gratefullv. 
Perhaps  England  also  owes  some  obligations  to 
the  people  of  this  country.  They  say  in  honest 
pride  that,  "we  have  generously  given  you  educa- 
tion, good  roads,  railways,  law  courts  and  many 
other  institutions."  That  is  all  true,  but  we  shall 
here  tell  a  nice  story  of  a  Brahmin  and  a  plebeian, 
who  met  accidentally  on  their  way  to  Calcutta. 
They  accosted  each  other,  and  came  to  know  that 
they  were  going  in  the  same  direction,  for  the 
same  purpose,  viz.,  to  Calcutta  in  search  of 
employment.  Says  the  Brahmin  to  the  other : 
f  Now,  as  you  are  a  low-caste  man  and  can  only 
be  a  menia)  servant,  you  can  be  provided  for  at 
once.  I  will  do  it  for  you  ;  be  my  servant,  and  I 
will  make  you  a  reasonable  allowance."  This 
was  agreed  to  by  the  other. 

The  Brahmin  had  very  dirty  clothes  on,  while 
his  servant  had  provided  himself  with  clean  pieces. 
Says  the  Brahmin  again  : — "Rama,"  (this  was  the 
name  of  his  just-appointed  servant)   "  this  cannot 

81 
S— 6 


PICTURES  OK   INDIAN   LIFE 

be.  I,  your  master,  to  put  on  such  dirty  clothes 
and  you  to  wear  such  clean  and  nice  ones  !  This 
won't  do.  People  will  laugh  at  me,  but  that  I 
don't  care,  but  they  will  laugh  at  you.  So  let  us 
exchange  clothes."  To  this  very  reasonable 
request,  Rama,  of  course,  gave  his  assent.  And 
they  changed  their  clothes,  and  thus  attired,  they 
came  at  last  to  Calcutta. 

The  Brahmin  rented  a  small  hut,  and  asked 
Rama  whether  he  had  any  money  with  him.  "Yes, 
two  rupees  I  brought  from  home  for  passage 
expenses,"  says  Rama.  "  Well,  give  me  these 
two  rupees,  we  must  provide  for  our  immediate 
wants,"  says  the  Brahmin,  "and  besides,  the  land- 
lord will  have  to  be  paid  one  rupee  in  advance." 
Of  course,  Rama  could  not  object  to  this  second, 
and  still  more  reasonable,  request. 

Says  the  Brahmin  again  :  "  Now,  Rama,  you 
are  servant,  I  am  master.  It  is  your  duty  to  see 
that  I  may  be  put  to  no  trouble.  You  must  do  all 
the  work  of  the  house.  An  indolent  man  never 
prospers  in  this  world.  Besides,  to  tell  you  the 
truth,  I  am  a  little  strict.  If  I  find  you  in  fault,  I 
will  dismiss  you  immediately.  Well,  have  you 
finished  all  the  household  work?"  "Yes,  Sir,''  says 
Rama.  "  Have  you  had  a  bellyful  of  rice  ?''  asks 
the  master.  (Now,  be  it  remembered,  the  market- 
ing was  made  with  Rama's  money.)  "Yes,  Sir," 
replies  Rama  again.     Then  the  Brahmin  tells  him, 

82 


BRAHMIN  AND  A  PLEBIAN 

"  Now  let  me  take  my  rest  and  afternoon  nap, 
while  you  go  to  the  streets  to  beg.  Take  care, 
don't  loiter  in  the  streets.  I  shall  judge  you  by 
the  amount  you  bring  home." 

Rama  went  to  beg,  and  his  master  slept.  In 
the  evening,  Rama  came  back  with  a  good  many 
annas  in  his  pocket.  His  pocket  was  heavy  with 
copper.  Of  course,  all  that  Rama  brought  was 
taken  by  the  master.  Rama  worked  as  a  servant 
when  at  home  and  left  it  for  begging  every  day. 
When  he  came  home  every  evening,  his  master, 
of  course,  appropriated  all  his  earnings.  And,  in 
this  manner,  after  a  couple  of  months,  the  Brahmin 
found  a  good  many  rupees  in  his  box. 

One  day  he  had  some  private  talk  with 
his  servant.  "  Rama,"  said  he,  "  you  must  go 
home  to  my  wife.  I  must  make  a  remittance 
to  her,  for,  she  must  be  in  want.  I  am  sorry 
I  can't  send  her  much,  for,  you  bring  in  a 
very  small  amount  daily.  And  to  tell  you  the 
truth,  you  are  a  very  stupid  servant.  Indeed, 
I  had  intended  to  dismiss  you,  but  I  was  loath  to 
throw  you  adrift  in  the  world.  However,  carry 
all  this  money  that  I  have  been  able  to  scrape  to 
xny  native  village  to-morrow.  But  stop.  When 
you  go,  what  will  become  of  me  ?  Besides,  as  I 
am  sending  home  every  pice  I  have,  you  must  do 
one  thing.  Stop  two  days  more,  and  do  you  beg 
from  morn  to  midnight,  so  that  you  can  leave  me 

83 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 


provision  for  the  few  days  that  you  will  be 
absent.' 

This  was  settled,  and  when  Rama  was  going, 
he  begged  of  his  master  his  passage  expenses. 
The  master  looked  angrily  at  him.  "Rama,  you 
are  getting  to  be  a  very  expensive  luxury,  you 
heartless  rogue.  Do  you  mean  that  I  should  starve 
myself  to  proviJe  you  with  passage  expenses  ?  A 
fine  servant  he  who  wants  his  passage  expenses  ! 
You  ass,  beg  your  way  to  my  home,  and  don't 
trouble  me  with  your  odious  selfishness  again. 
Don't  forget  that  I  am  your  ma  bap,  and  had  I 
not  puc  you  in  the  way,  and  had  I  not  rented  this 
house  f  )r  you,  you  would  have  starved  in  the 
streets-' ' 

Aiier  providing  the  Brahmin  with  expenses 
for  several  days,  Rama  left  Calcutta,  and  begged 
his  way  to  the  native  village  of  the  Brahmin.  He 
found  out  the  house  of  his  master,  and  handed 
over  to  his  master's  wife  the  money  that  he  had 
brought. 

After  providing  Rama.with  some  refreshment, 
the  excellent  wife  of  the  Brahmin  asked  him, 
"  What  is  the  nature  of  the  service  that  your 
master  has  been  able  to  secure  so  soon  ?  "  Rama 
sail  in  reply  :  "Mother,  no  service  in  particular. 
I,  as  his  servant,  beg  in  the  streets,  from  the 
proceeds  of  which  this  amount  of  money  has  been 
sent  to  vou."  The  lady  paused  for  a  moment,  and 

84 


DU 
COI 


BRAHMIN  AND  A  PLEBIAN 

said  :  "Then,  I  suppose,  you  go  alone,  and  your 
master  does  not  accompany  you.''  "  No,  he  does 
not  "  said  Rama.  "  Then  I  suppose,  when  you 
come  back,  he  takes  of  you  an  account  of  the 
number  of  houses  you  resorted  to  and  the  amount 
you  received  from  each?"  "No,  that  he  does  nor," 
said  Rama  in  reply.  "Is  it  so?— said  the  lady 
in  reply,  "I  always  knew  him  to  be  a  foolish, 
worthless  careless  and  generous  sort  of  man.  He 
takes  no  account  ?  I  can  guess,  the  generous  fool 
will  never  prosper.  It  never  strikes  him  that  it  is 
in  your  power  to  forget  your  obligations  to  him 
and  conceal  a  portion  of  the  day's  earnings  from 
him.  His  generosity  will  ruin  him.  But  you, 
Rama,  don't  take  advantage  of  it.  You  must 
never  forget  that  you  can  never  repay  the  debt 
you  owe  to  your  master." 

It  may  be  objected  that  the  story  is  not  quite 
appropriate,  for,  a  large  amount  of  capital  came 
to  the  country  from  England.  That  is  quite  true, 
but  the  story  is  there ;  and  it  is  too  good  to  be 
lost  and  is  hence  put  on  record. 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST  STORY 

IT  was  bitter  cold,  for  the  month  was  January, 
and  the  weather  very  foul.  The  wife  of  a  poor 
Brahmin  was  shivering  in  her  hut,  for  she  had  no 
clothes  to  cover  herself.  She  advised  her  husband 
who  was  sitting  by  her,  that  he  should  take  up  a 
piece  of  cord  and  hang  himself,  since  he  could  not 
provide  his  wife  with  sufficient  clothing  to  cover 
her  body.  The  Brahmin  took  this  remark  of  his 
wife  very  much  to  heart,  made  a  deep  resolve  in 
his  mind,  and  left  home  immediately,  although  it 
was  a  dark  night  and  raining,  and  he  had  no 
clothing  to  protect  himself  against  the  biting  cold. 
His  wife  thought  that  he  left  her  in  a  huff  and 
would  soon  return  ;  but  he  did  not. 

The  Brahmin  left  the  village,  and  entered  a 
vast  plain,  in  the  middle  of  which  there  was  a  beet 
or  marsh.  He  found  that  it  was  colder  there  than 
in  the  village,  and  that  his  limbs  were  getting 
benumbed.  Indeed,  he  felt  that  he  was  losing  all 
his  strength,  and  had  scarcely  any  to  come  back 
to  his  hut.  In  short,  he  felt  that  he  would  die  in  a 
few  minutes,  if  he  did  not  return. 

At  this  critical  moment  he  saw  a  blazing  fire, 
which  seemed  to  be  burning  on  the  brink  of  the 
bee  J   referred   to   above.      The  sight   revived  his 

86 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST   STORY 

courage,  and   he  gave   up   his  determination  of 
seeking  home  again.     He  then  dragged  himself 
there  with  difficulty,  and  found  that  some  men,  as 
it  were,  were  warming  themselves  before  a  large 
fire.  The  fire  was  in  the  centre,  and  the  men  sat 
around.  It  never   occurred    to  him  that  S  fire  in  a 
place  like  that,  in  spite  of  the  rain  that  was  falling, 
would   be  a   strange    affair.     And   stranger  still 
would  it  be  for  men  to  be  warming  themselves  in 
a  place,    and    at   a   time,  like   that.     But  in  the 
condition    in   which   the  Brahmin   was,  all  these 
ideas  never  occurred  to  him.     He  saw  that  there 
was  no  place  for  him  to  sit  by  the  fireside,  so  he 
gave  a  slight  push  to    one  of  those   who   were 
warming  themselves,  with   a  request  to  move  a 
little  and   make  room  for  him  ;  and  then  he  let 
himself  drop  there.     What  he  said  when  he  gave 
the  push  was  in  colloquial  Bengalee,— for  he  was 
a  Bengalee  and   had  to  express  himself  in  a  few 
short  words,   as   he   had   no  strength  for  a  long 
speech.     What    he    said    was    only — sar  re   bhai 
tapai.  By  tapai  the  Brahmin  meant,  "let  me  warm 
myself."     Now,    sar    means  "movest,"  re  means 
"thou,"   bhai  means  "brother,"  tapai  means  "let 
me    warm    myself."    In    other    words    what   the 
Brahmin  meant  was  this,— "movest  thou,  brother, 
let  me  warm  myself.'' 

The  Brahmin  thus  seated   himself  before   the 
fire,   although  he  was  in  such  a  wretched  plight 

87 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIP 

that  he  had  not  life  enough  to  take  note  of  his  new 
acquaintances.  But  the  heat  of  the  blazing  fire 
soon  revived  him.  He  also  found  just  then  that 
his  new  acquaintances  were  talking  in  whispers, 
and  that  about  himself.  The  Brahmin  now  raised 
his  head  to  take  stock  of  the  company  in  which 
circumstances  had  thrown  him.  To  his  horror  he 
found  that  all  his  acquaintances  had  their  feet 
turned  backwards ! 

Now,  in  Europe,  ghosts  have  hoofs  instead  of 
feet,  but  in  India  they  have  their  feet  no  doubt, 
but  with  this  difference  that  while  human  beings 
have  their  toes  and  feet  in  the  front,  the  g 
have  theirs  behind.  Why  European  ghosts  should 
have  hoofs  and  their  Indian  brethren  feet  turned 
backwards, — is  a  problem  which  is  not  easy  of 
solution.  It  has  been  established  beyond  doubt 
that  the  Europeans  must  pass  through  a  few 
hundreds  of  births  more  before  they  could  be  as 
perfect  specimens  of  humanity  as  the  Indians  are. 
In  the  same  manner,  it  may  be  urged,  that  the 
ghosts  of  Europe  belong  to  an  undeveloped  species, 
and  that  if  they  have  hoofs  now,  in  time,  after  a 
few  hundred  births  more,  they  may  get  in  their 
place  human  feet,  though  turned  backwards,  as 
the  Indian  ghosts  have. 

But  to  proceed  with  the  story.  When  the 
Brahmin  saw  that  all  his  acquaintances  were  a 
company  of  ghosts,  every  hair  of  his   body   stood 

88 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST   STORY 

erect.  He  thought  that  he  was  lost ;  and  a  feeling 
of  faintness  very  naturally  came  over  him.  In 
his  terror  he  began  to  invoke  all  the  gods  in  the 
heavens  to  protect  him  from  his  dreadful 
companions;  though,  of  course,  for  fear  of  offending 
them  he  was  doing  so  in  his  heart,  without  their 
knowledge.  Just  then,  he  was  roused  by  a 
question  from  one  of  the  ghosts. 

But  here  some  preliminary  explanations  are 
necessary.  When  the  Brahmin  had  given  a  push 
to  a  ghost  to  make  room  for  himself,  our  readers 
would  remember  that,  to  give  emphasis  to  his 
motion,  he  had  uttered  some  words,  one  of  which 
was  tapai.  Now,  the  ghost  to  whom  he  had  given 
the  push,  unluckily  or  luckily,  bore  the  name  of 
"Tapai.''  The  matter  then  stood  thus  :  What  the 
Brahmin  meant  was  "movest,  thou,  brother,  let  me 
warm  myself ;  "  but  what  the  ghosts  understood 
was  that  the  Brahmin  knew  "Tapai",  and  hence 
he  had  called  him  by  name,  and  asked  him  to 
move  to  make  room  for  him  (the  Brahmin).  In 
short,  they  understood  that  the  Brahmin  had  only 
addressed  an  old  acquaintance  saying,  "  Movest 
thou,  brother  Tapai." 

The  ghosts  wondered  how  the  Brahmin 
could  know  the  name  of  Tapai,  who  was  a 
ghost  and  the  Brahmin  only  a  man  ;  so  they 
held  a  conference  in  whispers.  One  wanted 
to     know   of    Tapai    himself,     whether   he     and 

89 


PICTURES   OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

the  Brahmin  were  previously  known  to  each 
other.  But  Tapai  denied  all  knowledge  of  the 
Brahmin.  They  then  all  came  t  »  an  agreement 
on  this  point,  which  was  to  ask  the  Brahmin 
himself  direct,  to  explain  how  he  had  come  to 
know  the  name  of  Tapai.  S  >,  while  the  Brahmin 
was  at  the  point  of  falling  down  in  a  swoon  from 
bight,   he   was  a  !  It  i      rapai  himself.    I 

said,  '•'/v,'  Brahmin)  how  could  you  kn<>w 

that  my  name  was   Tapai  I " 

The  question   roused  tl  min    to   a  fall 

conscious  oess    'this  is  p      dm.      In  tin. 

of         i  r  the  mind  vi  h  rapidity.     He  v 

then  in  desperate  circumstance  an  1  he  found  that 
he  must  act  \vith  promptitu  le  t<>  save  himself.  An 
idea  entered  his  head  an  1  he  wanted  to  put  it 
into  action.  He  did  nut  give  any  direct  reply 
the  question  put  to  him,  but  he  rose  and  caught 
hold  of  the  hair  of  Tapai,  an  1  threateningly 
addressed  him  thus  : — "  Don't  I  know  you,  Tapai, 
you  rascal  ?  If  you  have  forgotten  me,  I  have  not 
forgotten  you.  Where  is  my  three  hun  ire  1  rupees 
which  you  owed  me  ?  I  demand  instant  payment. 
And  if  you  do  it  not,  I  will  make  you  longer  by 
two  cubits  by  a  profuse  beating  of  the  shoe."  Of 
course,  the  Brahmin  had  no  shoes  on,  nor  had  he 
ever  known  what  shoe-wearing  was,  but  he  used 
that  expression,  "shoe-beating",  in  order  to  fright- 
en   the  ghosts. 

90 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST   STORY 

Tapai,  taken  aback  by  this  sudden  attack,, 
stammered  out  a  reply  to  the  effect  that  he  never 
knew  anything  about  the  debt.  "But,  Thakoor"r 
said  he,  "when  did  I  borrow  money  from  you?" 
The  Brahmin  had  already  framed  the  reply.  He 
said:  "Of  course,  it  was  not  you  who  borrowed  the 
money  but  your  father,  and  if  I  can  get  hold  of 
him  I  will  teach  him  a  lesson  which  he  will  never 
forget."  The  fact  was,  all  the  ghosts  that  were 
sitting  there  were  young,  and  the  Brahmin  could 
see  that  Tapai's  father  was  not  among  them. 

When  the  Brahmin  said  that  it  was  Tapai's 
father  who  had  borrowed  the  money,  they  all  said 
that  Tapai's  father  was  dead.  This  was  another 
piece  of  good  luck  which  the  Brahmin  thought  of 
utilizing  at  once.  He  said,  "And  because  your 
father  is  dead,  am  I,  therefore,  to  lose  my  money? 
Is  this  the  sense  of  justice  of  ghosts?  Take  that  as 
an  earnest,"  and  down  came  the  fist  of  the 
Brahmin  upon  the  devoted  back  of  poor  Tapai. 
The  Brahmin  was  strong, — desperation  had  made 
him  stronger,  and  the  blow  fell  upon  the  back  of 
Tapai  like  a  sledge  hammer. 

Now,  if  the  ghosts  had  so  minded,  anyone  of 
them  could  have  trampled  five  hundred  Brahmins 
like  him  under  foot.  But  it  must  be  borne  in  mind 
that  ghosts  are  a  stupid  race;  besides,  everyone  of 
them  was  quite  young,  none  being  older  than  10 
or   12.     The    real    fact,    however,    was   that  the 

9i 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN    LIFE 

attitude  of  the  Brahmin  confounded  them  and  took 
away  the  little  sense  they  possessed.  The  Brahmin 
was  a  great  bully;  everyone  knows  that  in  the 
Kali-yug,  a  bully,  generally  speaking,  is  always; 
the  master  in  every  situation.  When  the  Brahmin 
looked  threateningly  at  the  friends  of  Tapai,  they 
feared.be  might  let  go  his  victim  and  fall  upon 
them.  The  oldest  among  them,  however,  muttered 
that  there  was  no  law  that  one  should  be  murder- 
ed for  his  debts,  far  less  for  those  that  were  con- 
tracted by  his  father. 

The  Brahmin  smiled.  He  said,  "Do  you  call 
this  gentle  touch  of  mine,  murder?  IfTapai's  father 
had  been  here,  you  would  have  seen  what  a  blow 
I  always  carry  for  my  defaulting  debtor.  I  am  by 
nature  a  merciful  man  and,  therefore,  I  am  show- 
ing great  consideration  to  Tapai,  you  ungrateful 
creatures.  I  am  willing  still  to  show  some  more 
favours  to  him.  1  will  relinquish  all  my  interest. 
Let  him  only  pay  the  principal.  But  it  must  be 
paid  cash  down." 

With  this  the  Brahmin  raised  his  hand,  as  if 
to  inflict  another  blow  for  the  purpose  of  giving 
emphasis  to  his  proposition.  The  blow  did  not 
come,  though  Tapai  shrieked  in  apprehension. 
The  Brahmin  was  a  lucky  individual.  Tapai  was 
an  orphan,  and  had  no  one  but  his  maternal 
uncle,  by  name  Banroo,  who  had  exactly  three 
hundred    rupees,     which  he  had  kept  concealed 

92 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST   STORY 

Underneath  the  roots  of  a  palm  tree.  This  fact 
'was  known  to  all  the  ghosts  ;  yet  nobody  dared  to 
'meddle  with  that  sum.  For  Banroo  was  the  most 
terrible  and  cruel  of  all  the  ghosts  in  the  neighbour- 
'hood . 

The  ghosts  held  a  secret  consultation,  and 
one  of  them  proposed  that  Banroo's  three  huudred 
rupees  should  be  paid  to  the  Brahmin.  To  this 
proposal  Tapai  did  not  agree;  he  said  that  he 
would  rather  incur  the  wrath  of  the  Brahmin 
than  that  of  his  uncle.  But  all  the  ghosts  assured 
Tapai  that  as  he  was  Banroo's  nephew,  and  that 
as  he  was  going  to  meddle  with  the  amount  only 
to  save  his  life,  they  would  all  combine  to  protect 
him  from  the  wrath  of  his  uncle.  The  money  was 
dug  up,  counted  one  by  one,  and  paid  to  the 
Brahmin. 

Here  was,  however,  another  difficult  ;  the 
Brahmin  did  not  venture  to  let  go  the  hold  I  e  had 
upon  Tapai.  His  idea  was  that  it  would  be  dan- 
gerous to  release  Tapai,  and  then  carry  the  wuiey 
home,  leaving  the  ghosts  behind  him  to  do  the 
mischief  they  could.  So  he  said  in  an  an^  me: 
"Am  I  to  carry  all  this  money  home?  Ta]  ou 

must  go  with  me  with  this  bag."     But  T   •  as 

afraid  to  .go   alone,    and  so   a  few   otru  >re 

induce  1  to   accompany  him.     Thus  the  min 

with  the  lock  of  Tapai's  hair  in  his  hands.  rhe 

money  bag  on  the  latter's  shoulders,  accc.i   |       led 

93 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

by  half-a-dozen  ghosts,  returned  to  the  village. 
The  Brahmin  thought  that  it  would  not  be  safe  to 
show  his  house  to  the  ghosts  ;  besides,  his  poor 
hut  would  go  very  much  against  his  pretension  of 
being  a  money-lender.  So,  he  pointed  out  the 
house  of  another  Brahmin  instead  of  his  own — of 
one  who  was  comparatively  in  better  circumstan- 
ces,— took  the  bag  in  his  hands  and  dismissed  the 
ghosts;  and  they  fled  precipitately  without  look- 
ing behind.  The  Brahmin  entered  his  hut,  threw 
the  bag  of  money  before  his  wife  and  declare  I. 
"See,  you  wretch,  whether  your  husband  is  worth 
anything  or  not.'' 

Banroo,  who  had  gone  on  an  errand  to  the 
South  Pole,  came  home  a  few  days  after  the  inci- 
dent described  above.  The  first  thing  he  did  on 
his  arrival  was  to  take  a  peep  at  his  buried  trea- 
sure. Seeing  his  mony  gone,  he  flew  into  a  fit  of 
ungovernable  passion,  and  uprooted  the  palm  tree 
in  his  fury,  with  his  pair  of  horns,  for  he  had  two 
of  them, — short  and  well-pointed. 

Here  parenthetically  let  us  remark,  that  all 
ghosts  have  not  horns.  A  few  have,  but  the  majo- 
rity are  without  them.  In  this  manner  some  have 
their  tails,  others  three  legs,  and  some,  though 
they  have  legs,  do  not  walk  with  them  but  on  their 
heads.  It  is  also  said  that  some  have 
the  shape  of  a  dome,  while  others  eat  with  their 
eyes,     having  no  mouth.    But  it    is  a  herculean 

94 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST   STORY 

task  to  describe   the   peculiarities  of  the  race   of 
ghosts. 

Banroo  then  went  straight  to  kill  his  nephew. 
But  others  came  to  the  latter's  rescue.  In  short, 
everything  was  fully  explained  to  him.  When 
Banroo  had  heard  everything  he  burst  into  a  loud 
fit  of  laughter,  which  sounded  like  the  howl  of  a 
hyena.  People  in  the  nearest  village  thought  that 
it  was  a  hyena  that  was  laughing,  but  it  was 
Banroo.  Said  he,  "I  have  heard  that  laughter 
sometimes  follows  great  misery.  I  cannot  help 
laughing  at  my  own  misery.  And  fools,  did  it 
never  occur  to  you  that  the  Brahmin  was  only  a 
man  that  ghosts  never  borrow  money  of  men,  and 
that  you  could  have  killed  him  then  and  there  ?" 

The  oldest  amongst  them  replied,  "  We  know 
that  you  have  great  courage,  but  it  would  have 
oozed  out  before  the  blows  of  the  Brahmin.  If  you 
were  there,  you  would  have,  of  your  own  accord, 
paid  the  money  to  appease  his  wrath.  If  we  are 
ghosts,  he  is  an — arch-ghost." 

Banroo  said,  "Stop  fools  I  must  recover  the 
money  and  also  teach  the  Brahmin  a  lesson. 
He  must  know  what  it  is  to  meddle  with  us 
ghosts.     But  you  must  point  out  to  me  the  house." 

All  the  ghosts,  however,  declined ;  they 
apprehended  another  attack  from  the  Brahmin. 
Banroo  then  caught  his  nephew  by  the  neck,  and 
told  him  that  he  must  either  pay  him  the   money, 

95 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

or  point  out  to  him  the  house  of  the  Brahmin. 
Tapai  found  that  he  must  go ;  so  he  accompanied 
his  uncle,  pointed  out  to  him  the  house  of  the 
Brahmin  from  a  distance,  and  fled.  Of  course, 
it  need  not  be  explained  here  that  the  house  he 
pointed  out  was  not  that  of  the  hero  of  this  tale, 
but  of  the  other  and  wealthier  Brahmin  of  the 
village. 

It  was  at  about  9  o'clock  at  night  when  Banroo 
reached  the  house  of  the  Brahmin.  There  was  big, 
bushy  tamarind  tree  by  the  wall  which  surrounded 
the  house,  and  he  took  his  seat  upon  a  projecting 
branch  thereof,  watching  his  opportunity  and  the 
course  of  events.  The  owner  of  the  house  was  an 
old  Brahmin,  who  had  a  young  son.  He  had  a 
cow  which  was  missing  and  which  was  name  1 
"Benre."    because  it   had    somehow  I  i    tail. 

Brahmin   junior,    after   dinner,    came    out    of   the 
house  to  wash   himself.  He  had  no   no  that  a 

terrible  ghost  was   sitting  close    by,   an  I    fiercely 
and    threateningly    looking    at  him  from  the   pi 
jecting  branch  of  the  tamarind   tree,  on  which    he 
was  perched.  While    washing  himself,  the    you 
Brahmin  saw  before  him  the  missing  cow  'Benre.'' 
In  the  delight  of  his  heart   he    called  aloud  to   his 
father.   "Papa,"    said  he,  "Banroo  is  come."  Now, 
it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  name  of  the  c 
w -as  "Benre"  and  not  Banroo;    but   it  was  called 
"Banroo''  in  a  tone  of  banter.  Benre,  the  cow,  was 

96 


AN  ORTHODOX  GHOST   STORY 

called  Banroo  to  express  indignation  at  her  truant 
conduct. 

The  young  Brahmin  said,  "Papa,  Banroo  is 
at  last  come."  No  sooner  had  he  uttered  it  than 
Banroo,  the  ghost,  started.  He  muttered  to  him- 
self, "How  could  he  know  that  I  am  here  ?"  But 
the  young  Brahmin  continued, — "Banroo,  I  was 
expecting  you.  So  you  are  come  just  in  time.'' 
Banroo  in  the  tree  felt  very  uncomfortable.  He 
thought  that  this  was  very  queer,  and  the  strange- 
ness of  his  position  gave  him  a  good  deal  of 
uneasiness.  But  the  young  Brahmin  continued, 
"Banroo,  I  have  this  time  provided  myself  with  a 
strong  piece  of  cord  for  the  benefit  of  your  fine 
horns."  Banroo  began  to  move  backward  slowly, 
to  make  his  presence  still  more  unknown  if  possi- 
ble. But  the  young  Brahmin  went  on  to  say, 
"Papa,  Banroo  is  restless  and  he  means  flight. 
Fetch  me  that  new  piece  of  cord  so  that  I  can 
secure  him  at  once."  Banroo  felt  his  horns  with 
his  two  hands,  and  he  thought  that  he  would  never 
permit  the  cord  to  be  put  round  them.  He  now 
began  to  retreat  rather  rapidly.  Just  then  the  cow 
was  leaving  the  place.  So  the  young  Brahmin 
said,  "Papa,  be  quick  with  the  cord,  Banro<  >  is 
escaping  my  hands."  The  old  Brahmin  thereupon 
threw  a  piece  of  cord  from  the  house  an  i  r'ie 
young  Brahmin  ran  to  fetch  it.  But  Banroo  the 
ghost  vas  not  to    lose  this  opportunity  ;  he   c<  >uld 

97 
S-7 


PICTUR1  5  01     INDIAN   l.N  l 

bear  it  no  longer.  By  a  big  ghostly  jump  he 
reached  the  ground  from  the  high  branch  wh< 
he  had  been  perching,  and  fU-<l  with  a  loud  shriek 
towards  his  haunt  The  villagers  thought  that  it 
was  only  the  howl  of  a  jackal ;  but  no,  it  was  <>f 
Banroo. 


THE  STORY  OF  A  LUNATIC 

ONE-HALF  of  the  world  thinks  the  other  half 
mad  ;  but  there  is  no  harm  in  this  argument,  for 
the  halves  are  equally  matched.  If  the  man  of  the 
world  laughs  at  a  pious  man,  the  pious  man  also 
weeps  over  the  wretched  condition  of  the  worldly 
man.  If  what  pious  men  say  be  true  that  there  is 
an  after  world  and  men  there  will  have  to  give  an 
account  of  their  wicked  deeds,  then  most  of  the 
greatest  men  of  the  human  species  are  mad  men 
no  doubt. 

But  the  matter  assumes  a  quite  different  aspect 
when  a  so-called  mad  man  is  in  a  minority  in  a 
combat  with  another  so-called  lunatic  ;  for,  the 
other  party,  who  thinks  him  mad,  being  the 
stronger,  overpowers  his  opponent,  and  puts  him 
into  a  lunatic  asylum.  Kristo  Sarkar,  whose  story 
we  were  just  going  to  relate,  was  thus  over- 
powered by  a  stronger  party,  and  kept  in  the 
Dullanda  Lunatic  Asylum  for  eight  months,  and 
is  being  sent  there  again  as  a  lunatic. 

Kristo  Sarkar  is  now  on  bail ;  and,  on  the 
expiry  of  its  term,  he  will,  under  the  orders  of  the 
Bengal  Government,  be  again  put  into  the  Lunatic 
Asylum  at  Dullanda.  Fancy  the  arrangement  of 
setting  a  lunatic  at  liberty  on  bail !  He  has  only  a 

99 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

few  clays  of  liberty  before  him,  and  after  that  he 
will  be  incarcerated  during  the  term  of  his  life. 
And  Kristo  Sarkar  takes  advantage  of  the  few 
davs  he  has  before  him  to  run  clown  to  Calcutta 
and  see  what  he  can  do  to  escape  from  his 
doom. 

Kristo  Sarkar,  who  will  be  sent  to  the  lunatic 
asylum  on  the  ground  of  his  being  a  dangerous 
maniac,  however,  sits  before  us,  and  relates  his 
own  story.  Of  course,  he  has  given  bail  and  he 
cannot  offer  any  violence  upon  us  without  forfeit- 
ing his  bond.  The  authorities,  who  let  loose  this 
dangerous  lunatic  in  societv,  know  verv  well  that 
he  being  bound  hand  and  foot  by  his  bond,  would 
not  be  able  to  do  harm,  and  so  he  is  allowed  to 
come  out  of  the  asylum  only  for  some  weeks.  But 
to  proceed  with  his  story,  he  says  that  he  was 
accused  of  having  killed  an  old  woman  by  biting 
her  cheek.  He  was  hauled  up  on  a  charge  of 
culpable  homicide  ;  but  the  Civil  Surgeon  gave 
him  a  certificate  that  he  was  a  dangerous  lunatic, 
and,  on  that  ground,  he  v.- as  acquitted.  The 
Magistrate  who  tried  the  case  reported  the  matter 
to  Go.ernment,  and  the  Government  have  ordered 
the  authorities  to  send  him  up  to  the  lunatic 
asylum. 

Kristo  Sarkar  has  all  the  papers  of  his  case 
with  him,  and  he  shows  us  the  judgment  of  the 
Magistrate  which  runs  as  follows  : — 

ioo 


THE  STORY  OF  A  LUNATIC 

"The  evidence  for  the  prosecution  leaves  no- 
oubt  that  Kristo  Sarkar  bit  the  sick  and  bed- 
dden  old  woman  Bidhu  Dassi,  in  the  cheek,  and 
lereby  accelerated  her  death.  The  act  was  done 
1  a  fit  of  insanity  and  would  have  amounted  to 
rievous  hurt  if  Kristo  Sarkar  had  been  sane, 
kristo  Sarkar  is  acquitted  on  the  ground  of 
isanity.  The  case  will  be  reported  for  orders  of 
le  Government  in  due  course." 

The  dangerous  maniac  then  shows  to  us  the 
;port  of  the  Surgeon  who  made  the  post  mortem 
xamination,  on  the  body  of  the  old  woman,  and 
re  extract  the  following  from  it: — 

"The  probable  cause  of  death  was  extensive 
emorrhage  of  the  skin  in  various  parts  of  the 
ody,  effusion  in  the  brain,  discharge  of  blood  from 
le  lacerated  wound  in  the  lip  coupled  with  a  bad 
:ate  of  health.  I  did  not  see  any  'mark  of  teeth  in 
le  lacerated  wound.  The  deceased  must  have 
iceived  blows  on  the  ribs  and  on  her  head.  The 
lird  and  fourth  ribs  of  the  left  side,  and  the  2nd, 
rd,  -Lth,  and  5th   ribs  of  the  right  side  broken." 

Kristo  Sarkar  draws  our  attention  to  the 
bove,  and  tells  us,  "Now  see,  sir,  who  is  the  mad 
lan,  I  or  the  Magistrate  ?  I  am  accused  of  having 
itten  the  woman  with  my  teeth,  the  result  of 
rhich  was  that  there  were  no  marks  of  teeth  on 
le  person  of  the  dead  woman,  but  her  ribs  were 
roken  !  Now,  sir,  you  have  a  world-wide  celebrity 

101 


PICTURES  OF    INDIAN   LIFE 

for  being  an  impartial,  just,  frank,  out-spoken 
man.  Tell  me,  sir.  I  repeat,  whether  I  or  the 
Magistrate  is  the  mad  man." 

Now,  this  was  a  most  difficult  and  delicate 
question  to  answer.  It  appeared  to  us  that  reason 
was  on  the  side  of  th  ealleged  lunatic,  but  he  was 
in  the  minority.  To  side  with  him  would  be 
altogether  a  risky  business,  so  what  we  did  was 
not  to  give  any  reply  to  his  question,  but  we 
asked  him  to  proceed  with  his  story.  He  then 
said  :  "  Perhaps,  sir,  you  are  not  decided,  but 
I  shall  at  once  settle  the  question  for  you,"  and 
he  opened  his  mouth  ami  showed  us  that  his 
lower  jaw  was  devoid  of  nearly  half-a-dozen  teeth! 
•  Now,  sir,"  continued  he,  "how  could  a  man 
manage  to  bite  with  one  set  of  teeth  ?  The  % 
Magistrate,  however,  adjudges  that  I  did  perform 
that  impossible  feat.  Now,  give  me,  sir,  I  entreat 
you,  your  frank  opinion,  who  Is  the  really  mad 
man — he  or  I  ?  " 

We  told  him,  "Do  not,  please,  press  us  for  an 
answer.  Either  you  or  the  Hakim  who  tried  you 
must  be  mad,  and  in  going  to  decide  the 
question, — who  is  really  the  mad  man, — we  ma\ 
ourselves  lose  the  balance  of  our  head.  You  are 
leading  us  to  dangerous  ground,  so,  please,  go  on 
with  your  story."  Thereupon  he  stopped,  and 
handed  over  to  us  a  copy  of  the  deposition  of 
Dr.  Henry  Purves,  the  Civil  Surgeon  of  Burdwan, 

102 


THE  STORY  OF  A   LUNATIC 

entreating  us  to  read  it  carefully.  We  did  it,  and 
for  the  edification  of  our  readers,  we  insert  it 
below  : — 

"  I  have  examined  the  man,  Kristo  Sarkar, 
now  in  the  Burdwan  Jail,  on  a  charge  of  culpable 
homicide.  It  appears  to  me,  from  what  I  have 
learned  of  his  history  and  what  I  have  seen  of 
him,  that  he  is  a  dangerous  lunatic  and  that  he  is 
unfit  at  present  to  stand  his  trial.  Though  he 
apparently  gives  rational  answers  to  questions 
put  to  him,  I  believe,  he  is  incapable  of  entering 
on  his  defence.  He  shows  a  good  deal  of  cunning 
when  being  questioned  and  that  makes  him  more 
dangerous.  I  think  he  ought  to  be  detained  in  a 
Lunatic  Asylum  for  observation  and  safe  custody/ 

When  we  had  finished  reading  the  deposition 
of  the  Civil  Surgeon,  Kristo  Sarkar  said,  "The 
Doctor  Saheb  put  me  down  for  a  mad  man 
because  I  gave  rational  answers.  It  seems  the 
Doctor  Saheb's  idea  of  a  sane  man  is  that  he 
must  talk  incoherently.  Then  I  am,  according 
to  him,  not  only  mad,  but  'dangerous';  dangerous 
because  I  showed  some  '  cunning,'  in  giving  my 
answers.  The  fact  is,  when  I  was  put  upon  my 
examination,  I  tried  my  best  to  give  intelligent 
answers,  because  I  felt  that  it  was  within  the 
power  of  the  Doctor  either  to  procure  my  release,  t 
or  to  send  me  to  the  Lunatic  Asylum.  The  resul 
is,  that  my  sanity   convinced   the  Doctor  of  my 

103 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

insanity,  and  now  I  am  to  pass  my  days  in  the 
Lunatic  Asylum  because  I  gave  rational  and 
cunning  answers  !  '' 

For  ourselves  we  must  tell  what  we  felt  on 
the  occasion.  We  have  hear  J  of  sane  men  feigning 
insanity,  successfully  rarely,  unsuccessfully  gener- 
ally, but  we  have  never  heard  of  a  lunatic 
feigning  sanity  and  so  successfully.  Kristo  Sarkar 
is  feigning  sanity,  he  is  doing  it  with  complete 
success,  and  he  is  a  psychological  phenomenon, 
the  possibility  of  which  was  never  admitted  before. 

Kristo  Sarkar  thus  related  how  he  fared  in 
the  Lunatic  Asylum.  He  said  that  the  life  he  led 
there  was  horrible  indeed,  and  he  wonders  that 
he  did  not  turn  mad  though  he  was  eight  months 
t  ere.  He  said,  "I  prefer  a  hundred  deaths 
to  the  life  I  led  in  the  Lunatic  Asylum. 
Now  just  conceive  my  position.  I  was 
sourrounded  on  all  sides  by  mad  men.  Though 
a  perfectly  sane  man,  more  sane  perhaps  than  the 
Civil  Surgeon  of  Burdwan  and  the  Magistrate  who 
tried  me,  yet  I  was  doomed  to  pass  my  time  with 
companions  who  were  most  of  them  raving 
maniacs.  I  had  nobody  to  talk  to  but  these  men 
bereft  of  sense.  Some  of  them  took  a  delight  in 
thrashing  me.  One  day  a  violent  lunatic  had 
nearly  killed  me.  Almost  not  a  day  passed  without 
my  receiving*  some  sort  of  ill-treatment  at  their 
hands.     In   short,   I   was   constantly  in   dread   of 

104 


THE  STORY  OF  A  LUNATIC 

them,  and  my  life  was  completely  at  their 
mercy. 

"At  night  I  had  to  sleep  in  the  same  room 
with  these  lunatics.  Fortunately,  my  night  com- 
panions were  not  of  a  violent  temper.  But  yet 
their  strange  hallucinations  produced  an  indes- 
cribable feeling  in  me.  I  really  began  to  be  affec- 
ted by  them,  and  sometimes  doubts  arose  in  my 
mind  whether  I  was  really  a  mad  man  or  not. 
Then  my  thoughts  ran  to  my  persecutors,  to  the 
Zemindar,  the  Civil  Surgeon  and  the  Magistrate 
who  had  been  the  cause  of  my  incarceration,  and 
I  called  upon  Heaven  to  forgive  them  for  the 
miseries  which  lowed  to  them.  Indeed,  sir,  can 
you  tell  me,  why  these  man  should  combine 
against  me,  and  subject  me  to  the  sufferings  of 
hell  on  earth  ?  I  do  not  remember  to  have  done 
any  the  least  harm  to  them."  The  man  was 
evidently  a  very  pious  Vaishnava. 

Here  the  poor  man  turned  serious,  his  eyes 
moistening  with  tears,  ^and  the  sight  of  his  woe- 
begone face  would  have  perhaps  melted  a  hard 
stone.  He  then  said  he  was  made  to  work  from 
morning  till  5-30  P.M.,  in  the  evening,  constantly, 
getting  only  one  hour's  respite  for  dinner.  He 
saw  how  the  lunatics  were  thrashed  by  their 
guards  for  refusing  to  do  work,  and  he  therefore 
never  neglected  the  task  allotted  to  "him.  But  it 
was  too  much  for  him,  he  said,  to  work  for  11  or 

105 


PICTURES   OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

12  hours  daily.  "A  heart  of  burden,"  remarked 
he,  "breaks  down  if  thus  worked."  He  was  fed 
upon  unhusked  rice  and  a  little  vegetable,  cooked 
in  the  most  abominable  fashion  imaginable.  The 
other  lunatics  had  mutton  every  other  day,  but 
being  a  Vaishnava,  unused  to  take  meat,  he 
never  touched  it.  What  pained  him  the  most 
was  the  fact  that  he  was  compelled  to  eat  his  f  >od 
often  polluted  by  the  touch  cf  lunatics,  who  were 
either  low  caste  men,  or  Mahometans. 

But  it  would  not  have  matters  much  if  Kr 
Sarkar s  sufferings  were  at  an  end,  but  as  we  said 
he  is  again  going  to  be  put  into  the  asylum.  This 
time  it  is  not  the  Magistrate  or  Dr.  Purves,  who 
sends  him  there,  but  the  Government  of  Bengal. 
Indeed,  the  Magistrate,  in  his  report  to  the  Gov- 
ernment, acknowledges  that,  since  Kristo  Sarkar's 
return  from  the  asylum  he  is  "  apparently  per- 
fectly sane",  and  "he  ought  not  to  be  detained  in 
an  asylum.''  The  Civil  Surgeon  of  Burdwan  does 
not  see  "the  wild  stare"  which  he  used  to  mark  in 
him  whilst  he  was  in  the  Burdwan  jail.  The  wife 
of  Kristo  Sarkar  also  petitioned  the  Lieutenant- 
Governor,  alleging  that  her  husband  was  never  a 
lunatic,  and  that  it  was  through  the  machinations 
of  his  enemies  that  he  had  been  place  1  in 
the  unfortunate  position  he  was.  But  all  these 
appear  to  have  gone  for  nothing,  and  the  order 
comes     from      the       Lieutenant-Governor      that 

1 06 


THE  STORY  OF  A  LUNATIC 

he  should    be    again  locked  up   in   the  Lunatic 
Asylum  ! 

We  do  not  blame  the  Lieutenant-Governor: 
he  is  not  acquainted  with  the  circumstances  of  the 
case,  and  has  been  guided  by  routine  merely.  But 
he  ought  to  have  taken  into  consideration  the 
remarks  of  the  Magistrate  who  considers  Kristo 
Sarkar  to  be  now  apparently  sane,  and  that  of  the 
Civil  Surgeon  who  says  that  he  has  no  longer 
that  mad  stare.  Indeed,  with  these  facts  and 
recommendations  before  His  Honour,  Kristo 
Sarkar  should  not  be  sent  to  the  Lunatic  Asylum 
again  without  a  previous  medical  examination 
by  thoroughly  competent  persons,  by  persons  who 
will  not  put  him  down  for  a  mad  man  by  reason 
of  giving  rational  answers.* 


*    Let  it  be  noted  here  that    agitation   in  the  press    had  its 
effect  and  the  alleged  lunatic  was  released. 


THE  RAILWAY  PLATFORM 

BHAWANEE  Babu  was  attentively  turning 
over  the  pages  of  the  Gazette  when  he  suddenly 
came  cross  a  most  important  Notification,  announc- 
ing the  date  and  hour  of  the  departure  of  Lord 
Lytton  from  Calcutta.  Bhawanee  Babu,  being  a 
little  nervous,  was  deeply  moved,  and  it  took  him 
some  time  to  recover  from  the  shock  the  announce- 
ment had  given  him.  When  his  perturbed  spirit 
was  a  little  calmed,  he  hastily  summoned  his 
Dew  an,  who  had  his  office  downstairs.  The 
Dewan  heard  the  summons,  and  hurriedly  present- 
ed himself  before  his  lord,  with  a  pen  stuck  in  his 
ear  and  a  bunch  of  keys  in  his  left  hand.  "Well, 
Dewanjee,"  says  Bhawanee  Babu,  "the  Burra  Lat 
Shaheb  goes  away  from  Calcutta  seven  days 
hence,  you  know  I  must  bid  him  farewell  at  the 
Rationalist  way." 

Dewan. — Certainlv,  that  vou  must  do,  Huzoor. 
Has  the  Burra  Shaheb  written  to  you   about  it? 

Bhawanee  Babu. — Well,  yes  and  no.  It  is 
true  he  has  not  written  to  me  direct,  but  he  has 
intimated  it  in  such  a  manner  as  1  may  know  it. 
E>on't  you  see  it  would  be  invidious  to  write  to  me 
direct  ? 

Dewan. — Certainly,  Huzoor.  Directly  or  indir- 

108 


THE   RAILWAY  PLATFORM 

ectly,     it  matters   not.    It   is  clear   that  it  is     His 
Excellency's    wish  that     you  should  be  present. 

B.  Babu. — Of  course.  If  I  don't  go,  what  will 
the  Burra  Shaheb  think  ?  What  will  other  Shahebs 
think?  What  will  the  public  think?  I,  who  have 
never  failed  in  the  performance  of  this  sacred  and 
solemn  duty  for  the  last  twelve  years,  cannot  stay 
in  my  parlour,  when  the  Burra  Shaheb  himself  is 
going  away.  Ask  the  family  priest  to  make  horn 
every  day  and  to  offer  some  thousands  of  toolsee 
leaves  to  the  Thakur  for  my  success  on  that  day. 
I  will  not  forget  the  date  and  the  hour  ;  yet  let  it 
be  recorded,  and  do  remind  me  of  it  every  day 
twice.  Let  the  horses  be  well  fed  and  taken  care 
of  and  the  big  phaeton  kept  clean.  What  are 
these  horses  and  phaetons  for,  if  not  to  carry,  me 
to  the  Railway  platform  on  such  great  occasions? 
I  hope,  Ramanee  Babu  will  get  no  intimation.  I 
say  this  from  a  pure  feeling  of  friendship  for  him; 
the  last  time,  on  a  similar  occasion,  he  made 
himself  the  laughing  stock  of  all  present  by  his 
awkward  manner. 

The  Dewan  carried  out  the  orders  of  his 
master,  and  the  eventful  day  arrived  at  last.  The 
phaeton  was  in  attendance,  Bhawanee  Babu  was 
richly  and  gaudily  dressed,  his  dependants  all 
stood  beside  him,  and  the  family  priest  came  with 
his  offerings.  The  priest  blessed  him,  bells  were 
rung,  conches  blown,  and  the  ladies  filled  the  house- 

109 


PICTURES  OK   INDIAN   LIFE 

with  the  joyful  peal  of  ulu.  Solemnly  and  sedately, 
Bhavvanee  Babu  advanced  towards  his  carriage, 
there  was  another  joyful  and  louder  peal  of  ulu, 
and  the  big  phaeton  rattled  along  the  narrow 
street  towards  the  How  rah  Railway  Station. 

Bhawanee  Babu  was  punctual,  that  is  to  say, 
he  arrived  only  two  hours  before  the  time.  He 
alighted  from  his  carriage,  but  his  dismay  knew 
no  bounds  when  he  saw  that  Ramanee  Babu  was 
already  there,  as  richly  dressed  as  himself.  There 
was  a  cloud  in  the  face  of  both,  and  they  savagely 
glared  at  each  other  for  a  moment ;  but,  by  super- 
human effort  they  mastered  their  feelings  and 
cordially  grasped  each  other's  hands.  "  What 
brings  you  so  early,  Ramanee  Babu  ?" — Asks 
Bhawanee  Babu,  still  hoping  against  hope  that 
his  friend  perhaps  knew  nothing  about  the  depar- 
ture affair,  but  was  only  going  to  Chandernagar 
or  Burdwan.  But  Ramanee  Babu  was  equal  to 
the  occasion,  and  replied  to  the  query  by  a  speci- 
men of  his  wit.  "What  brings  you  here,  Bhawanee 
Babu?"  They  laughed,  and  Bhawanee  Babu  was 
meditating  another  attack  when  uthers  arrived. 
Some  came  alone,  some  in  pairs,  but  each  with  a 
peculiar  head-dress.  The  Railway  platform  was 
soon  filled  with  a  sea  of  turbans  of  various  shapes 
and  hues.  And  Bhawanee  Babu  was  lost  in  the 
crowd. 

Burra  Shaheb  comes  at  last  and  there  is  a  rush 

no 


THE   RAILWAY   PLATFORM 

towards  his  carriage;  one,  whose  head  is  too  small 
for  his  turban,  finds  it  under  the  feet  of  half-a- 
dozen  of  eager  farewell-givers  and  trampled  and 
for  ever  damaged.  Another  finds  his  trail  suddenly 
caught  from  behind  as  if  by  a  vice  ;  he  looks 
behind  and  finds  that  his  neighbour  behind  him 
was  standing  upon  it.  It  is  not  on  record  that 
anybody  was  trampled  to  death  on  that  occasion, 
but  it  is  on  record  that  many  lost  their  valuable 
turbans  and  damaged  their  valuable  dresses,  and 
all  received  pushes,  lateral  and  horizontal,  from 
behind  and  from  before,  during  those  eventful 
moments,  when  the  crowd  rushed  towards  the 
carriage  of  the  big  man. 

The  Burra  Shaheb  alighted  from  his  carriage, 
and    that    event    was    followed    by    numberless 
salaams  from  the  assembled  guests  or  hosts,   call 
them  whichever   you   like.      The   big  man    pro- 
ceeded on  straight  without  looking  to  the  right  or 
left,  and  a   passage  was  immediately   made  for 
him.     On   the  platform    he   accosted    one   or  two 
men    who    stood    close    by,    though    there    were 
hundreds  before  him  ready   to  accost  him  and  to 
be  accosted  in  return.     But  the  big  man  had  only 
come    three    minutes   before   time,   and    he  had, 
therefore,  no   time,  even  if  he  had  the  inclination, 
of  addressing   and   receiving  the  salute  of  each. 
The  assembly  stood  before  him  with   their  hearts 
beating,  anxious   to  catch  one  glance  of  the  big 

in 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

man.  But  no  response  came  from  him,  and  the 
assembled  guests  were  not  even  sure  whether  the 
big-  man  was  at  all  aware  of  their  presence. 

Bhawanee  Babu  was  standing-  behind.  There 
was  a  thick  phalanx  before  him,  and  he  was  trying 
every  posture  to  have  a  peep  at  the  Viceroy.  It 
so  happened,  however,  that  just  before  entering 
the  car,  the  big  man  took  a  survey  of  the  throng 
from  one  end  to  the  other.  His  glance  gradually, 
though  with  the  rapidity  of  the  lightning,  came 
towards  the  spot  where  Bhawanee  Babu  was 
standing.  That  was  the  proudest  moment  in  the 
life  of  Bhawanee  Babu.  He  was  not  slow  to  take 
advantage  of  it.  Like  the  pendulum  of  a  clock 
from  which  the  ball  had  been  removed,  or  more 
appropriately,  like  the  wing  of  the  humming  bee, 
the  hands  of  Bhawanee  Babu  began  to  move 
rapidly,  so  that  he  managed  twenty-five  salaams 
in  a  second.  But,  alas  !  for  Bhawanee  Babu,  he 
could  not  detain  that  big  man's  glance  even  for  a 
second ;  and  long  before  he  had  finished  his 
salaams,  the  glance  had  left  him  far  behind  and 
encountered  others,  who  were  doing  precisely 
what  he  had  begun  a  little  before.  Readers,  have 
you  ever  seen  an  oolloo  field  ?  Well,  when  a 
strong  gale  passes  over  it,  the  grass,  as  the  wind 
touches  it,  bends  down,  and  continues  to  move 
for  a  time  even  when  the  gale  has  left  it.  Thus 
the  Railway  platform  was  like  a  oolloo  field,  and 

112 


THE   RAILWAY   PLATFORM 

the  guests  were  like  oolloos,  and  the  glance  like  a 
strong"  gale,  and  the  metaphor  complete. 

The  Viceroy  proceeded  towards  Simla,  and 
Bhawanee  Babu  came  home.  His  servants  and 
dependants  had  already  assembled  at  the  gate  to 
receive  him;  and  the  ladies,  his  wife  and  daughters, 
were  peeping  through  the  lattice,  eager  to  learn 
his  success.  Bhawanee  Babu  alighted  from  his 
carriage,  and  his  servants  almost  carried  him 
upstairs,  where  he  was  undressed,  fanned,  sham- 
pooed, and  tended  as  a  delicate  infant.  The 
Dewan,  after  the  lapse  of  half-an-hour,  at  last 
ventured  to  enquire  about  the  result  of  his  meet- 
ing with  the  Lord  Shaheb.  Now,  Bhawanee  Babu 
was  a  tender-hearted  soul,  incapable  of  giving 
pain  to  any  one.  He  knew,  if  he  told  the  bare 
truth,  it  would  deeply  disappoint  his  friends. 
He  had,  therefore,  to  tell  them  some  lies.  He  had 
been  building  airy  castles  while  proceeding  to- 
wards the  Railway  platform,  how  the  Viceroy 
would  receive  him,  talk  to  him  without  taking 
any  notice  of  Ramanee  Babu.  etc.,  etc.,  Now, 
poor  soul !  his  airy  castles  had  been  all  dashed  to 
the  ground.  "  I  had  a  hot  time  of  it,  Dewanjee," 
said  the  Babu,  with  a  bold  face.  "There  was  an 
exchange  of  sharp  words  between  myself  and  His 
Excellency.'' 

Dewan. — Sharp   words !    I   hope,    His  Excel- 
lency was  not  offended. 

113 
S— 8 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

B.  Babu. — Ah  !  no.  He  was  in  a  gay  humour, 
so  was  I.  His  Excellency  saw  me,  and  said  to 
me,  "I  am  much  obliged  to.  you,  Bhawanee  Babu, 
for  this  attention,"  while  shaking  hands  with  me. 
I  told  him  in  reply,  "My  Lord,  I  am  the  most 
loyalest  subject  of  Her  Most  August,  September, 
November  and  Gracious  Majesty.  It  is  my  most 
serious,  and  solemn,  and  sacred  duty  to  be  present 
on  such  occasions."  You  know,  when  my  tongue 
is  once  unloosened,  I  can  make  a  very  good 
speech.     His  Excellency  was  mightily  pleased. 

Dewan. — But  what  about  sharp  words  ? 

B.  Babu. — Oh,  I  forget.  I  told  his  Lordship 
that  "the  British  Government  with  its  Zulu  War, 
Bengal  Bank,  and  Post  Office  was  a  very  good 
Government,  but  it  was  not  particularly  discrimi- 
nate in  offering  titles  of  honour.  People  who  were 
nobodies  were  honoured,  while  men  of  ancient 
families  were  neglected.  You  see,  Dewanjee,  I 
gave  him  a  hint,  a  broad  hint.  But,  poor  Rama- 
nee  was  standing  aloof  alone,  unnoticed,  in  the 
crowd.     I  don't  know  who  wanted  him  there. 

But  while  Bhawanee  Babu  was  relating  his 
adventures  to  his  friends  and  relations,  Ramanee 
Babu  was  doing  the  same  to  his,  not  forgetting  his 
particular  friend  Bhawanee  Babu,  in  the  relation 
of  his  adventures. 


BEHARI  SARDAR. 

CHAPTER  I 

BEHARI  Sardar  was  the  leader  of  a  band 
of  dacoits  in  the  village  of  Palua,  north  of  Magura 
{Amritabazar),  in  the  district  of  Jessore.  It  was  at 
a  time  when  practically  there  was  no  Government 
in  the  country.  The  English  had  taken  possession 
of  Bengal,  but  they  had  not  been  able  to  bring  the 
affairs  of  the  country  under  control.  They  had 
destroyed  the  influence  and  privileges  of  the 
Zemindars,  who  exercised  both  judicial  and  ex- 
ecutive powers,  but  had  not  been  able  to  supply 
their  place.  The  English  rulers,  few  in  number, 
resided  in  towns,  the  villagers  had  everything  in 
their  own  way,  and  thus  dacoits  sprang  up  on  all 
sides.  Behari  Sardar    was  one  of  them. 

Not  that  Behari  Sardar  <  was  a  dacoit  in  the 
proper  sense  of  the  term,  for  he  rarely  committed 
midnight  robberies.  He  was  a  dacoit  in  the  same 
sense  as  Tipu,  Sivaji,  Alexander  the  Great,  not  to 
mention  the  name  of  Clive,  were  dacoits.  Indeed, 
he  rarely  committed  what  is  properly  called  rob- 
beries. What  he  did  was  to  punish  recusant  sub- 
jects, for  he  claimed  a  tract  of  land  for  his  territory, 
and  the  people  inhabiting  that  tract  for  his  subjects. 
What  his   subjects   thought  of  his  arrangement, 

115 


PICTURES  <>l     INDIAN   LIFE 
Behari  did  not  take  int  i, so  long 

that  he  was  able  to  <  nice. 

in  this  matter,  m  not  blame  Behari 

>r  he  only  adopted  a  common   pn 

i  A  ■  orld,  in  tir-   \\  s  well 

in  the  East,  [t  is  quite  tm  i  i^h:  upon  his  s 

called  territory  was  n.>t  founded  up  m  ;m     moral 

sis.  But  what  of  that  ?  What  is  the  basis    of  1 
Poi  rights  in  Africa,  and  th«  :  thai 

ra!    nation,    tl  jlish,  in    that 

itinent  ?  We  hilly  admit  tha  -         r  had 

hi  to  the  territory  he  owned.  But  there 

i>  mi  d  'iibt   that  liis   right    w  inded   upon  a 

better  moral  basis  than   that  ol  big  nations,  as  for 

stance,  of  the  Russians,  wh  m  soven 

in  fort   §  .tries. 

Behari  Sardar  owned  a  territory,   which  was 
14  r  28  miles  in  length,  and  8         or   16  mi 

in  breadth.  He    was  m  .  ithin    this    tract. 

There  were  other  irho  ruled    Other    tracts 

in  the  same    way    as  Beh    ;i  Sardar  di  !    his  own. 
He   impose  Qtributions,    but    only   upon   the 

wealtheir  portion  of  his  subjects.  In  this,  his  ex- 
ample might  be  folic  by  the  enlightened 
rnment of  India,  which  imp  dl  its  taxes, 
except  the  Income-tax,  upon  the  poor.  Sometimes 
his  subjects  ^ehe,.  his  authority  and  refused  contri- 
butions. An  J  then  followed  speedy  punishment, 
ixmetimes      \i.<a^eis     ombined     to     resist     his 

1. 


BEHARI  SARDAR 

authority,  and  then  there  was  a  regular  fight. 
Some  were  killed  and  a  good  many  wounded.  The 
dacoit  band,  if  worsted,  fled;  and  if  victorious 
they  pillaged  the  villages  and  subjected  the 
wealthy  villagers  to  horrible   cruelties. 

We  remember  an  instance  in  which  eighteen 
dacoits  were  killed  in  a  village,  (the  name  of 
which  we  just  now  forget)  in  the  Nuddea  district. 
We  had  the  account  from  a  fisherman  who  took 
part  in  the  affray.  He  was  about  105  years  oid 
when  he  told  us  the  story,  and  though  he  was 
almost  blind  and  deaf,  the  remembrance  of  the 
event  sent  a  glow  of  enthusiasm  to  his  cheeks. 

He  said  that  his  village  had  resisted  the 
demand  of  the  dacoit  leader,  and  prepared  itself 
for  fight.  The  fact  must  not  be  forgotten,  that  in 
those  days  all  men  trained  themselves  to  the  use 
of  arms.  Every  village  had  a  gymnasium  ;  and 
every  man,  rich  or  poor,  had  his  arms.  Some  few 
had  match-locks,  but  the  weapons  in  general  use 
were  bows  and  arrows,  swords,  spears,  and  lathies. 

The  fisherman  said  that  his  village  was  full  of 
people  of  his  caste,  and  it  had  also  a  wealthy 
fisherman  who  was  at  the  head  of  the  village. 
The  village  had  about  75  to  80  combatants,  and  all 
these  kept  watch  day  and  night.  Information  at 
last  came  that  the  dacoits  were  coming  to  the 
village,  and  immediately  the  females  were  remov- 
ed to  a  secure  place,  and  the  house  of  the  wealthy 

IT7 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

fisherman  was  deserted.  The  old  man  said  that 
he  had  15  gold  mohurs  which  he  concealed  in  his 
waist-belt,  and  then  joined  the  defenders  with  a 
fisherman's  spear.  The  dacoits  numbering  about 
a  hundred,  rushed  with  the  war — whoop  of  "Jay 
Kalee,''  and  entered  the  court-yard  (now  deserted) 
of  the  wealthy  fisherman. 

But  the  fisherman  had  devised  a  novel  way  of 
defence.  They  had  big  fishing-nets  which  had 
been  joined  together,  and  they  enclosed  the 
dacoits  with  them.  The  enemy  was  thus  easily 
over-powered,  and  flei  in  all  directions,  but  yet 
eighteen  of  them,  who  had  been  hopelessly  en- 
tangled in  the  meshes  of  the  net,  were  killed. 

One  instance  will  shew  how  Behari  selected 
his  recruits.  One  morning,  Behari  Sardar  was 
sitting  on  a  stool  in  front  of  his  house,  and  smok- 
ing. There  was  a  sword  by  his  side,  and  a  mug 
of  water  before  him.  A  young  man  presented 
himself  and  made  his  salam.  The  Sardar  asked 
the  visitor  his  business.  The  young  man  said  that 
his  name  was  Selim  ;  that  he  had  come  to  be 
enlisted  under  his  banner  ;  that  he  was  22,  was 
not  married,  and  had  only  his  mother  and  no 
father. 

The  Sardar  gazed  at  the  powerful  physique 
of  the  recruit  with  admiration,  and  then  asked 
him  to  come  near  and  sit  by  him.  Selim  sat 
before  the   stool.     The  Sardar   took   hold   of   the 

118 


BEHARI    SARDAR 

right  arm  of  Selim,  and  began  to  examine  his 
muscles.  He  then  examined  his  chest,  neck,  waist 
and  thighs.  The  examination  over,  he  murmured 
his  approval.  He  then  looked  full  into  the  face 
of  Selim,  and  his  brow  darkened. 

"You  will  not  do,  Selim,''  said  the  Sardar. 
"And  whv,  Huzoor  ?  "    asked  Selim. 
The   Sardar  said  :    "You  have  an  effiminate 
look.   Ours    is   a   hard  life  and   we    need    more 
determination  than   you  seem  to  possess." 

Selim  was  disappointed,  he  persisted  that  he 
had  it,  and  would  willingly  give  proofs  of  it. 

"Would  you  ?"  asked  the  Sardar  ;  and  seeing 
a  bull  grazing  close  by  he  asked  Selim  to  take 
the  sword  which  was  lying  by,  and  cut  off  its 
head.  "  Go,  Selim,"  said  he.  "Take  this  sword, 
cut  off  the  head  of  the  bull  with  one  blow,  and 
let  us  see  the  prowess  of  your  arms/ 

Selim  demurred.  He  said,  he  thought  he  could 
sever  the  neck  of  the  bull  with  one  blow,  but  then 
he  would  prefer  to  show  the  power  of  his  muscles 
in  other  ways.  He  thought,  it  would  not  only  be 
cruel  but  unmanly  to  kill  an  animal  which  had 
done  him  no  harm. 

The  Sardar  smiled.  The  Sardar  saw  one  of 
his  men,  by  name  Kalu,  within  hail,  and  made 
a  sign  to  him  to  approach.  Kalu,  who  had  not 
heard  the  conversation  between  the  Sardar  and 
Selim,  approached  and  salamed   his  leader.  The 

119 


PICTU1  i  S  OF  INDIAN    LI1 

^  kid  to  Kalu  :  '  ;         •    -  sword  and  cut 

the  head  of  yon  bull  bjr  one  blow,  it  >le, 

and  brinu:   it  here." 

klu  urn-re  1  not  I,  bul  the  sword, 

and  in  the  coun  mpliahe  l 

all  that  he  «  'er. 

The    S.i  lim,   go   home  and 

marry.    You  will  m  jfoo  1  hu^ 

cannot     admit      into     <>ur  Bien     oj 

■ 

The   writer  heard  the   above  s<        from   his 
grandfather  ithen  about  and 

who  ha  !  se<  ■'    S 

ehari,  I  h  he  h  •  ith  pea< 

:  J  in 
..    The    circumsi  h  ma 

him  a  it,       so  led  the    villagers   t 

means  I  >r  ,;    ;i'  pr  ;es  were  then 

m  than  I         ji         famine 

the  last  century  had   desolate  1    the  ,  and 

entant  Nature  had  .       up  for  the 

dep  she  had  committed  in  her  hiry. 

The  country,  which  -  ■  ^on 

after  1  grain,  an  1   cattle.  Peas- 

ants, the  famine  was  if'r> 

year    after   year,    bumper    har  dis- 

appeared from  the  land  :  and  people  continue  dm 
multiply  fast.     In  these  -  it  is  difficult  t  i  find 

a  family  of  eight  brothers  :  but  it  \\  a  -   a 

120 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

occurrence  then.  Some  had  seven,  some  ten, 
some  a  dozen,  and  there  was  scarcely  any  who 
had  not  at  least  four  brothers.  Children  never 
died  then  as  they  do  now,  and  the  number  of 
widows  was  very  small. 

This  increasing  population  was  maintained  by 
the  paddy  that  the  villagers  grew,  and  the  numer- 
ous herds  of  cattle  that  they  kept.  Every  village 
grew  its  own  paddy,  its  sugar-cane  or  date,  and 
its  cotton,  and  preserved  a  wide  extent  of  pasture 
land  for  its  cattle.  In  those  days,  there  was  no 
urgent  necessity  to  dispose  of  the  surplus  grain 
for  silver,  at  whatever  cost.  If  they  had  paddy, 
they  cared  not  whether  they  had  silver  or  not. 
They  had  their  weavers,  smiths,  potters,  carpen- 
ters, washermen,  &c.  They  had  no  business  to  go 
elsewhere  for  their  needs.  It  was  salt  which  gave 
them  some  trouble,  but  they  managed  it  somehow 
or  other.  At  least,  it  has  never  been  alleged  that 
the  people  had  ever  suffered  from  a  salt- 
famine. 

It  was  the  landlords  who  controlled  the  foreign 
affairs  of  the  villages'  the  villagers  generally 
managing  the  domestic  affairs  themselves.  For 
instance,  when  two  villages  quarrelled  over  the 
boundary  of  pasture  or  paddy  lands,  the  zemindar 
was  asked  to  intervene  and  settle  the  dispute. 
The  landlords  exercised  executive  and  judicial 
powers,  whenever  they  were   required    to    do  it. 

121 


PICTURES  OK  INDIAN  LIFE 
But  they  had  very  little  tO  <1>>  in  these  directions. 

The  villagers   themselves  defended  the  village 
and  adjusted  their  differences.     They  only  sought 
the  protection  of  the  landlords  when  they  could 
not  help  thema  For   instance,  the  vi  11 

generally  defended  themselves   tr<>m  th<-   depre- 
dations   of   da  imetimes    the    lati 

proved   tOO   powerful,  and  then  the   landlord  had 
to   send   his  to    help   his    subjects.    The 

dacoits  could    never    cope    with     the    village 
strengthened   by  Buch  allii 

Then  was  the  time  when  the    I  >vei  nment  of 

the    British    ha  1    n    luce  1   the    laa  llor  eat 

iSj  but  had  not  yet  supply  their 

place.  Hence  dacotty  flourishe  Previously! 
the  villagers  kept  the  dacoit  ban  Is  in  check  with 
the  help  of  the  landlords.  But  now  they  found, 
that  they  would  henceforth  be  required  to  rely 
upon  their  own   resoun  the  defence  of  their 

hearth  and  home. 

Thus,     the  aceful     vill  found      it 

necessary  to  learn   to   fight,  1    their   j 

perty  and    per-  rom  the  tS.     The'    had 

very  few  guns,  and  those   they  had    were  ma 
locks,    short-barrelled,  ma^:        things 
to  kill  an  elephant  or  a  buff  U  .,  but  n 
the  purpose  of  fighting  with   an  active    I  Th 

weapons  in  general  use  were,  therefore,  bows  and 
arrows,  swords,  S]  and  bamboo  clubs.     The 

122 


BEHARI  SARDAR 

best  archer  was  considered  stronger  than  a  good 
many  swordsmen. 

The  dacoits,  however,  had  one  advantage 
over  the  villagers.  Being  always  the  attacking 
party,  they  could  choose  the  time  of  attack.  Thus 
strongly  armed  villagers  would  find  that  the 
dacoits  were  too  agile  for  them.  The  dacoits 
would  swoop  with  the  rapidity  of  lightning,  loot  a 
few  houses,  and  fly  before  the  villagers  had  time 
to  assemble  for  the  purposes  of  defence.  The 
villagers  had  thus  to  maintain  watch  day  and 
night,  which  kept  them  constantly  in  a  state  of 
alarm. 

All  this  had  the  effect  of  making  the  villagers 
hardy,  bold  and  enterprising.  Indeed,  in  those 
days,  the  Bengalees  had  to  fight  constantly  in 
defence  of  their  hearth  and  home.  One  can 
understand  the  effect  of  such  a  mode  of  life  upon 
their  muscles  and  nerves.  But  yet  the  villagers 
were  domestic  folk.  They  had  to  maintain  their 
old  parents,  wives,  widowed  relations,  younger 
brothers  and  sisters,  and  little  children.  The 
dacoits,  on  the  contrary,  had  nothing  to  restrain 
them.  Before  enlistment,  they  had  to  give  up, 
under  the  rules  which  guided  them,  their  religion 
and  caste,  father  and  mother,  and  cut  off  every 
other  tie.  Mussalman  and  Hindu  dacoits  had  to 
eat  together,  and  every  one  had  to  bow  before  their 
presiding  deity,  the  Goddess  Kalee.  The  domestic 

123 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  I.I  i 

villagers  had  thus  to  yield  at  last  to  the  m  il<l  ban 
ofdacohs.   In   this    manner,    Behari  S  had 

acquin  territory. 

The  villagers,  I  ostant  watching  and 

Dt  the  -    they    sustaine  1  from  the  robi 

which  they  could    not   i         ither    put  a  stop 
Sound  it  to  their  interest  t  orl  "t 

terms  with  the  dacoits.  1-  ery  vill  to 

pay  a  monthly  contribution  to  the  srho  held 

•way  <»ver  it,  and  who.  in  their  turn,  protected  the 
village  Erom  t  and    robberies,  and    outside 

foes. 

ehari  Sardar    was    a    superior    personam 
While  a    young  man,    he   had    served    under  the 
banner  of  Mullook  M  V  village  had  deh'd 

the  authority  of  the  latter  Sa  lar,  and  made  ex- 
tensive preparaii'  the  pur|  of  del 
They  had  prepared  a  bamboo  fort,  which  they 
considered  impregnable.  Of  course,  it  was  not 
strong  enough  to  resist  artillery,  but  the  dacoit> 
were  only  armed  with  swords  and  spears.  There 
was  one  door  leading  to  this  tort,  and  in  ca- 
alarm  the  villagers  t<  ok  si            lure. 

The  village  was,  howe>  •  withstanding  its 

impregnable  fort,  attacked  by  Mullook  Maidan 
one  night.  For  he  had  been  defie  1,  and  he  had 
either  to  bring  it  under  subjugation  or  to  lose  his 
prestige.  The  villagers,  who  kept  watch  day  and 
night,  got  intimation  of  his  approach  and  fled  into 

124 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

the  strong  bamboo  enclosure,  with  their  women 
and  children.  The  defenders,  armed  to  the  teeth, 
stood  to  defend  the  bamboo  ramparts,  with  courage 
and  determination.  The  fort  was  inaccessible  from 
other  points — it  could  be  only  reached  through 
the  one  gate  which  was,  therefore,  the  main  object 
of  attack  to  the  dacoits.  The  door  could  be  reach- 
ed through  a  narrow  lane  made  of  bamboo  walls. 
The  villagers  stood  with  spears  to  defend  this  lane. 

The  dacoits  made  several  attempts  for  an 
entry  into  this  lane,  but  in  vain.  Bristling  spears 
from  both  sides  of  this  narrow  lane  defended  the 
passage.  It  would  be  sure  death  to  the  man  who 
ventured  to  enter  ;  indeed,  he  would  be  pierced 
by  the  spears  from  both  sides  of  the  lane.  The 
dacoits,  after  sustaining  many  casualties,  had  to 
give  up  the  attempt,  when  Behari  Sardar  com- 
demned  such  pusilanimous  conduct,  and  promised 
to  go  himself!  He  was  asked  by  the  leader  to 
desist  from  the  mad  attempt,  but  he  did  not  listen 
to  such  counsel.  The  dacoits  had,  most  of  them, 
a  thick  piece  of  cloth  wrapped  round  their  bodies 
to  protect  themselves  from  spears  and  arrows. 
Behari,  with  this  protection  only,  and  a  couple  of 
swords  rushed  forward  with  the  war-whoop  of  jay 
Kalee  ! 

Whether  it  was  the  herculean  figure  of  the 
man,  or  his  unearthly  war-whoop,  or  his  (reckless- 
ness, certain  it  is  that  the  villagers  could  not  touch 

125 


PICTURJ  INDIAN  I.IM-. 

him,  though  he   was  Bought   to  be  pierced 
hundredi  of  men  from  both  sides  of  the  lane.  And 
thus  Behari  became  Sardar. 

One  day,  at  ah<>ut  tight  i><  luck  fa  the  morn- 
ing, Behari  Sardai  came  to  the  village,  nay,  to  the 
bouse  of  the  writi  grandfather^  The  village  is 
Magma  fAmritabazar)  which  adjoins  Pah 
whcic  Behari  had  established  his  head-quarters 
The  grandfather    oi   the  writer  of  this    was   then 

quite   a     young    boy.      Behari     Came     with     about 

two   dozens    oi   his    followers,    all    of    powerful 

make  and  fully  armed.  They  had  the  usual 
thick  cloth  wrapped  round  their  bodies,  swords 
which      dangled     by     their     bfl  and       lon- 

lances  in  their  right  hauls.     Behari  Sardar  w 
received  with  great  honour  .  a  mat  was  spread  for 
his  follow  i  he  was  given  a  big  stool  for  a 

seat.    Villagers  all  assembled  to  make  their  *<il 
and  ladies  a  so  tried  to  have  a  peep  at  the  gr< 
Sardar  from  their  hiding  places, — that  Sardar,  the 
mention  of  whose  dreaded  name  had  the  effect 
throw  tag  them  into  hysteric  fits.     Behari  returnc  1 
the  salutes  with  great  cordiality.    "Come,  Bhai 
Saheb,"  said  he  to  one.     "Chacha,  have   you  for- 
gotton    me.      to   another.     Indeed,  he   was    well 
known  to    the    village,    and    the    villagers    lcn< 
him  well.     Alter  a  good   smoke,  Behari  began 
explain  the  object  of  his  visit 

He  sai     ;  "I  do  not  know  reading  and  writin 

126 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

I  am  a  dunce.  But  I  have  sense  enough  to  know 
that  it  is  my  interest  to  live  in  peace  with  my 
co-villagers.  For,  I  consider  Palua  and  Magura  to 
be  one  village.  For  my  subsistence,  it  is  true,  I 
take  something  from  you.  But  have  I  or  my  men 
even  molested  you  ?  Have  1  not  protected  your 
village  from  dacoits  and  thieves  ?  The  other  day 
I  recovered  the  cow  which  had  been  stolen  from 
this  village,  and  carried  to  near  Kotechandpur, 
20  miles  hence.  What  have  you  to  complain 
against  me  that  the  lad  Ameer  Sheikh  should 
quarrel  with  me  ?  I  appeal  to  you,  Bhadraloge* 
(gentlemen),  to  bring  him  to  his  senses.  For,  if 
he  persists  in  his  opposition,  he  will  come  to  know, 
to-day  or  to-morrow,  that  Behari  Sardar's  sword 
is  four  cubits  long." 

A  little  explanation  is  here  necessary.  The 
lad  Ameer  Sheikh  was  a  young  man  of  about 
twenty-two,  inhabiting  the  northern  part  of 
Magura.  He  had  defied  the  authority  of  the 
Sardar.  His  strength  lay  in  his  bow  and  arrows, 
for  he  was  reputed  to  be  the  best  archer  in  the 
worid  ! 

The  village  was  inhabited  by  Hindus  and 
Mussalmans.  The  most  respected  of  the  villagers, 
a  Hindu,  replied  that  Ameer  Sheikh  was  not 
amenable  to  reason,  as  he  was  an  independent 
man.  He  had  his  landed  property  and  his  tenants. 
"  But,''  said  he,  "Ameer  is  a  dunce  and  a  boor. 

127 


PICTURl  INDIAN  1.1! 

\  thing  but  punishment,  I  fear,  will  bring  him  to 
hi-  *>  Lf  lai   S  iheb  I   he, 

•  yon  think  th.it  ire  have  anythin  do 

with  it.     \Y  ruite  happy  under  your  strength 

is.    We  sleep  with  our  and 

as  for  the  contribution,  it  is  a  trifli  unpared 
with  the  advantages  we  enjoy  under  your 
protectioi 

Said   Behari : — "  1   kn  i  >r 

1  would  not  have  com  I        tmeer, 

however,  that  h  !  I    shall  s  ton  mi  et,    i:i    s;>ite 

of  his  charmed  bow  and  rrows.'" 

The  Fact  was,  this   \  9  a  thorn    in    the 

f  the  Sir  lar.    He  was  a   too  contemptible 
:th  his  slim   figure,   ;         nt  following,   and 

the    burden    of    a    family.    But    hi  :ts    m 

midable.   The  belief  had  obtained    firm  in 

the  minds  of  the  Sardar^s  follow.  a  1   perhaps 

:he  Sardar himself , though  he  di  1  not  like  to 
acknowledge  it,  that  he  had  brought  under  his 
subjugation  an  evil  spirit  which  sat  at  tlv 
his  arrows.  B  iw  an  1  arrow  in  hand.  Ameer  was 
unapproachable  even  by  Behari  Sardar.  Ameer 
resi  ling  within  two  miles  of  the  camp  of  the 
-    :  lar,  thus  continued  to  defy  his  authority.    How 

llld  the   Sar  ar  brook  such  an  insult  ?  An  i  h 
could  he  rule  his  territory  with  such   a    rebellious 
subject,  making  fun  of  his  four-cubit  long   sword  ? 
He  felt  something  like  what   was   done  by   Lord 

128 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

Lytton  when  the  "wasps"  of  the  Bengalee  papers 
began  to  torment  him. 

Ameer  was  the  eldest  of  the  three  brothers   in 

the  Sheikh  family  who  lived  jointly,    in  the   same 

house.     Ameer,  not-withstanding   his  youth    and 

his   "  charmed "    bow,    knew    very  well   that   he 

had    committed    an     extremely     rash      act      by 

courting  the  animosity  of  the  great  Sardar.  Any 

man   now    would   think  that    it    was     extremely 

foolish  on   the   part  of   the  villagers  to  defy  the 

authority  of  the  dacoits,  and    excite   their   wrath 

But  people   of  this   generation,    with  a  ceaseless 

struggle    for     existence     which    civilization    has 

imported  ;   with  a  passion  for  Government  service 

which  corrodes  the  system  ;    with  their   efforts   to 

master  a  foreign   tongue  and   pass  examinations 

in  that  language  ;    with   interminable   litigation  ; 

with    spleen    and    dyspepsia  ;    and    with    being 

surrounded  on  all  sides  by  police   constables   and 

spiteful    neighbours,     will      never     be     able     to 

appreciate  the  feelings  which  move   healthy,  free 

and  strong    men,    with  a    full   stomach,  with   no 

cares,   and  with  no  courts,  to  control  their  actions. 

How  could  Ameer  help  throwing  down  the  gauntlet 

to  the  Sardar?  The  exuberant   and  bouyant spirit 

within  him  urged    him   to   do  so  ;  his   followers 

urged    him ;    and    public     opinion    pushed  him 

forward. 

Ameer  knew    that    it    would    be    extremely 

129 

S-9 


PICTUR1  IMDIAN  LIFE 

imprudent  to    provoke  the    ire   ofth<     -  r,  bol 

there  was  no  h«-lp  for  it  now.  His  pri  le  would  n>>\ 
permit  htm  to  stoop  and  sue  i"r  |  i.  So  what 

be  lid  was  to  keep  watch  day  and  night,  as  ha 
ha  l  do  desire  to  act  on  1 

his  tenants  an  l  he  Irneu  that  it  was  n  it  possible 
tor  the  Sardar  to  take  him  by  surprise.  It  only  he 
could  get  timely  informationi  he  felt  quite  com- 
petent to  deal  with  the  Sardar  and   hi  >us 

band. 

The  villagers  oj  slagura  requ<         the  Sardar 

"bathe,"  which  meant  that  they  invited  the 

Sardar  and  his  men   to  stay  there  atvi  dine.  The 

Sardar  demurred.  Hut  the  villagers  pressed  again, 
and  he  yielded.  The  1  i     otributions  which 

tlie    dacohs    imposed   upon    village  itly 

levied  in  kind.  In    those  days,    '■       '  ;  rupee)  v 
a  rare    si^ht.  Gold    mohurs  were    more    plentiful. 
The  people  carrie  1  on  their  purchases  with 
(shells),  and  they  had  very  little    need  topurchi 
anything  at   all.  The   dacoits   themselves  lived  a 
merry  life.     They  had  neither  wives  and    children 
to  maintain,  nor    any  desire  to  hoard    up    mon< 
Whatever  they  got,  they  spent  in  eating  and  drink- 
ing ,  in  big  feasts,  where  people  were  invited  from 
neighbouring  villages;in  Poojas,  where  priests  w 
brought  by  sheer  force  to  perfrom   the  ceremonies 
and  then  dismissed  with  liberal  presents  ;  in 
(operas),  habit  (songs),  and  military  t.aimamei 

130 


BEHARI  SARDAR 

In  these  latter  exercises,  all  noted  men  were 
invited  to  display  their  strength  and  mastery  over 
the  weapons  they  carried.  The  hosts  oftheSardar, 
we  mean  the  inhabitants  of  Magura  or  Amrita- 
bazar,  thought  that  a  feast  to  him  would  save  them 
from  contribution  for  some  time  to  come.  The 
Sardar  and  his  followers  expected  a  very  good 
dinner,  and  they  at  last   agreed  to  stop  and   dine. 

A  young  man  proposed  some  out-door  games, 
and  the  proposal  was  received  with  acclamation 
by  all  present.  It  was  the  month  of  Baisakh.  The 
time  was  about  9  A.  M.,  and  people  were  perspir- 
ing from  heat.  But  out-door  exercises  were  the 
most  coveted  of  all  amusements  indulged  in  by 
the  people  of  Bengal  at  that  period.  Badyakars  or 
drummers  were  immediately  sent  for  ;  and  all 
resorted  to  the  locality,  where  the  village  gymna- 
sium was.  Every  village  had  such  a  place  where 
the  people  assembled  in  the  morning  and  the 
evening  to  practise  themselves  in  the  use  of  their 
weapons,  to  wrestle  or  to  go  through  other 
exercises  calculated  to  strengthen  the  muscle  and 
the  nerve. 

It  would  be  news  to  the  degenerated  species 
that  inhabit  Bengal  now,  that  in  those  days  all 
the  palwans  (wrestlers),  khaloimrs  (fencers)  etc,etc, 
assembled  in  the  most  important  village  of  the 
quarter,  at  least  five  days  in  the  year,  for  a  trial 
of  strength  and  skill.   First,    on   the  Charak   Sank- 

131 


PICTURES  OF   IN:  »IAN   l.Il  I 

'in!,  on  tl  day  ;  third, 

the  B%  lay  ;  fourth,    on    the   last    day   of 

Kii  ind  fifth,  on  the  Sripanehami  day. 

When  proceeding  to  the  gymnasium,  it  * 
eived  that  Behari  Sardar  hri  I  kept  sentim 
to  give  him  information    of  the  approach  of  any 
opponent  1    fa  its  never  stopped  at 

any  place  without  securing  the  ghattii  »or  i 

p  sting  sentinels.     While  Behari  sitting 

1   talking,  some  haif-a  his  men  w  < 

\v  i-        «  the  i  and  whenthey  all  went 

the  gymnasium,  the  Sardar  adji  the  position 

of  his  jentinels)  an(         The  fact  w 

;e   was  im  absolute  trust    between  the  people 
i  the  dacoit  <"hi( 

O,  stling  match  between  some 

\  illag"t  ml    the    dacoits.     He    jocularly 

pealed  to  the  Sardar  to  give  s<>me  lesson  to  the 
anda  brothers,  who  had   become  inflated  with 
iceit,  and  who  fancied  that  they  were  as  strong 
as    Bheem    was    in    days  of  yore.     Now,  oftht 
Chan  la    brothers    some  five  or    six    were    noted 
.    rv.tel    throughout  the    district    for  their 
strength,  courage  and  skill.    But  the  Sardar  said 
he   would     never    permit   that.     It   would    be    an 
u  iwise  step  and  might  lead  to  serious  consequen- 
ces.    So  the  dacoits  shewed  some  of  their  feats  of 
strength     and    skill    in    the    use   of   arms    to  the 
\illagers.     A  good   dinner  was  provided.     A  big 

'32 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

goat  was  killed  ;  besides,  there  were  fish,  ddhee 
and  goor,  but  no  liquor.  The  dacoits  feasted,  and 
left  for  their  native  village  Palua. 

CHAPTER  II. 

We  said  before,  that  Ameer  trusted  his 
tenants,  but  there  was  one  whom  he  had  injured. 
He  had  wounded  this  tenant  in  the  tenderest  part. 
In  short,  Ameer  had,  at  a  moment  of  thoughtless 
passion,  sullied  the  family  honour  of  this  man. 
The  man  had  brought  home  a  beautiful  bride 
aged  about  13.  Ameer  was  smitten.  He  caused 
a  divorce  between  the  man  and  his  wife,  and  then 
married  the  girl  himself.  The  injured  husband, 
though  a  tenant,  vowed  deep  vengeance,  and 
opened  communications  with  the  Sardar.  Through 
him,  Behari  kept  himself  informed  of  the  move- 
ments of  Ameer,  even  to  the  minutest  detail. 

The  first  ruse  of  the  Sardar  was  to  create  false 
alarms  in  the  village.  This  obliged  Ameer  to 
remain  in  a  state  of  constant  preparedness.  On 
^very  occasion,  however,  he  found  that  the  alarm 
was  a  false  one.  This  naturally  made  him  slacken 
his  vigilance  a  little.  He  had  sent  his  wife, 
mentioned  above,  to  her  father's  house,  about 
four  miles  from  his  native  village.  He  sent  a 
doolie  and  three  bearers  to  fetch  her.  The 
conveyance,  however,  was  returned,  the  relations 
sending  him  word  that  she  would  be  sent  back 
next  month. 

133 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN    LIFE 

N'-'u  this  was  terrible  news  to  the  love-sick 
Ameer.  He  himself  must  go  to  fetch  her.  But 
how  to  provide  against  the  surprises  of  the  Sardar? 
He  might  come  in  the  meantime.  Yes,  but  his 
father-in-law's  house  lav  only  at  a  distance  of  four 
miles.  Of  course,  he  would  be  able  to  bring  his 
wife  home  before  the  Sardar  could  know  that  he 
had  left  it.  Thus  thought  Ameer.  Of  an  impet- 
uous disposition,  he  could  wait  no  longer.  He 
assembled  his  principal  tenants,  and  told  them 
of  his  intentions,  and  actually  ran  towards  the 
village    where  his  wife  was. 

Among  the  assembled  tenants  was  the  one 
whose  wife  Ameer  had  married.  This  man  had 
concealed  his  feelings  against  Ameer  very 
successfully  and  secured  his  complete  confidence. 
While  Ameer  left  home  for  his  father-in-lav 
house,  this  man  left  the  village  to  give  information 
to  Behari  Sardar  that  Ameer's  house  was  now 
absolutely  at  his  disposal. 

Behari  Sardar  had  no  reason  to  distrust  his 
informant,  but  yet  he  subjected  the  man  to  a 
searching  cross-examination.  The  spy  gave 
satisfactory  answer  which  convinced  the  Sardar 
that  he  had  not  come  to  lead  him  into  a  trap,  but 
to  satisfy  his  private  grudge  against  the  man  who 
had  robbed  him  of  his  wife. 

The  Sardar  formed  his  plans  after  a  short 
reflection.    He  asked  his   lieutenants   to   prepare 

134 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

themselves  for  an  immediate  march.  His  orders 
were  obeyed  promptly,  and  about  seventyfive  of 
the  dacoit  band  stood  fully  armed  before  him. 
This  was  the  usual  number  he  kept  with  him, 
while  others  he  stationed  at  different   centres. 

It  was  between  eight  or  nine  in  the  morning. 
The  armed'dacoits  presented  a  picturesque  appea- 
rance. I  have  already  said  how  they  protected 
their  chests  from  arrows,  spears,  and  swords  by 
wrapping  tightly,  layer  after  layer,  a  thick  piece  of 
cloth  by  which  also  they  protected  their  faces  and 
heads.  This  piece  covered  the  face  entirely,  leaving 
only  the  nose  and  the  eyes  open.  They  stood  armed 
with  lathis,  swords  and  spears  to  do  their  leader's 
bidding.  They  were  all  hardy,  brave,  strong  and 
active,  and  would  not  have  hesitated  a  moment 
to  accomplish  the  plans  of  their  leader,  or  go 
through  any  enterprise,  however  hazardous. 

Behari  selected  six  out  of  these  men  to  stand 
guard  and  prevent  the  entry  of  Ameer  into  the 
village  from  that  of  his  father-in-law.  A  beel  or 
marsh  intervened  between  the  two  villages.  The 
Sardar  directed  these  six  men  to  disrobe,  dress 
themselves  as  ordinary  rustics,  and  stand  guard 
on  this  side  of  the  marsh  to  prevent  Ameer,  if  he 
should  get  the  information,  from  coming  back  to 
protect  his  house. 

The  great  point  of  the  Sardar  was  to  secure 
the  weapons    of    the    villagers.  They  kept    their 

135 


PICTURES  OK   INDIAN   LIFE 

weapons,  swords  of  various  shapes,  spears  of  all 
kinds,  and  lathies, — in  the  outer  house  of  Ameer. 
The  plan  of  the  Sardar  was  to  pounce  upon  the 
village,  and  at  once  take  j  >ion  of    the  outer- 

house  containing  the  weapons.  His  real  object 
was  net.  however,  so  much  the  possession  of  the 
village  weapons,  for  he  regarded  them  with 
contempt,  as  the  "charmed"  bow  and  arrows  oi 
Ameer,  the  whereabouts  of  which  no  body  knew, 
not  even  the  spy. 

We  must  here  give  an  account  of  Ameer. 
Being  a  Sheikh  and  having  landed  property,  he 
found  himself,  on  the  death  of  his  father,  when  he 
was  about  I5,inthe  position  of  a  leader.  He  had 
a  well-built,  though  not  a  very  strong  physique. 
He  saw  that  as  a  lathial,  a  swordsman,  or  a  lancer, 
he  would  have  no  chance  with  others.  He  then- 
fore,  determine  1  to  maintain  his  position  by 
archerv.  He  feit  that  if  he  could  master  the  art,  he 
would  yet  be  ab.'e  to  leal  his  following  with 
credit. 

He  soon  found  that  he  had  an  eye  and  a  pair 
of  arms  for  good  archery.  He  rarely  missed  his 
aim.,  even  in  the  begining  of  his  self-education. 
He  listened  to  accounts  of  the  exploits  of  good 
archers  with  a  leaping  heart,  and  felt  an  ambition 
to  imitate  or  perhaps  to  excel  them.  The  best 
archer  then  was  a  Rajput  in  Krishnagore,  and  t" 
him  Ameer  went  for  instruction.     There  he  learnt 

136 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

much  of  what  he  was  in  need  and  ignorance  of 
before.  He  came  back  home  ;  he  improved  what 
he  had  learnt ;  and  then  prepared  for  himself  his 
"charmed''  bow  and  arrows. 

Ameer  prepared  his  own  arrows.  Those 
prepared  by  others  were  not  so  obedient,  so 
powerful,  as  those  prepared  by  himself.  He 
prepared  his  own  bow:  and  without  that  particular 
bow  he  was  almost  helpless.  After  repeated 
experiments,  he  found  out  how  a  good  bow  should 
be  prepared.  The  Jaon  bamboo  is  the  best  for 
the  purpose.  But  a  fully-developed  and  perfectly 
shaped  bamboo  of  the  necessary  sort  was  rarely 
to  be  found.  He  found  a  piece,  however,  and 
prepared  his  bow  with  the  toil  of  several  months. 
This  he  painted.  It  was  as  long  as  himself,  and 
at  first  glance,  would  appear  to  be  a  delicate 
weapon.  But  it  was  not  so.  The  string  he  prepared 
of  the  flax  beaten  out  of  the  aloe. 

The  arrows  too  he  himself  prepared  from  reeds 
which  grew  in  low-lying  marshes.  He  alone  knew 
how  to  prepare  arrows.  For  they  flew  like 
lightning,  and  seemed  to  defy  the  laws  of  Conic 
Sections.  One  of  his  daily  duties  was  to  keep  his 
bow  and  arrows  before  him  and  salaam  them  three 
times,  while  some  charms  or  prayers  were  uttered* 
The  public  believed,  both  Hindus  and  Mussalmans, 
that  Ameer  had  became  a  Siddha  (adept)  in  arch- 
ery, and  that  he  could  do  anything  with  his  bow. 

137 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

Ameer  had  one  weak  point.  He  was  irresistible 
with  the  bow  and  arrows  manufactured  by  him. 
He  was  weak,  nervous,  irresolute  without  them, 
even  though  in  possession  of  a  good  bow  and 
arrows  manufactured  by  others.  The  great  object 
of  Behari  was  to  possess  himself  ol  the  bow  and 
arrows  of  Ameer. 

Ameer,  on  the  other  hand,  was  very  particular 
about  his  weapons.     He  generally  carried  them  in 
his  hand  when  in  the  shade.    Exposure  to  the  sun 
would  spoil  his  bow  and    arrows;    and  he  never 
exposed  them,  when  he  could  help  it,  to  the  blaze 
of  that  luminary.     During  the  middle  of  the  day, 
he    always   kept   his    weapons   in  a   hiding-place 
which  no  body  knew.     So  when    Ameer    started 
from  home  in  the  morning  for  his  father-in-law's 
he  left  his  bow  and  arrows  behind,   though  where, 
it  was  not  known  to  any.     When  Ameer's  enemy 
gave  information  of  Ameer's   departure  from    his 
village  to  the   Sardar,  the  first  question   he  asked 
was,  whether     Ameer    had    taken   his   bow    and 
arrows  with  him.     Being  assured  that  Ameer  had 
left  them  behind,  the  Sardar  thought  that  his  game 
was  safe  ;   and  that  if  he  could    get  possession  of 
the  bow  and  arrows,  Ameer  would  be  absolutely 
at  his  disposal. 

The  order  was  given,  "  Run  and  surround 
Ameer's  house;"  and  seventy  men  ran  furiously 
towards   it  without    uttering  a  sound.     An   open 

138 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

space,  about  half-a-mile  in  length,  intervened 
between  Palua  and  Magma.  Some  of  Ameer's 
tenants  were  weeding  their  paddy  plants.  They 
saw  from  a  distance  the  furious  rush  of  the  dacoits. 
They  knew  that  Ameer  was  not  at  home,  and  they 
at  once  divined  the  object  of  the  rush.  They  held 
a  hasty  consultation  amongst  themselves,  and 
devised  means  to  give  speedy  information  to 
Ameer,  and  to  the  village  too. 

The  dacoits  came  at  double  quick,  but  yet 
they  found  Ameer's  house  deserted. They,  however 
immediately  surrounded  it,  and  stationed  sentinels 
to  guard  the  approaches.  Behari  stood  in  the 
court-yard,  more  than  six  feet  high,  giving  direc- 
tions to  his  followers,  his  four-cubit  sword  in  his 
hand.  He  posted  an  additional  set  of  sentinels  to- 
guard  the  outer-house  alluded  to  above.  This 
outer-house  contained  the  weapons  of  the  villagers 
and  perhaps  the  bow  and  arrows  of  Ameer. 

The  villagers  had  time  only  to  remove  the 
ladies  from  Ameer's  house,  but  property  and 
weapons  were  left  behind.  The  dacoits  surrounded 
the  house  with  a  rush  and  a  loud  warwhoop  of 
Jay  Kalee,  though  no  one  had  any  notion  as  to 
what  the  Sardar  was  aiming  at.  Some  youthful 
villagers  proposed  resistance,  but  the  elders  pooh- 
poohed  the  idea.  How  could  they  fight  without 
weapons  ?  "Let  us  send  an  old  man  to  parley/' 
said  the  wisest   amongst   the    villagers.     And    a 

139 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

very  old  Mussalman,  with  a  white  flowing  beard, 
called  Nana,  was  sent  to  the  Sardar. 

He  approached  unarmed,  bent  double  by  age, 
and  he  was  led  to  the  Sardar.  "Ameer  is  not 
here,"  said  the  old  man.  "If  you  want  to  loot  his 
house  it  is  at  your  disposal.  If  you  want  to  loot 
the  village  you  are  welcome  to  do  it.  We  have 
no  arms. 

The  Sardar  reflected  for  a  moment,  and  then 
assumed  a  jocular  tone.  "Nana  Saheb,"  said  he, 
"is  it  meet  that  when  I  come  hungry  you  do  not 
give  me  and  my  people  food  ?" 

Said  Nana  :  "Yes,  we  were  thinking  of  that. 
But  it  seemed  you  came  angry.  The  attitude  of 
your  men  is  not  like  that  of  guests.  Quiet  your 
men,  sit  down,  and  we  shall  do  our  best  to  give  a 
little  gosta  (meat)  and  rootee(rice  or  bread)  to  you 
and  your  men." 

To  make  a  long  story  short,  we  next  find 
the  dacoit  band  sitting  in  rows,  under  half-a-dozen 
gigantic  mango  trees,  in  front  of  the  outer-house 
of  Ameer,  taking  their  dinner.  To  the  sentinels, 
dinners  were  sent  at  their  posts.  Dinners  were 
also  sent  to  the  sentinels  guarding  against  the 
approach  of  Ameer  to  the  village.  The  dacoits 
had  copiously  partaken  of  liquor.  Behari  sat  in 
the  middle,  squatting  upon  a  broad  plantain  leaf. 
Every  one  of  the  dacoits  had  partially  undressed 
himself,  though  they  kept  their  respective  weapons 

140 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

by  their  side.  Talking1  of  weapons  those  belong- 
ing to  the  villagers,  kept  in  the  outer-house,  had 
been  brought  from  there  for  their  better  protec- 
tion, and  were  seen  lying  in  heaps  under  the 
mango  trees,  within  the  sight  and  reach  of  the 
dacoits.  Even  after  a  most  diligent  search,  the 
bow  and  arrows  of  Ameer  had  not  been 
found  ! 

The  disarmed  villagers  were  freely  permitted 
to  see  the   State   dinner,   at  their  expense.     And 
the  warriors  of  the  village,   old  and  young,  and 
children  too,  were  there  to  witness  the  great  feast. 
The  dacoits  had  almost   done  with  their  dinner; 
indeed,  they  had  gone  as  far  as  the  dish  of  claheey 
when  the  mirth  of  the  dacoits,  who  were  so  long 
eating    silently   out   of   respect   to    their   Sardar, 
could     not    be    restrained.     One    cried    "Ameer 
Sheikh  ki   fateh",  or,  in  other  words,   "victory  to 
Ameer  Sheik",  when  fifty  voices  echoed  the  words 
in    a   loud    shout.     The   Sardar  himself,    a    little 
elated  by  the  drink,  was  led  to  join  in  the  mirth, 
and   exclaimed  in  a  loud  voice  :  "Ameer,   where 
art  thou,  our  exellent  host?"     This   was  repeated 
by  fifty  throats,  and  the  sound  made  the  earth  to 
tremble  as  it  were. 

But  before  this  sound  had  ceased,  the  Sardar 
heard  a  whiz  and  felt  something  touch  his  head. 
He  quickly  turned  round  to  see  what  it  was.  He 
saw   that  his   cap  had  heen  carried  off  from   his 

141 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN    LIFE 

head,   and  pinned  t<>the  earth  about  a  yard  an<l- 
a-half  from  him,  by  an  arrow  ! 

But  he  was  allowed  no  time  to  make  anv 
close  examination  of  the  arrow,  or  think  over  the 
affair.  Just  then  some  »>ne  appeared  on  the  scene 
from  behind  a  mango  tree  and  said  :  "Here  is 
Golam  Ameer  Sheik  hazeer",  which  means,  "here 
is  your  slave  Ameer  Sheik  present."  "What  d 
huzoor  demand  of  me?"  The  Sardar  saw  Ameer 
Sheik  leaning,  as  if  carelessly,  against  a  mango 
tree  in  his  front,  his  stringed  bow  hanging  on  hi> 
right  shoulder,  and  the  quiver  of  his  arrows  <>n 
his  left,  with  a  smile  in  his  face,  as  if  mocking  at 
his  majesty  ! 

We  have  now  to  explain  how  Ameer  succeed- 
ed in  eluding  the  vigilance  of  the  ghatties  or 
sentries  appointed  by  the  Sardar  to  prevent  his 
entry  into  the  village.  The  fact  was,  the  Sardar 
knew  very  well  that  it  would  be  impossible  to 
stop  Ameer,  in  that  way.  For  to  guard  a  b 
village  in  that  manner  would  require  hundreds  of 
men.  The  main  object  the  Sardar  tiad  in  view 
was  to  stop  the  passage  of  Ameer  as  long  as  it 
was  possible  to  do  so. 

Besides,  as  I  said  before,  Ameer  was  power- 
less   without    his   "charmed''   bow    and    arrows. 
The     Sardar     was     convinced     that    they     had 
been  left  behind  by  Ameer.     He'had  no  doubt  that 
the  bow  and  arrows  were  either  in  Ameers  house 

142 


BEHARI    SARDAR 

or  somewhere  near  it.  He  closely  guarded 
Ameer's  house  and  its  surroundings;  and  he 
felt  sure  that  if  he  could  do  that,  he  and  his 
party  would  be  absolutely  safe  from  any  outside 
attack  by  the  latter. 

It  has  been  already  stated  that  the  villagers, 
who  were  weeding  paddy,  (it  was  the  end  of 
Jaishta  i.  e.  May  and  June)  had  sent  information 
to  Ameer  as  soon  as  they  saw  the  approach  of 
the  dacoit  band.  Ameer  had  made  arrangements 
to  bring  his  wife  after  breakfast,  and  he  had  sat 
to  it.  Ameer  was  enjoying  his  breakfast,  when 
the  breathless  messenger  disturbed  his  enjoyment 
with  the  terrible  news,  that  the  dacoits,  fully 
armed,  were  marching  towards    his   house. 

Now,  this  was  dreadful  news  to  Ameer.  The 
dacoits  were  like  ordinary  men,  under  ordinary 
circumstances  ;  but  they  wreaked  fearful  venge- 
ance upon  those  who  defied  their  authority.  His 
mother,  his  aunts,  his  sister-in-law  were  in  the 
house.  His  house  was  thatched  with  straw,  though 
the  outer-apartment  had  brick  walls.  How  could 
he  know  that  the  dacoits  did  not  mean  insult  to 
the  ladies  ?  And  would  they  not  burn  the  house 
down  ? 

In  a  state  of  terrible  anguish  of  mind,  Ameer 
left  his  breakfast  and  ran  towards  his  native 
village.  His  practised  eye,  however,  saw  at  once 
that  ghatties    had  been    placed  on    the  opposite 

H3 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  Ll! 

le    <>f    the  bee),  and    his    passage   barred.  II- 
could,  indeed,    reach    his   house  by  a  circuitous 
route,  but  it  woul  1  take  hours  to  The  roads, 

lea  ling  t<>   his  house,  were  two, — one  lyinpto  the 
north,  and  the  other  to  1         uth,  of  the  beel.  Two 
fully-armed  men  guarded   the  two  ] 
more    guarded     the    beel,      while     two     more 
blocked  the  other  two  p  es  by  which  he  could 

vet  reach    his  house,   though    by  very  circuitous 

- 

route. 

Fortunately,  at    that  time,  a  good  many  men 
were  <         fed  in   fishing  in  the  beel.  They   us< 
palm  caii  nrthe  purpose.  Each  canoe  had  one 

or  two  occupants,  and  the  man  in  the  front  stood 
with  a  fishing  spear  to  strike  at  the  fishes  which 
might  give  an  indication  of  their  presence  bel 
the  surface  of  the  water.  Ameer  joined  this  fishing 
party,  change  1  his  good  clothes  for  the  piece  of 
rag  which   one  of  the    party    had  round'  ins, 

and  thus  disguised  himself  as  a  rustic.  In  short, 
he  at  last  succeeded  in  deceiving  the  sen  ho 

were  guarding  the  beel  ;  and  as  we  sail  before, 
this  was  not  altogether  a  difficult  feat.  TheSar  lar 
never  seriously  expected  that  he  would  be  able  to 
prevent  the  approach  of  Ameer. 

Ameer  reached  his  village,  and  was  very 
much  relieved  to  find  that  the  dacoits  were  in  an 
amiable  mood.  Thev  had  not  onlv  not  used  one 
word  of   insult,  or  touched    one  item  of  property, 

H4 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

but  had  agreed  to  dine  and  make  a  gala-day  of  it. 
He  sat  thinking,  surrounded  by  the  elders  of  the 
village,  in  the  house  of  a  tenant,  a  good  many 
hundred  yards  off  from  his  own. 

But  yet  there  was  no  knowing  how  the  dacoits 
would  act  in  the  end.  They  were  drinking,  and 
it  would  be  only  in  keeping  with  their  character 
to  change  their  peaceful  intentions,  and  become 
violent.  Ameer  thought  that  the  best  thing  for 
him  would  be  to  tender  his  submission.  But  would 
that  mollify  Behari?  What  would  then  prevent 
the  latter  from  hacking  to  pieces  his  old  enemy  ? 
The  pride  of  Ameer  also  revolted  against  sub- 
mission. He  must  first  make  a  determined  effort 
to  rescue  his  means  of   attack   and  defence. 

He  had  left  his  bow  and  his  leather  quiver, 
concealed  in  the  thatch  of  the  outer-house.  That 
was  one  of  the  places  where  he  hid  them  now  and 
then.  In  the  morning,  he  had  left  them  there, 
and  he  was  almost  absolutely  sure  that  they  had 
not  been  removed.  He  determined  to  reach  his 
own  house,  disguised  as  a  rustic,  to  see  if  he 
could  get  hold  of  them. 

Ameer  formed  his  plan.  The  rustics  of  the 
village,  one  by  one,  i  approached  the  dacoit  camp. 
The  young  and  the  old,  the  children,  and  even 
some  old  women  were  there.  The  dacoits  were 
cooking  ;  some  were  bathing  in  the  tank  close  by, 
(the  tank  still  exists.)  The  ghatties  were  guarding 

145 
S— 10 


1'ICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

the  passages,  and  Behari  was  talking  to  some 
respectable  villagers.  Among  the  villagers,  who 
\\  niched  the  doings  of  the  dacoits,  was  Ameer, 
unperceived  and  unrecognized  by  the  dacoits. 
Ameer  was  not  known  by  sight  to  most  of  them; 
he  was  dressed  as  an  ordinary  dirty  rustic  ;  and 
the  dacoits  had,  besides,  partaken  much  of  paddy 
rum.  Thus  Ameer  succeeded  in  keeping  himself 
unrecognized  among  the  crowd. 

Now,  with  all  their  efforts,  the  Indians  have 
never  been  able  to  acclimatize  drink  in  the  country. 
Drink  will  never  suit  the  stomach  of  an  Indian. 
He  can  never  drink  without  being  affected.  See, 
how  a  European  will  swallow  a  bottle  of  strong 
drink  and  remain  unaffected.  But  a  veteran  Indian 
drinker  will  often  get  drunk  at  the  sight  of  liquor. 
This  is  the  case  now  ;  the  case  in  those  days  was 
worse.  The  sentinels  were  reeling  under  the 
influence  of  Dhanyeswari  (paddy  liquor.) 

Gradually  the  crowd  of  rustics  thickened  in 
that  part  of  the  outer-house  where  Ameer  had 
hid  his  bow  and  leather  arrow-bag.  Ameer  stood 
close  to  the  place, — his  breast  heaved  with  excite- 
ment. He  brought  the  bow  and  the  leather-bag 
out  of  the  thatch  unperceived,  and  he  left  the 
place  hurriedly,  unperceived  too. 

Ameer  now  felt  that  he  was  master  of  the 
situation.  But  he  had  no  desire  to  present 
himself  before  the  dacoits  as  a  rustic.    He  entered 

146 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

the  house  of  a  neighbour,  secured  a  clean  piece  of 
cotton  cloth,  and  tightly  wrapped  it  round  his 
narrow  waist.  He  also  procured  a  piece  of 
leather  by  which  he  covered  his  left  arm  to  protect 
it  from  the  string  of  his  bow.  The  iron  ring  on 
.his  right  thumb  he  never  parted  with  ;  so  he  had 
not  to  borrow  it.  In  explanation,  we  may 
mention,  that  the  iron  ring  is  wanted  for  the 
purpose  of  drawing  the  bow  when  discharging 
an  arrow  ;  the  string  will  hurt  the  left  arm  and  so 
archers  protect  it  by  wrapping  round  it  a  piece  of 
leather. 

Ameer  stood  behind  a  mango  tree.  The 
dacoits  were  then  eating,  and  it  was  within  the 
power  of  Ameer  to  shoot  Behari  Sardar  dead  in  a 
twinkle.  But  the  idea  was  revolting  to  him.  He 
surely  was  no  dacoit.  How  could  he  shoot  at  a 
man  from  behind  a  cover?  How  could  he  shoot 
.at  one  who  was  dining. 

But  it  was  another  feeling  which  powerfully 
moved  Ameer.  Had  not  the  Sardar  treated  him 
generously?  He  had  everything  belonging  to 
Ameer  at  his  absolute  disposal,  and  yet  he  had 
not  uttered  one  insulting  word.  This  feeling  of 
gratitude  so  completely  overpowered  Ameer  that 
he  felt  something  like  affection  for  the  Sardar. 
Indeed,  he  knew  that  if  his  presence  were  known, 
it  would  spoil  the  feast ;  so  he  would  have 
patiently  waited  till  the   Sardar  had  finished  his 

H7 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

dinner.  But  the  Sardar  and  his  men  brought 
matters  to  a  crisis.  When  the  band  cried  Fate 
(victim)  to  Ameer,  he  bore  it  patiently.  But 
when  the  Sardar  himself  joined  in  the  mirth  and 
demanded  to  know  where  his  host  Ameer  was, 
he  could  bear  it  no  longer.  He  aimed  at  the  cap 
of  the  Sardar,  and  the  obedient  arrow  gently 
carried  it  off  the  Sardar's  head,  and  pinned  it  on 
the  ground  behind  ! 

Alter  discharging  the  arrow,  Ameer  flung  the 
bow  on  his  left  shoulder,  advanced  a  step 
from  behind  his  cover,  and  declared,  "Golam 
Ameer  Sheikh  is  hazeer  (present).  What  would 
you  have  of  me?'' 

The  dacoit  band  sat  petrified,  but  Behari  rose 
with  sword  in  hand  ! 

He  and  Ameer  gazed  at  each  other  ! 

A  good  swordsman  can  cut  an  arrow  to 
pieces.  But  a  swordsman,  however  expert  and 
vigilant,  was  yet  at  the  mercy  of  a  swift-shooter  or 
good  shot.  He  could  cut  the  first  arrow,  but  he 
would  have  no  time  to  defend  himself  from  the 
second,  at  least  from  the  third.  Rage,  disappoint- 
ment and  fear  alternately  played  on  the  features 
of  the  Sardar.  But  Ameer  leaned  against  the 
mango  tree,  and  only  looked  triumphantly  at  the 
Sard  at. 

At  last  the  Sardar  found  words.  Said  he; 
<(  Young  man  !  you  took  me  unawares." 

148 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

"So  did  you!"  replied  Ameer.  And  the  Sardar 
bit  his  lip. 

"Why  delay?  Send  your  shafts.  I  am  ready," 
said  the  Sardar. 

Ameer. — "I  bear  you  no  resentment.  Finish 
your  dinner." 

Behari  replied:  "Then  come;  let  us  dine 
together,"  and  the  Sardar  threw  away  his  five — 
foot  sword  !  "Come  now." 

Ameer.— "I  cannot  go  into  your  midst,  for 
though  I  can  trust  you,  I  cannot  trust  your  men. 
Besides,  I  have  taken  a  vow.  You  have  respected 
my  honour  and  property ;  and,  in  return,  I  have 
respected  your  life.  We  are  thus  quits.  lean,  how- 
ever, never  make  friends  with  you  unless  you  tell 
me  the  name  of  the  spy  who  betrayed  me  to  you." 

Ameer,  having  got  no  immediate  reply  from 
the  Sardar,  continued,  and  this  time  with  a  little 
vehemence  :  "If  you  and  I  must  be  friends,  let  us 
have  no  secrets  between  us.  Tell  me  who  is  the 
base  spy  that  betrayed  me?" 

The  countenance  of  the  leader  betrayed  a 
slight  frown,  but  he  immediately  assumed  a  cordial 
tone  and  said  :  "Sheik  Ameer!  You  know  our 
creed.  We  do  not  betray  our  agents  ;  we  cannot 
do  that  without  trampling  upon  honour  and  break- 
ing a  most  sacred  oath.  Dacoits  though  we  are, 
you  know  we  cannot  break  an  oath,  or  commit  a 
mean  act." 

'49 


TICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

Ameer  replied,  and  though  he  tried  to  be 
calm,  there  was  some  bitterness  in  his  tone.  "This 
is  unreasonable,  Sardar  Saheb.  You  and  I  are  to 
be  friends,  and  yet  you  will  protect  my  deadliest 
enemy.  We  cannot  meet  breast  to  breast,  with 
such  an  obstacle  between  us." 

The  Sardar  then  assumed  a  lofty  tone,  and 
id  :  "To  secure  your  friendship  I  will  not  commit 
a  dishonourable  act, — I  will  not  doso  even  to  save 
my  life.  I  cannot  do  so  what  ever  may  happen. 
Now,  this  is  my  last  word  ;  and,  young-  man,  you 
can  take  your  choice  and  do  what  you  think  best. 
Let  not  m<  n  say  that  Behari  Sardar  committed 
a  dishonourable  act  to  appease  a  wrathful 
opponent."' 

Fellu  Gazee  was  the  name  of  the  man  whose 
wife  Ameer  had  married,  and  who,  in  revenge, 
had  betrayed  him  to  the  Sardar.  He  was  there, 
and  so  were  all  the  others  of  Ameers  men.  The 
attitude  of  Ameer  and  the  Sardar  created  a  pro- 
found sensation  among  the  two  hundred  men  pre- 
sent, dacoits  and  villagers.  They  all  apprehended 
a  split,  and  got  very  much  excited,  though  none 
ventured  to  utter  a  word. 

When  the  Sardar  threw  the  gauntlet  to  Ameer 
and  while  Ameer  was  making  up  his  mind,  Fellu 
approached  and  stood  before  him.  Said  he, 
amidst  breathless  silence,  "Sheikjee  My  land-lord! 
I  cannot  permit   further    mischief.     It  was  I    who 

150 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

betrayed  you.  You  deprived  me  of  my  wife,  and 
I,  in  revenge,  betrayed  you.  Here  I  am.  Now, 
shoot  me  dead." 

All  eyes  were  turned  towards  Fellu.  Ameer's 
brow  darkened.  He  was  seized  by  a  fierce  passion 
and  he  took  in  his  left  hand,  the  bow  which  was 
hanging  on  his  shoulders.  He  remembered  how 
he  had  trusted  Fellu,  favoured  him  and  loved  him 
too  ;  and  how  Fellu  had,  with  consummate  hypo- 
crisy, returned  the  affection  and  won  his  confi- 
dence. He  remembered  too,  how  Fellu  had 
brought  in  the  dacoits  and  placed  the  property 
and  honour  of  all  the  villagers  at  their  disposal. 
He  remembered  all  these,  and  lost  all  control  over 
himself. 

'-'  And  so,  Nimakharam"  (traitor),  said  Ameer 
*  'for  the  wrong  that  I  did,  you  wanted  to  deliver 
the  entire  village,  your  own  village,  over  to  the 
enemy?" 

He  was  interrupted  by  Fellu  with  these  words 
"I  do  not  justify  my  conduct.  Here  is  my  breast, 
send  a  shaft  through  it,  and  have  your  revenge." 
Fellu  stood  before  Ameer  and  the  crowd.,  and  he 
looked  like  a  passionless  statue.  His  countenance 
betrayed  no  fear — it  was  calm,  and  so  noble  and 
beautiful!  Ameer  gazed  at  him  in  v/onder. 
Whence  did  Fellu  get  this  sudden  beauty?— 
thought  every  one. 

Ameer's  face  betrayed  a  fierce  struggle  within 

151 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

his  breast.  At  last,  he  ended  by  hanging  down 
his  head, — in  contrition. 

"Fellu,"  said  he.     "Forgive   me,  if  you  can." 

But  surely,  we  are  not  going  to  write  a  novel ; 
we  must,  however,  relate  the  story  as  we  heard  it. 
The  Sardar  came  forward  and  embraced  Ameer 
and  said  :    "  Thou  art  a  noble  fellow." 

They  all  sat  under  the  mango  trees  surroun- 
ding the  courtyard  of  Ameers  house.  Said 
Behari :  "Thy  fame  as  an  archer  has  spread  far 
and  wide.  It  is  said  that  there  is  no  one  in  the 
world  who  can  rival  thee  in  archery.  Show  us  a 
little  of  thy  skill,  so  that  my  eyes  may  go  from 
here  delighted,  as  my  stomach  surely  does." 

Ameer  craved  leave  for  a  few  minutes  for  a 
change  of  dress.  He  came  back  dressed  in  a 
moment.  There  was,  however,  nothing  to  protect 
his  person  from  his  enemies.  But  he  had  dressed 
tightly  which  displayed  his  well-built  figure  to 
great  advantage.  He  stood  before  the  assembled 
crowd  with  some  of  his  pupils.  He  placed  his  bow 
and  arrows  upon  the  ground  and  salaamed  them 
thrice,  and  then  he  began  the  exhibition. 

The  first  thing  that  Ameer  showed  was  the 
strength  of  his  arrows.  There  was  a  betel-nut  tree 
close  by.  Ameer  let  an  arrow  fly  at  it  with  force, 
and  it  pierced  the  trunk  through  and  stuck  there. 
The  dacoits  remarked  that  no  shield,  not  even  one 
of   rhinoceros   hide,    would  protect   a   man   from 

152 


BEHARI   SARDAR 

a  shaft,  shot  with  so  much  force.  The  arrow 
stuck  there,  and  was  left  in  that  position  for 
several  years  for  people  to  come  and  see,  till  a 
big  gale  or  cyclone  uprooted  the  betel-nut  tree. 

One  of  his  pupils  stood  at  a  distance  of  one 
hundred  cubits  from  Ameer,  with  a  betelnut  on 
his  right  palm.  Ameer  steadied  his  aim  and  let 
fly  his  arrow  with  some  care.  The  arrow  carried 
the  nut  on  its  head  a  few  yards  from  its  resting 
place.     The  feat  elicited  tremendous  applause. 

Another  feat  which  Ameer  showed  was  with 
a  gonra  lemon.  Now,  this  is  a  degenerated  species 
of  the  orange,  even  smaller  than  narangee.  Ameer 
stood  ten  cubits  in  advance  of  his  pupil,  who  sent 
the  lemon  with  great  force  rolling  in  the  courtyard. 
Ameer  aimed  at  the  rolling  lemon  and  pinned  it 
with  his  arrow  to  the  great  delight  of  the 
spectators. 

Mango  plucking  was  the  next  feat  shown, 
which  was  still  more  wonderful.  Ameer  pierced 
an  unripe  mango  with  his  arrow  which  stuck  in 
the  fruit.  This  gave  a  swinging  motion  to  the 
mango,  the  arrow  sticking  to  it.  When  the  mango 
became  still,  Ameer  again  aimed,  and  this  time 
the  shaft  stuck  to  the  tail  of  the  first  arrow  !  There 
was  again  a  swinging  motion,  and  again  Ameer 
waited  until  the  mango  became  still.  A  third 
arrow  was  then  shot  which  stuck  to  the  tail  of  the 
second  arrow.  At  the  third  shot  the  mango  fell    to 

153 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

the    ground,  with  three  arrows  sticking  to  it  in  a 
line  i 

His  pupils  then  urged  Ameer  to  perform  the 
dig  bazee  (the  somersault).  But  Ameer  declined. 
The  Sardar  then  pleaded,  and  all  the  dacoits 
pressed.  A  good  many  of  them  were  then 
weeping  in  joy  at  the  display  of  the  wonderful 
feats  of  Ameer.  A  good  many  felt  an  irresistible 
impulse  to  come  and  embrace  and  kiss  him,  but 
the  presence  of  the  Sardar  checked  their  ardour. 

Ameer  said  :  "My  ostad  (preceptor)  command- 
ed me  never  to  attempt  such  a  feat  when  there 
was  the  least  breath  of  wind.  I  do  not,  as  a  rule 
make  the  attempt  unless  I  am  alone.  Besides 
success  is  uncertain,  so  please  excuse  me." 

"  But,"  said  the  Sardar,  "are  not  your  arrows 
under  the  control  of  a  gin  (evil  spirit)?  Why 
then  deprive  us  of  the  pleasure  ?  "  Ameer  smiled. 
He  said  he  did  not  know  the  gin  who  was  said 
to  be  so  friendly;  he  was  certain  also  that  a  success- 
ful dig  bajee  was  beyond  its  control.  "However," 
continued  he,  "as  I  do  not  feel  much  wind  now, 
I  will  try  ;  but  success  I  do  not  guarantee.1'  With 
this,  he  salammed  his  bow  and  arrows  again,  and 
prepared  himself  for  his  gigantic  and  last  effort. 
He  first  examined  his  bow  carefully,  and  selected 
tfcree  of  his  best  arrows.  He  stood  in  the  middle 
of  the  court-yard,  then  slowly  and  silently  drew 
the  string  and   let  go   an   arrow,  not  with  great 

154 


BEHARI   SARDAR 


force,    though    yet  sufficiently    high  to   make  it 
almost  invisible. 

The  arrow  fell  a  few  paces  in  front  of  him  with 
its  head   downwards,   penetrating  the   earth  an 
inch  or  so.  The  arrow  stood  perfectly  erect !  Ameer 
took  a  second   arrow,   and  sent  it   up   with  great 
deliberation.  The  spectators  watched  its  progress 
with  intense   excitement.  When  the  arrow  took  a 
downward    direction,    the  excitement  increased. 
Down  the  arrow   came  amidst   breathless   silence 
and  indescribable    excitement,  and  it  fell   exactly 
upon  the  tail  of  the  first  arrow,— perfectly   erect! 
A  second  or  two  after  this  occurrence,  the  Mussal- 
mans    raised   the   cry   of    Allah,  Allah,  and    the 
dacoits  that   of  Kalee,  Kalee,  and  the   demonstra- 
tion of  joy  continued    for  some  time.  Such  a  feat 
was  never  before   heard   of.  Ameer   declined    to 
discharge  his  third   arrow;  for   he  felt   then   that 
the  wind  had  risen  a  little. 

Here  we  end  our  story.  The  dacoit  rule  in 
Bengal  was  supplanted  by  the  planter  and  zemin- 
dar rule.  The  dacoits  were  subsequently  extermi- 
nated with  the  help  of  the  zemindars  and  the 
indigo-planters.  In  the  place  of  the  dacoits,  the 
latter  began  to  rule  the  country.  The  Magistrates 
of  that  period  did  and  could  do  nothing.  The 
police  only  hampered  them,  and  the  people  never 
resorted  to  courts  for  the  adjustment  of  their 
differences. 

155 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

Poor  Behari  Sardar  died  a  most  unromantic 
death.  He  was  apprehended  in  his  old  age,  with 
the  help  of  a  treacherous  comrade.  When  Behari 
found  himself  surrounded  in  the  hut,  where  he 
was  concealing  himself  and  that  there  was  no 
way  of  escape,  he  took  a  spear  and  caused  a 
deep  gash  in  his  abdomen,  laying  his  intestines 
open.  In  an  insensible  condition,  he  was  taken  to 
the  Jessore  hospital,  where,  wonder  of  wonders  ! 
he  recovered,  his  strong  constitution  helping  him 
no  doubt.  Behari  was  sent  across  the  Kalapanee, 
where  he  died  after  a  very  short  residence.  It  is 
now  peace  in  Bengal,  nay,  in  every  part  of  India. 
The  country  has  been  disarmed,  and  the  result  of 
that  measure  is  that  not  only  has  all  chivalry  fled 
from  the  country  but  all  martial  spirit.  Nay,  we 
fear,  the  people  are  day  by  day  losing  their  manli- 
ness. So,  you  see,  even  peace  has  its  disadvan- 
tages. The  people  have  become  now  so  helpless 
that  they  find  it  difficult  to  encounter  a  mad  jackal. 
The  British  Government  might  have  strengthened 
its  position  by  utilizing  this  martial  spirit  of  the 
people. 


THE  PERPETUAL  SLAVERY 
OF  INDIA 

We  quoted  some  months  ago  a  paragraph 
from  Max  Muller,  in  which  the  learned  Professor 
declared  that  the  contemplation,  that  the  Hindus, 
so  gentle,  gifted  and  innocent,  should  be  made 
subject  to  other  nations,  for  no  fault  of  their  own 
but  simply  because  they  had  not  cultivated  the 
art  of  war,  filled  him  with  profound  sorrow..  Yes, 
the  history  of  the  Hindus  is  a  history  of  continued 
humiliation  ;  but  we  must  bear  up  with  that.  It 
is  also  a  history  of  massacres  of  their  men,  women 
and  children  ;  of  outrages  upon  their  women  and 
sacred  objects  ;  and  of  the  plunder  and  burning  of 
their  cities  which  they  had  built  with  the  toil  of 
ages.  We  shall  describe,  in  a  few  short  sentences, 
how  Hindus  began  their  national  life,  and  how 
they  have  been  treated  by  their  fellow-beings. 

Hindus  lived  innocent  lives  and  respected  the 
lives  of  the  meanest  creatures;  they  cultivated 
learning  and  philosophy ;  they  preached  and 
practised  spirituality,  neither  wishing  ill  to  their 
fellow-beings  nor  apprehending  ill  from  others. 
While  thus  passing  their  lives,  they  found  them- 
selves suddenly  confronted  by  an  overwhelming 
force  of  marauders.     They    saw   that   resistance 

157 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

would  be  useless  ;  and  they  found  also  that  the 
pitiless  fiends  who  had  invaded  their  country,  had 
no  human  sentiments  in  them.  So,  what  Hindus 
did,  was  to  kill  their  women  and  to  fall,  with 
swords  in  hand,  in  the  midst  of  the  attacking 
hordes.  There  they  were  cut  tp  pieces  ;  their 
country  was  looted  and  subsequently  burnt  to 
ashes;  and  an  important  town  and  an  important 
clan  were  for  ever  extinguished. 

The  above  is  the  epitome  of  the  history  of 
India.  In  our  schools  and  colleges,  History  of 
India  is  taught.  Of  course,  students  must  go 
through  that  teaching,  and  there  is  no  help  for  it. 
But  grown-up  Hindus  never,  if  they  can  help  it, 
touch  the  History  of  India.  It  is  not  pleasant 
reading  to  them.  It  was  thus  that  history  was 
not  written  in  India. 

Neither,  we  think,  is  the  study  of  Hindu 
History  a  profitable  one,  for,  it  teaches  infidelity. 
The  outrages  committed  upon  India  by  barbarians 
in  their  greed  for  material  gains,  are  calculated 
to  lead  the  Hindus  to  the  idea  that  they  are  not 
in  keeping  with  the  character  of  the  good  God  of 
the  universe.  That  a  nation  so  innocent,  so 
gentle — a  nation  which  has  taught  His  worship  to 
mankind — should  be  subjected  to  so  gross  outrages 
for  no  fault  of  their  own,  is  no  proof  to  the 
ordinary  mind  that  God  is  good  and  just. 

Max  Muller  was  profoundly  affected  at  seeing 

158 

\ 


THE    PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

the  condition  of  innocent  India,  because  he  came 
somewhat  in  touch  with  the  people  through  their 
literature.     But  do  Englishmen,  who  are  in  direct 
touch  with  the  people  of  this  country — who  are,  in 
fact,  in  the   position    of   their  "Ma  Bap'' — feel  a 
similarly  profound  sympathy  for  the  abject  condi- 
tion of  an  ancient  people  ?     Is  not  India,  in  many 
respects,  the  noblest  and  most  interesting  country, 
and   the  only  country  in  the  world  which  has  no 
national  liberty?     And  who  are  its  masters  now  ? 
The  English  !  But  how  can  this  be?     Englishmen 
cannot   bear  injustice  or  oppression.     They  paid 
from  their  own  pockets  for  the  liberation  of  slaves 
in   America,  and   for  them  formed    a    Republic, 
called  Liberia.     How  is  it  that   Englishmen,  who 
-are   also   ready   to  go   to    war   with   the   Sultan 
because  his  Bulgarian  subjects  have  no  political 
liberty,   have   kept   India  in   political   bondage  ? 
"How  is  it  that  the  only  subject  nation  in  the  world 
is   under  the    sway   of  the   most   liberty    loving 
nation  in  the  world? 

When  Hindus  recovered  from  the  shock  of  the 
Greek  invasion  the  Mahomedans  came.  It  took 
the  Mussalmans  three  hundred  years  to  obtain 
possession  of  the  country.  To  ascertain  how  India 
fared  under  them,  we  have  only  to  examine  the 
most  sacred  temples  of  the  Hindus.  The  Image 
•of  Bishweshwar  was — well,  everybody  knows 
what  was  done   with  the   Image.     The    greatest 

159 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN*   I.I  IT. 

temple  in  the  world,  that  of  Gobincla  Deva,  was 
dismantle:!  by  Aurungzeb,  on  the  plea  that  the 
act  would  be  pleasing- to  his  God. 

Hindus  never  cared  for  political  power.  If 
they  had  done  so,  the  Khsetriyas,  who  supplie  1 
the  country  with  Kings,  statesmen,  and  soldiers, 
would  have  been  put  in  the  first  and  not  in  the 
second  rank.  The  Brahmins,  who  forme  1  the 
first  class,  as  a  rule,  never  mediled  with  politics, 
nor  served  the  State.  Those  who  did,  were 
considered  outcastes.  Chanakya,  the  celebrated 
Hindu  statesman  and  minister  of  Chandra  Gupta 
gave  up  the  world  and  spent  the  last  days  of  his 
life  in  wilderness,  in  order  to  wipe  out  his  sins 
which  he  had  accumulated  by  his  contact  with 
politics. 

It  was  not,  as  urged  by  Max  Muller,  that 
Hindus  lost  their  independence  because  they  had 
not  cultivated  the  art  of  war.  They  lost  their 
independence,  because  they  did  not  put  much 
value  upon  it. 

It  was  of  no  moment  to  the  Hindus,  who 
governed  them,  if  they  were  governed  well.  The 
lot  of  Kings,  ministers  and  generals  was  not 
envied  by  the  higher  classes.  Fighting-  and  all 
political  work  were  left  to  inferior  classes,  the 
Brahmins  avoiding  them  as  beneath  their  dignitv. 
Here,  then  we  enter  upon  an  important  phase  of 
this  question,   viz,  the  present  abject  condition  of 

160 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

India.  What  led  to  this  subiect  condition  of 
India?  It  was  not  that  the  Hindus  did  not  know 
how  to  fight — it  was  because  their  instincts 
were  opposed  to  those  of  other  nations.  When 
the  Mussalman  general  invaded  Bengal,  the 
King  and  his  ,  advisers  yielded  without  a 
struggle.  The  King  was  old,  and  he  had 
no  thought  for  the  world.  His  advisers  and 
his  people  did  not  also  much  care  as  to  who  ruled 
them,  provided  they  were  let  alone  with  the  culti- 
vation of  their  learning  and  religion.  One  can 
see  that  the  best  energies  of  the  Western  nations 
are  devoted  to  the  cultivation  of  the  art  of  war, 
the  invention  of  infernal  and  destructive  machines 
and  manageable  war-balloons,  and  the  raising 
and  equipment  of  gigantic  armies.  Their  national 
energies  are  fccussed  in  conquests,  in  diplomacy, 
in  arts  and  commerce,  and  so  forth. 

But  in  India,  Kings  abdicated  their  thrones 
when  they  found  that  they  were  growing  old,  and 
statesmen  did  so,  to  wipe  out  their  sins.  Every 
man  under  fifty  was  required  to  lead  the  life  of  a 
religious  man  ;  and  he  who  did  not,  was  consider- 
ed something  like  a  leper.  The  intellectual  classes 
devoted  all  their  energies  to  the  cultivation  of  the 
arts,  sciences  and  their  spiritual  faculties.  As  for 
fighting,  the  shedding  of  blood  was  considered  an 
inhuman  practice.  Surely,  men  were  not  dogs ! 
Those,  who   killed    fellow-beings,  were    Ghouls, 

161 
S— n 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

Rakhasas,  and  so  forth.  Indeed,  the  Hindus 
avoided  the  cares  of  the  State,  an$J  they  would 
have  thankfully  given  up  everything- to  the  Musal- 
mans  if  they  had  not  committed  oppressions.  The 
Mussalmans  fell  because  of  their  oppressions. 

The  East  has  been  called  "sensuous/'  because 
of  the  stories  contained  in  the  book,  called  "  The 
Arabian  Nights'  Entertainments.''  The  descrip 
tion  of  "  black-eyed  houries"  and  "  sparkling  gob- 
lets of  gold  "  in  that  book,  created  the  impression 
that  the  people  of  the  East  were  devoted  to 
"  women  and  wine.''  But  if  Persia  or  Baghdad 
was  sensuous,  it  would  be  manifestly  unjust  to 
call  India  so.  Notwithstanding  all  the  efforts  of 
the  Abkari  Department,  the  people  of  India 
have  not  yet  been  induced  to  take  largely  to 
intoxicating  liquors.  It  would  be  no  exaggeration 
to  say,  that  drinking  is  even  now  almost  unknown 
in  India. 

In  the  same  manner,  it  may  be  said  that  the 
custom  of  eating  meat  does  not  obtain  in  this 
country.  The  higher  classes  are  almost  all 
vegetarians  ;  and  even  the  lower  classes,  though 
they  are  permitted  to  taste  almost  only  the  flesh 
of  goats  and  sheep,  rarely  have  recourse  to  it.  We 
have  thus  a  rare  use  of  meat  and  drink  in  India, 
which  would  never  have  been  the  case  if  the 
country  were  sensuous. 

Of  course,   polygamy  is  permitted   under  the 

162 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

national  law  of  the  land,  in  order  to  keep  the 
balance  of  men  and  women  equal  in  the  marriage 
market ;  but  the  custom  of  marrying  more  wives 
than  one,  is  likewise  almost  unknown.  On  the 
other  hand,  widows  are  not  permitted  to  re-marry. 
It  has  often  been  alleged  that  this  is  a  cruel  custom. 
This  must  seem  so  to  those  who  cannot  go  beyond 
the  flesh.  It  was  introduced  only  to  give  every 
woman  a  chance  of  marriage  ;  for,  re-marriage  of 
widows  would  create  an  equal  number  of  maids 
in  the  country. 

But  it  must,  at  the  same  time,  be  borne  in 
mind,  that  if  widows  are  not  permitted  to  re- 
marry here,  in  India  alone  men  also  are  seen 
voluntarily  to  give  up  the  world  and  its  pleasures 
for  the  sake  of  a  better  future.  If  the  custom  of 
prohibiting  the  re-marriage  of  widows  prevailed, 
along  with  it  also  prevailed  the  custom,  amongst 
males,  of  adopting  the  life  of  an  ascetic.  So  great 
an  effect  had  the  precepts  and  preachings  of  the 
Hindu  saints  produced  upon  the  people,  that  they 
came  vividly  to  realize,  in  their  minds,  the  worth- 
lessness  of  all  worldly  pleasures.  It  was  thus  that 
men  turned  ascetics  in  large  numbers.  Indeed,  it 
was  in  India  alone  that  people  were  divided  into 
r/rihastas  (family  men)  and  udasins  (ascetics). 
During  the  days  of  Sree  Chaitanya,  the  Prophet  of 
Nuddea, — that  is,  about  four  hundred  years  ago, — 
the  number  of  ascetics,  it  was  estimated,  formed 

163 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

about  one-sixteenth  of  the  entire  male  population. 

It  would,  therefore,  be  manifestly  unjust  to 
call  a  people  sensuous  who,  as  a  rule,  never 
touched  liquor  or  meat,  and  a  large  number  of 
whom,  male  and  female,  lived  the  lives  of  ascetics. 

The  matter  would  be  made  more  plain  when 
we  come  to  consider  the  social  constitution  of  the 
people.  Here  people  were  divided  into  four 
classes:  (i)  the  spiritual  and  intellectual  ;  (2) 
warriors,  statesmen,  and  political  characters  ;  (3) 
merchants  and  trades-people;  (4)  mechanics,  agri- 
culturists and  labourers.  In  other  words,  people 
were  divided  into  Brahmins,  Kshetriyas,  Vaishyas 
andSu.iras.  The  Brahmins  as  forming  the  spiritual 
and  intellectual  classes,  obtained  the  first  place. 
They  had  precedence  over  Kings,  who  belonged 
to  the  second  class.  Kings  had  to  leave  their 
thrones  and  fall  at  the  feet  of  Brahmins.  The 
Kshetrivas,  who  formed  the  second  class,  furnished 
the  country  with  Kings,  statesmen  and  warriors. 
The  Vaishyas,  who  represented  the  wealth  of  the 
country,  belonged  to  the  third  class  only.  The 
spiritual  and  intellectual  classes,  who  formed  the 
first  class,  were  forbidden  to  meddle  with  property 
altogether.  The  Vaishyas,  who  forme  1  the  third 
class,  accumulated  wealth,  and  were  thus  the 
wealthy  men  in  the  country.  They  had,  however, 
an  inferior  place  in  society. 

In  the   West,    however,  there   is   a   different 

164 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

arrangement.  The  Archbishop  of  Canterbury  does 
not  enjoy  the  same  rank  and  respect  as  Mr.  Prime 
Minister  Gladstone.  And  the  King  himself  is  not 
only  the  head  of  the  country,  but  also  the  head  of 
the  Church.  Thus  in  the  West,  those  who  had 
power,  that  is  to  say,  brute  force  and  wealth, 
obtained  the  first  place.  In  India,  those  who  had 
brute  force  like  the  Kshetrivas,  and  wealth  like  the 
Vaisyas  occupied  only  subordinate  places. 

Now,  if  sensuousness  had  been  the  character- 
istic of  India,  the  people  would  have  considered 
the  acquirement  of  wealth  and  brute  force  as  the 
first  objects  in  life;  for,  the  gratification  of  the  sen- 
ses can  be  secured  only  by  the  possession  of  brute 
force  and  wealth.  The  first  object  in  life  in  the 
West  is  material  prosperity;  in  India,  it  is  spiritua- 
lity and  learning.  The  allegation  that  India  is  sensu- 
ous is,  therefore,  absolutely  without  a  foundation. 

When  the  Western  hordes  crossed  the  Indus 
and  came  into  the  country,  they  found  themselves 
in  contact  with  a  race  from  whom  they  differed 
considerably  in  instincts  and  modes  of  life.  India 
was  not  prepared  for  the  rush  of  such  a  horde; 
and  the  pitiless  invaders  carried  everything  before 
them.  When  Porus  declared  that  he  expected,  as 
a  matter  of  course,  a  kingly  treatment  from 
Alexander  the  Great,  the  "hero"  was  surprised. 
He  was  a  Western,  and  he  knew  the  people 
fought  only  for  "greed  of  material  gain." 

165 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

Greeks  were  followed  by  Persians  and 
Afghans.  Hindus  fought  bravely  for  their  religion, 
home  and  hearth;  but  the  hordes  were  too  many 
for  them.  The  present  masters  of  India  claim 
that  they  are  a  superior  and  enlightened,  and  the 
Indians  a  half-civilized  and  inferior,  race.  Their 
chief  ground  for  this  claim  is,  they  are  masters 
here  and  the  Indians  are  slaves.  But  the  argu- 
ment is  not  conclusive.  The  M  irs  ruled  Spain, 
France  and  Austria.  That  fact  does  not  prove 
that  they  were  a  more  enlightened,  or  that  thev 
ciime  of  a  superior,  race  than  the  French.  It  was 
the  barbarians  who  conquered  Rome ;  and  the 
Romans  had  ruled  the  Greeks,  Spartans,  Athenia- 
ns, etc.  The  argument,  therefore,  that  the 
English  are  a  superior  race  because  they  hold 
sway  over  the  Indians,  is  not  thus  conclusive. 
Nobody  ventured  to  urge  that  the  Mussalmans 
were  a  superior  race  to  the  Hindus;  yet,  the 
former  held  absolute  saw  ay  over  the  latter  for 
several  hundred  years. 

Of  course,  the  English  come  of  a  superior  race, 
and  they  have  eminent  qualities,  or  else  they  could 
never  have  acquired  so  much  ascendency  in  the 
world.  But  they  have  yet  serious  defects  in  their 
national  character.  To  be  a  really  superior  race, 
they  must  give  up  the  practice  of  levelling  guns 
at  fellow-beings  and  killing  them  ;  of  seizing  lands 
belonging  to  others  ;   of  mowing  down   men    who 

166 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

are  defending  their  home,  hearth,  religion  and 
national  existence,  by  cannon  shot  or  hanging 
them  on  a  charge  of  disloyalty  ;  and,  of  taking 
away  the  political  liberties  of  weaker  nations.  The 
above  practices  England  must  give  up  ;  for,  they 
are  opposed  to  Christian  religion,  and  are  not  in 
keeping  with  the  teachings  of  their  sweet  Lord, 
on  whom  they  depend  for  everlasting  welfare,  nor 
with  those  of  their  own  instincts  which  are 
proverbially  generous. 

The  natives  of  India  and  their  English  rulers 
do  not  agree  in  their  views  about  public  affairs 
regarding  the  country.  Let  us  see,  \  however, 
where  they  agree  and  where  they  do  not.  The 
great  ambition  of  Englishmen,  at  least,  of  most  of 
them,  is  to  hold  sway  over  India  for  ever  and 
ever.  Of  course,  there  are  some  who  do  not  go  so 
far  and  who  think  that  the  functions  of  England 
are  only  to  prepare  India  for  a  free  existence  in 
future.  But  the  number  of  Englishmen  holding 
the  latter  view,  is  very  small;  and,  if  they  venture 
to  give  utterance  to  their  sentiments,  they  are 
persecuted  by  all  other  classes  of  their  countrymen, 
and  are  called  traitors  to  their  country.  Because 
somebody  was  supposed  to  have  used  the  expres- 
sion "Perish  India,"— though  as  a  matter  of  fact, 
nobody  had  ever  actually  done  it, — very  few 
Englishmen  can  utter  his  name  and  sentiments 
without  giving  vent  to  a  feeling  of  indignation. 

167 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

It  is,  however,  a  settled  thing  with  most 
Englishmen,  that  the  greatest  object  of  their  lives 
is  to  see  that  this  Empire  of  India  be  never  per- 
mitted to  slip  out  of  their  hands. 

Strange  as  it  may  appear,  it  is  a  fact  that 
in  this  view  there  is  no  difference  between  the 
natives  of  India  and  their  rulers.  If  the  prospect 
of  a  separation  between  India  and  England  gives 
most  Englishmen  a  shudder,  it  affects  Indians 
also  in  a  similar  manner.  Indians  themselves 
consider  that  a  separation,  for  the  present,  at  least, 
would  be  a  very  great  calamity  to  them. 

We  shall  explain  why.  First,  there  is  not  a 
centre  for  Hindus  to  rally  round,  nor  a  centre  for 
Mussalmans  in  India  to  do  so.  Secondly,  a  perfect 
union  between  Hindus  and  Mussalmans  is  im- 
possible ;  and,  therefore,  the  idea  of  a  Hindu- 
Mussalman  Government  is  Utopian.  Thirdly,  all 
that  man  really  needs,  is  only  good  rule,  no  matter 
from  whatever  source  it  comes.  It  is  only  vanity 
which  thirsts  after  what  is  called  a  national 
existence.  It  is  quite  possible  for  England  to 
give  India  a  good  rule.  Fourthly,  the  national 
feeling  is  not  as  strong  among  Hindus  as 
among  other  nations  in  the  world.  This,  because 
Hindus  have  been  moulded  by  their  religion  to  the 
thought  that  everything  pertaining  to  this  world 
is  transitory  that  India  is  not  their  permanent 
home,  and  that  the  chief  object  of  human  existence 

:68 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

is  to  secure  a  good  place  in  the  permanent  home, 
which  is  in  other  world.  Patriotism  is  considered 
to  be  the  highest  virtue  in  the  world  by  other 
nations  ;  and  they  wdll  sacrifice  everything,  even 
their  souls,  for  the  cause  of  their  country.  In  India, 
love  of  country  has  not  that  all-controlling  in- 
fluence. Love  of  country  has  a  third  place  in  the 
heart  of  a  Hindu,  the  love  of  religion  occupying 
the  first. 

It  is  this  peculiarity  of  the  Hindu  character, 
which  led  them  to  lose  their  national  independence. 
It  is  this  feeling  which  led  the  higher  classes  in 
India  to  stand  aloof  from  public  affairs  of  the 
country.  Politics  was  considered  beneath  the 
notice  of  man  with  an  immortal  existence 
hereafter,  because  it  dealt  with  purely  worldly 
affairs.  Thus  the  Brahmins  refused  to  be  Prime 
Ministers  of  Hindu  Kings,  and  thus  those  Brahmins 
who  agreed  to  serve,  were  considered  as  fallen 
beings  who  had  to  regain  their  previous  position 
by  a    rigorous  penance. 

Well,  we  see  here  a  perfect  accord  between 
the  natives  of  India  and  their  English  rulers  in 
regard  to  English  supremacy  in  India.  If  the 
English  people  are  resolved  to  hold  India  at  any 
cost,  the  Indians  too  consider  British  supremacy 
essential  for  peace,  in  this  land  of  Hindus  and 
Muss  aim  ans. 

Yet,  Indians  and  the  English  people  will  not 

169 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

agree,  and  are  engaged  in  an  irreconcilable  feud. 
We  shall  try  to  explain  why.  It  is  because  most 
Englishmen  will  not  only  have  British  supremacy, 
but  something  more. 

What  they  will  have  is,  as  expressed  by 
Colonel  Parnell,  "a  perpetual  military  despotism 
for  India/  Please  mind  the  word  "perpetual.'' 
They  will  not  only  have  despotism,  but  one  that 
must  be  perpetual.  They  will  not  even  make  a 
beginning  of  an  eventual  relaxation  of  their  iron 
grip;  and,  if  they  were  led,  during  the  past,  for 
reasons  which  need  not  be  enumerated  here,  to 
make  any  provision  for  a  future  relaxation  of  this 
hold,  they  would  repent,  and  do  their  utmost  to 
see  that  such  provisions  were  rendered  a  dead 
letter. 

In  the  above,  we  have  laid  down,  we  suppose, 
in  clear  language,  why  Indians  and  their  English 
masters  differ  in  their  views  about  public  affairs. 
What  Indians  expected,  was  British  supremacy 
in  the  beginning,  and  British  citizenship  eventual- 
ly. What  Colonel  Parnell  and  all  other  English- 
men holding  his  views,  would  reserve  for  the 
Indians,  is  absolute  subjection,  which  must  be 
perpetual.  But,  what  is  absolute  subjection? 
Well,  it  can  be  explained  by  the  manner  in  which 
India  is  governed  now, — that  is  to  say,  byofficials 
imported  from  Europe  and  armed  with  irresistible 
powers.   Indians  offered  to  provide  better  material 

170 


THE    PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

than  these  imported  officials  at  a  cheaper  cost 
but,  the  proposal  of  Simultaneous  Examinations 
gave  Englishmen  here  a  shudder.  You  can  offer 
the  present  rulers  better  materials  at  a  cheaper 
cost ;  but  they  would  not  accept  such  offers, 
because  such  an  arrangement  would  run  counter 
to  their  paramount  idea  of  keeping  India  in 
perpetual  despotic  subjection.  It  is  not  that 
Englishmen  do  not  know  and  feel  the  justice  and 
expediency  of  utilising  native  talent,  which  is 
cheap,  in  a  poor  country  which  ought  to  be  kept 
contented  under  an  alien  rule.  But,  what  of  that? 
A  Simultaneous  Examination  is  not  compatible 
with  their  great  idea  of  keeping  India  under  abso- 
lute and  perpetual  sway. 

Thus  it  is  that  Indians  and  their  rulers  do  not 
agree.  The  rulers  are  always  for  measures  which 
would  secure  to  England  the  perpetual  and  absolute 
sovereignty  of  India.  Indians  object  to  such 
measures,  and  would  have  seeds  sown  for  the 
eventual  attainment  of  British  citizenship.  Hence 
this  perpetual  feud.  It  is  not  that  the  rulers  do 
not  appreciate  the  advantages  of  cheap  and 
indigenous  labour,  or  those  of  economy,  or  the 
needless  cruelty  of  keeping  on  the  Statue  book 
such  a  measure  as  the  Age  of  Consent  Act  but 
their  policy  requires  that  officials  must  be  imported 
from  England,  that  oftentimes  expenses  are  better 
than  economy,  \  and  that  it  is  essential  that  officials 

171 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

should  have  such  weapons  as  the  measure  of  the 
Age  of  Consent  Act,  to  be  able  to  keep  people 
under  control. 

We  have  now  to  see  what  this  perpetual 
subjection  of  India  means  for  Englishmen.  To 
secure  the  absolute  mastership  of  India,  England 
has  to  induce  a  large  number  of  its  best  men  to 
come  out  here  to  rule.  If  these  men  refuse  to 
come,  the  great  idea  of  Englishmen,  to  hold, India 
in  perpetual  subjection,  falls  to  the  ground.  Those 
Englishmen  have,  therefore,  to  be  persuaded  to 
come  out  here,  with  offers  of  divers  advantages, 
namely,  princely  salaries,  princely  pensions, 
generous  leave  rules,  absolute  sway  over  the 
people,  immunity  from  punishment  for  misdeeds, 
and  so  forth.  Those  who  come  out  here,  know 
their  position  of  advantage.  They  naturally  take 
advantage  of  their  position  and  tyrannize  over 
their  countrymen  at  home.  The  Exchange 
difficulty  having  reduced  their  incomes,  they 
plainly  told  their  countrymen  at  home,  that  they 
would  not  come  out  unless  their  pay  was  increas- 
ed. Englishmen  at  home  had  to  yield  to  this 
threat  and  dictation,  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  out 
their  idea  of  holding  India  in  perpetual  sway. 
They  further  demanded  that  the  Parliamentary 
Vote  about  the  Simultaneous  Examination  should 
be  set  at  nought ;  and  it  was  done,  though  it 
meant  a  blow  at  their  own  glorious  constitution. 

172 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

At  the  present  moment,  it  is  exceedingly  doubtful 
which  is  the  subordinate  authority — the  Indian 
Government  or  the  British  Parliament. 

The  authorities  will  thus  only  inaugurate  such 
measures  as  will,  in  their  opinion,  secure  to 
Englishmen  this  absolute  and  perpetual  sovereign- 
ty. To  this  the  natives  of  the  soil  object.  The 
latter  demand  that  the  authorities  should  make  a 
beginning  for  the  eventual  absorption  of  the  peo- 
ple into  the  British  Empire.  This  the  authorities 
refuse  to  do.  Hence  this  eternal  and  irreconcil- 
able feud.  Englishmen  should,  however,  take  note 
of  what  this  desire  for  perpetual  sovereignty  of 
India  costs  them.  We  fancy  they  lose  much  more 
than  they  gain  by  this  desire. 

HAVE  Englishmen  taken  stock  of  the  losses 
that  they  have  to  sustain  for  the  purpose  of  secur- 
ing the  absolute  and  perpetual  sovereignty  of  India? 
It  is  only  proper  that  they  should  doit.  All  reason- 
able and  practical  men  do,  now  and  then,  see 
whether  they  are  making  any  profit  or  not  in  their 
occupations.  We  have  already  taken  a  moral 
view  of  the  question.  Englishmen,  as  the  leading 
nation  in  the  world,  are  naturally  objects  of  imita- 
tion to  others.  The  example,  shown  by  England 
by  extending  her  conquests,  has  demoralized 
the  whole  of  Europe.  It  may  be  easily  shown  that 
the  reduction  of  civilised  Europe  to  the  condition, 
of  an  armei  camp;  the  employment  of  the  best 

173 


PICTURES   OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

energies  of  the  enlightened  inhabitants  of  that 
continent  to  fighting  ;  the  invention  and  construc- 
tion of  deadly  weapons ;  the  conversion  of  the 
best  men  in  a  country  to  something  like  righting 
materials, — all  this  is  mainly  due  to  the  immoral 
example  set  before  Europe  by  the  leading  nation 
of  the  world,  the  English.  It  is  true  that  the 
Spaniards,  the  Portugese,  and  the  Dutch  first 
pointed  out  the  way  ;  it  is  true  also  that  if  England 
had  been  worsted  in  its  encounter  with  France 
the  latter  country  would  like  England  have  con- 
quered the  worll.  But  the  stern  fact  remains  that 
these  conquests  mean  disruption  of  society,  con- 
tempt for  moral  laws,  disregard  of  human  lives 
and  rights  of  nations  ;  and  are  thus  putting  up  an 
insuperable  barrier  to  the  progress  of  humane 
principles,  which  alone  mark  out  true  civilization 
from  false,  and  the  human  species  from  the  brute 
creation. 

So  long  the  Indians  are  not  blessed  with  the 
privileges  of  the  colonials,  their  country  will  re- 
main in  the  condition  of  "  a  valuable  property.  " 
This  policy  of  keeping  the  country  deprived  of  the 
rights  of  self-government  has  created  the  necessity 
of  guarding  In  'ia  against  foreign  invasion  and  in- 
ternal rebellion.  We  have  now  to  see  what  Eng- 
land has  to  pay  for  these  two  possible  necessities 
referred  to  above.  It  is  impossible  to  give  an  ex- 
haustive account  on   this  head;  but,   we  can  give 

174 


THE  PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

-some  idea  to-day  of  the  sacrifices   of  England  for 
this  purpose. 

First  of  all,  Englishmen  have  to  keep  some 
$ixty  or  seventy  thousands  of  their  best  men  con- 
fined in  this  country.  It  may  be  said  that  there 
is  no  harm  in  that.  On  the  other  hand,  it  may  be 
urged  that  these  seventy  thousand  men,  though 
imported  into  India  and  paid  for  by  the  Indians, 
could  be  used  for  the  purposes  of  the  whole 
Empire.  This  is  true.  That  is,  no  doubt,  an 
advantage,  though  it  is  one  which  is  founded 
upon  an  immoral  arrangement. 

But  have  Englishmen  taken  note  of  the  miser- 
able condition  of  these  seventy  thousands  of  their 
countrymen  ?  Englishmen  have  the  reputation  of 
being  very  much  attached  to  one  another.  Colonel 
Olcott  once  told  us  that,  one  great  virtue  of  the 
English  people  was  that  they  would  sacrifice 
everything  for  the  sake  of  a  countryman.  If  a 
countryman  of  theirs  were  oppressed  in  the  remo- 
test corner  of  the  world,  they  would  go  there  to 
avenge  the  wrong  done  to  him,  at  any  cost.  This 
being  the  English  instinct,  how  is  it,  then,  that 
they  are  so  callous  to  the  miseries  of  their  country- 
men in  India? 

It  is  because  there  is  no  help  for  it.  For  the 
purpose  of  securing  the  absolute  and  perpetual 
sovereignty  of  India,  the  people  of  England  have 
to  shut  their  eyes  to  the   true  condition  of  British 

175 


PICTURES   OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

soldiers  in  this  country.  These  soldiers  are  brought 
from  their  homes  to  a  distant  and  foreign  land,  the 
climate  of  which  does  not,  of  course,  suit  them; 
housed  in  barracks  like  horses  in  a  stable,  and 
treated  as  prisoners,  never  being  permitted  to  go 
out  of  the  precincts  of  the  house  without  permis- 
sion. Their  only  happiness  consists  in  meat,  drink, 
and  the  like,  and  in  shooting  birds;  and  even  the 
latter  pastime  they  are  forbidden  to  indulge  in, 
because  of  the  danger  to  villagers  which  this  pas- 
time has  been  found  to  give  rise  to. 

At  a  Railwav  station,  two  vears  ago.  a  few 
soldiers  rested  for  a  day.  At  about  4  P.  M.,  some 
of  them  surrounded  the  clerk  in  charge  of  the  Sta- 
tion, and  insisted  that  they  must  have  "three 
issues;''  but,  the  clerk  in  reply  said  not  "  three  ''but 
"two."  Of  course,  we  could  not  understand  what 
was  the  subject-matter  of  the  dispute.  On  enquiry, 
however,  we  learnt  that  the  "issues"  meant  issues 
of  rum.  We  inquired  whether  Government  paid 
for  them;  and  we  were  told,  the  soldiers  themsel- 
ves had  to  pay  for  the  drink.  We  again  wanted 
to  know  what  objection  Government  could  have  if 
they  drank  rum  thrice,  since  they  had  to  pay  for 
the  pleasure.  In  reply,  we  were  told,  that  if  they 
were  given  a  free  hand,  they  would  drink  away 
their  earnings  in  a  week,  and  would  remain  drunk 
day  and  night. 

And  it  is  not  their  fault  that  they  seek  to  while 

176 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

away  time  in  drink.  They  have  nothing  to  do, 
day  and  night.  Ten  thousand  miles  away  from  re- 
lations, friends  and  home;  living  as  semi-prisoners 
in  an  uncongenial  climate,  under  strict  discipline, 
anv  breach  of  which  means  imprisonment  and  hard 
labour,  there  is  no  joy  in  the  life  of  a  British  soldier. 
Other  Englishmen  who  come  to  India  may  have 
their  comforts  for  they  can  live  an  independent 
life  and  enjoy  opportunities  of  making  their  pile. 
But  the  British  soldier,  we  presume,  gets  only  a 
shilling  per  day. 

When  the  Purity  party  objected  to  a  disgust- 
ing dutv,  which  Government  had  taken  upon 
itself,  of  supplying  the  animal  requirements  of  the 
soldier,  we  did  not,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  join  in  the 
cry  with  as  much  heart  as  it  was  our  desire  to  do. 
For,  we  saw  that  the  conditions  of  the  existence  of 
British  soldiers  in  India  required  that  they  should 
be  supplied  with  their  animal  wants.  There  was 
absolutely  no  help  for  it.  Either  the  soldiers 
should  be  sent  home,  or  none  but  married  men 
should  be  brought  here  with  their  wives,  or 
Government  must  take  upon  itself  the  disgusting 
duty  of  supplying  them  with  "goodlooking"   and 

"healthy"  females. 

The  task  which  Government  took  upon  itself, 
however,  was  such  a  dirty  one  that  the  Purity 
party  easily  gained  the  day  ;  for,  there  was  none 
who  had  the   courage   of   openly   supporting   it. 

177 
S— 12 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

Thus  the  Purity  party  gained;  but  the  local 
authorities  in  India  saw  so  much  danger  in  the 
reform  that  they  tried  to  evade  the  vote  of 
Parliament  by  throwing  dust  in  the  eyes  of  the 
missionaries. 

How  that  matter  stands  now  we  do  not  know; 
but,  Anglo-Indian  papers  tell  us  that  a  large 
number  of  young  Englishmen  have  for  life  been 
disabled  by  disease  and  have  to  be  sent  home 
invalided.  Have  Englishmen,  who  lose  temper 
when  they  are  told  that  they  should  asso- 
ciate with  the  natives  of  India  for  the  government 
of  the  country,  taken  note  as  to  how  many  of  their 
own  countrymen  are  killed  in  battle  and  by  divers 
diseases,  and  invalided  for  life,  simply  because 
they  shudder  at  the  prospect  of  ever  loosening, 
even  slightly,  the  tight  grip  with  which  they  now 
hold  Hindustan?* 

We  said  that  Englishmen,  generally  speaking, 
are  prepared  to  sacrifice  everything  "for  their 
Empire  of  India  and  the  Indians  approve  of  this 
determination,  There  are,  however.  Englishmen 
who  by  this  "Empire  of  India"  mean  the  perpetual 
and  absolute  sovereignty  of  this  country.  Mere 
supremacy  in  India  will  not  satisfy  them  ;  what 
they  want  is  absolute  sway,  and  that  for  ever  and 
ever.     The  arrangement  which  Indians    propose, 


*  As  the  articles  with  the  above  headings  appeared  in  the 
Amrita  Bazar  Patrika  the  reader  will  excase  repetition  here 
and  there. 

I78 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

viz,  supremacy  for  Englishmen  in  India  and  British 
citizenship  for  Indians,  will  not  suit  them  ;  hence 
this  perpetual  and  irreconcilable  feud  between  the 
ruled  and  the  rulers,  is  unfortunately  getting  more 
bitter  day  by  day.  The  rulers  will  scarcely  inau- 
gurate a  measure  which  has  not  for  its  object 
perpetual  and  absolute  sovereignty  for  them  ;  and, 
the  natives  of  the  soil  naturally  view  every  such 
measure  with  alarm  and  sometimes  with  indigna- 
tion. 

We  have  already  seen  what  this  desire  for 
perpetual  and  absolute  sovereignty  has  cost 
England  and  India.  India  at  present  is  not 
the  country  of  a  nation,  but  the  property  of 
England.  This  Englishmen  admit  by  calling 
it  the  brightest  "jewel''  in  the  British  diadem, 
for  a  jewel  is  only  a  property.  But  so  long 
India  is  regarded  as  a  property,  other  nations  will 
not  cease  to  hanker  after  it.  An  English  lord  who 
had  a  beautiful  mistress  to  whom  he  was  devotedly 
attached,  knew  no  peace  on  account  of  jealousy. He 
kept  her  strongly  guarded,  and  never  permitted 
her  to  go  out  of  sight.  He  had  no  faith  in  the 
virtue  of  the  woman  ;  and,  then,  he  saw  that  many 
other  candidates  for  her  favour  were  trying  to  win 
her  affections.  All  these  circumstances  made  the 
bewitched  nobleman  very  miserable.  Seeing  the 
misery  of  her  master,  the  lady  told  him  that  he 
•could  never  hope  to  put  any  trust  in  her  or  to  get 

179 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

rid  of  his  troublesome  rivals  until  he  had  married 
her.  "  My  dear,"  said  she,  addressing  her  lover, 
"  marrv  me  and  then  you  will  learn  to  put  faith  in 
me,  and  your  rivals  will  consider  my  person  sacred, 
and  they  will  never  venture  to  cast  wistful  glances 
at  me." 

In  the  same  manner,  unless  India  be  granted 
something  like  a  national  existence,  other  strong 
Powers  will  never  cease  to  covet  her  possession. 
And  until  that  is  done,  Englishmen  will  never 
learn  to  put  any  faith  in  the  children  of  the  soil. 
But,  now,  Englishmen  do  not  trust  the  natives  of 
India  at  all,  and  are  constantly  afraid  of  foreign 
aggression.  Every  movement  of  the  natives  of  the 
soil,  every  movement  of  a  foreign  Power,  creates 
a  suspicion  in  their  minds,  which  sometimes  not 
only  makes  the  great  British  nation  look  absurd, 
but  also  leads  them  to  many  suicidal  and  costly 
undertakings.  This  is  only  because  India  is  re- 
garded as  a  property.  But,  if  India  be  raised  to 
the  status  of  the  country  of  a  nation,  she  will  not 
only  cling  to  England  with  affection,  as  her  best 
friend,  but  others  will  also  consider  it  a  sacrilege 
to  try  to  take  possession  of  the  country.  There  are 
innumerable  small  republics  in  the  world,  and,  no 
one  ever  thinks  of  taking  possession  of  any  one  of 
them;  it  is  because  they  have  each  of  them  a 
national  existence. 

It  is  because  India  is  regarded  as  a  property 

180 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

that  its  rulers  have  to  guard  it  against  foreign 
aggressors,  as  also  against  the  natives  of  the 
country.  Make  India  the  country  of  a  nation,  give 
it  a  national  existence,  and  the  Russian  bug-bear 
will  cease  to  give  any  trouble, — India  will  become 
sacred  in  the  eyes  of  even  all  aggressive  nations. 

The  example  shown  by  England  and  Russia 
have  utterly  demoralized  Europe.  In  America,  they 
do  not  know  what  it  is  to  hold  people  under  sub- 
jection. But,  in  Europe,  every  nation  is  after 
foreign  conquests.  In  Europe,  they  have  now  all, 
generally  speaking,  practically  become  lawless. 
Lord  Beaconsfield  complacently  remarked,  "  We 
have  all  of  us  room  enough  in  Asia !"  They  'are 
just  now  dividing  Africa  "  as  we  divide  a  cake," 
said  the  American  Ambassador  in  Paris.  France 
is  just  now  desolating  Madagascar,  and  other 
European  Powers  look  on  unconcerned,  or  rather 
with  envy.  They  are  rather  sorry  that  they  them- 
selves are  not  in  the  place  of  France!  Of  course, 
amongst  themselves  they  have  laws  to  protect  pro- 
perty and  person,  but  they  have  no  regard  for  the 
lives  or  rights  of  human  beings  outside  Europe. 
They  will  seize  any  body's  country  whenever  they 
can,  regardless  of  the  fact  that  every  nation  has  a 
natural  right  to  a  national  existence.  They  will 
massacre  weaker  nations  defending  their  hearth 
and   home. 

The  piteous  appeal  of  the  Queen  of  Madagas- 

181 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

car  is  calculated  to  move  every  heart  which  has  a 
spark  of  humanity  in  it.  But  what  of  that?  Earth- 
hunger  has  almost  uprooted  the  sense  of  justice 
and  the  feeling  of  humanity  from  the  European 
heart.  Yet  they,  Europe,  profess  to  believe  in  a 
God  and  a  Redeemer.  They  have  innumerable 
churches  where  the}7  sit  to  pray  for  forgiveness  for 
their  sins.  But,  what  forgiveness  can  there  be  for 
those  who  mow  down  patriots  with  their  deadly 
weapons,  as  the  French  are  now  doing  in 
Madagascar, — patriots  who  are  righting  in  defence 
nf  the  honour  of  their  families,  for  their  corn-fields, 
their  cattle,  their  children,  and  their  national 
existence  ?  Mind,  in  Europe,  they  are  so  just  to 
themselves  that  they  hang  a  man  who  takes  the 
life  of  another.  But,  when  others  are  concerned, 
they  will  not  scruple  to  slay  thousands  and 
thousands,  to  rob  them  of  their  country  and  gold  ! 

We  are,  however,  only  concerned  with 
Englishmen  who  are  decidedly  the  most  moral 
and  humane  nation  in  Europe.  The  other  day,  a 
smart  discussion  was  held  by  Englishmen  in 
Calcutta,  whether  it  was  cruelty  to  cut  the  tail  of  a 
pigeon.  But  not  a  word  was  uttered  by  them 
when,  say,  about  a  thousand  of  the  Swatis  were 
killed  in  battle,  while  opposing  the  passage  of  our 
irresistible  troops. 

Now,  we  fancy,  every  man  killed  beyond  our 
borders,    was,    according     to    all    right-thinking 

182 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

Englishmen,  a  man  unjustly  massacred.  It  must 
have  given  a  great  shock  to  most  Englishmen  that 
a  cruel  necessity  had  led  them  to  the  massacre  of 
brave  patriots  defending  their  home  and  hearth 
with  stones,  by  means  of  their  weapons  made  under 
scientific  principles.  These  Englishmen  mourned 
in  silence,  though  they  could  not  venture  to  utter  a 
word.  It  must  have  occured  to  most  of  the 
Englishmen,  that  such  deeds  could  not  be  regarded 
by  God  with  pleasure,  and  they  are  opposed  to  the 
teachings  inculcated  by  Jesus  Christ. 

A  little  consideration  will  show  that  it  is  this 
passionate  desire  for  a  perpetual  and  absolute 
sovereignty  of  India,  that  led  to  this  act  and  others 
similar  in  nature.  It  is  thus  under  the  provision  of 
God,     one   immoral   act   is     followed    by   many 

other. 

Europe  is  now  an  armed  camp.     Twenty-two 
millions  of  its  best  men  have  been   reduced  to  the 
condition  of  bull-dogs.     Europeans  really  do  not 
trust  one  another ;  they  never  believe  one  another. 
The  declarations  of  the  highest  men  of    a  country 
will  not  be  believed    by    the  people    of    another 
country.     As  a  matter  of  fact,  they  are  all  bent  on 
deceiving  one  another.     And  how  is  this   possible 
in  nations,  so  well-blessed  as  Europeans  are,  with 
intelligence,  education  and  the    finest    sentiments 
which  mark  out  man  from  brutes?    It    is  because 
earth-hunger  has   blunted    their  sentiments,   and 

183 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

they     can    scarcely     perceive     the    unjustifiable 
character  of  their  acts. 

For  a  better  appreciation  of  the  subject  we 
shall  summarise  the  observations  we  have  already 
made.  We  said  that  the  people  of  India  and 
their  English  rulers  are  now  engaged  in  a  cease- 
less feud.  They  are  not  on  cordial  terms,  and  the 
estrangement  is  getting  wider  day  by  day.  The 
rulers  are  day  by  day  losing  their  sympathy  for 
the  people,  and  the  people  on  the  other  hand,  are 
losing  their  respect  for,  and  confidence  in,  their 
English  masters. 

For  an  explanation  of  this  condition  of  things, 
we  said  that  this  feud  was  solely  due  to  a  desire, 
on  the  part  of  the  rulers,  to  hold  an  absolute  and 
perpetual  sway  over  this,  what  they  call,  "our 
Empire  of  India."  The  people,  on  the  other  hand, 
though  they  feel  the  absolute  need  of  British 
sovereignty,  also  demand,  along  with  it,  British 
citizenship.  Here  we  see  a  perfect  accord  on  one 
point,  viz.,  as  to  the  necessity  for  British  supre- 
macy. But  there  is  a  difference  on  the  other  point, 
viz.,  that  of  British  citizenship.  The  rulers  will 
retain  British  supremacy  but  will  not  grant  British 
citizenship,  hence  this  difference. 

The  people  of  India  revolted  when  they  were 
asked  to  use  cartridges  which  they  believed  con- 
tained the  fat  of  the  swine  and  the  cow.  The  British 
people  were  led  to  come  to  the  conclusion  by  that 

184 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

Mutiny,  that  the  best  course  for  them  would  be 
to  grant  British  citizenship  to  Indians.  And,  as 
a  matter  of  fact,  it  was  granted  to  the  people  of 
India  by  a  Royal  Charter  in  1858.  But,  there  is 
now  no  longer  a  disposition  on  the  part  of  the 
rulers  of  the  land  to  abide  by  the  Queen's  Procla- 
mation. It  has  become  now  quite  apparent  to  the 
meanest  intellect,  that  the  Proclamation  is  consi- 
dered, by  Englishmen  in  general,  as  a  mistake, 
and  such  as  should  not  be  given  effect  to. 

At  the  present  moment,  the  natives  of  India 
do  not  enjoy  the  privileges  of  British  citizens. 
They  are  not  permitted  to  make  laws,  nay,  not 
even  to  administer  the  laws  made  by  their  English 
masters.  The  laws  are  made  by  Englishmen  and 
are  administered  by  Englishmen.  The  people  are 
taxed  by  Englishmen  and  the  revenues  are  spent 
by  Englishmen,  The  natives  of  the  soil  have  not 
even  the  privilege  of  managing  their  own  petty 
village  affairs,  or  of  being  tried  by  their  peers 
-even  in  the  pettiest  of  cases. 

The  Indians  expected  the  great  boon  of  British 
citizenship  to  come  upon  them  in  time.  They 
were  not  in  a  hurry  about  it.  They  wanted  a 
be-ginning.  But  that  beginning  never  came.  They 
formed  themselves  into  a  National  Congress  when, 
they  saw  that  there  was  no  prospect  of  getting 
anything  without  agitation.  They  thought  that 
the  organization   would  prove   conclusively,    that 

185 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

the  natives  of  India  were  earnest  in  their  demands; 
that  they  stuck  to  British  rule  and  did  not  want  a 
severance;  and  that  they  were  competent  to  take 
upon  themselves  some  share  of  the  work  of 
administration. 

The  Indians  in  this  effort  expected  help  from 
their  English  masters.  They  had  the  firm  con- 
viction that  Englishmen  who  always  loved  fair 
play — who,  in  spite  of  a  rough  exterior,  were 
generous  at  heart,  and  always  on  the  side  of 
struggling  humanity  trying  to  get  out  of  their 
difficulties — would  come  forward  to  lend  them  a 
helping  hand  in  their  efforts.  But  some  petty, 
immediate  and  fanciful  advantages  led  them  to 
range  against  this  national  movement.  Instead  of 
helping  the  disorganized  Indians, — disorganised 
because  of  foreign  rule — Englishmen  here  took 
upon  themselves  to  throw  obstacles  in  their  way. 
They  considered  it  a  triumph  if  the  Congress  failed 
in  any  point.  The  rulers,  in  short,  are  not  dispos- 
ed to  lend  the  Indians  any  help  in  their  efforts  to 
learn  some  sort  of  self-government. 

Have  Indians  any  prospect  of  getting  any- 
thing twenty-five  years  hence? — Fifty  years 
hence? — A  hundred  years  hence?  There  is  no  such 
indication,  however,  on  the  part  of  the  rulers  to 
inspire  the  hope  that  Indians  will  have,  at  any 
future  period,  the  prospect  of  enjoying  any  one  of 
the  privileges  of  British  citizenship.      No  measure 

1 86 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

of  Government  now-a-days  indicates  any  relaxa- 
tion of  hold  on  tHfe  people.  On  the  other  hand,  al- 
most every  measure  of  Government  now  a  days 
shows  a  desire  for  a  firmer  hold,  if  that  is  possible 
upon  the  people. 

It  is  this  disposition  on  the  part  of  the  rulers, 
that  leads  Indians  to  grumble,  and  it  is  this  com- 
plaint, on  the  part  of  the  Indians,  which  leads  the 
English  rulers  to  feel  unsympathetically  towards 
the  people  of  this  country. 

There  are   kind-hearted  Englishmen  who  try 
to  soothe  the  Indians    by  a  vague  assurance  that 
they     would  be  blessed    with    political  privileges 
when  they  showed  their  fitness  for  them.     But  this 
assurance  does  not  now  carry  conviction.       If  the 
rulers  had    any  serious  intention  of    gradually  in- 
corporating   the  Indians    in  the  ranks  of  British 
citizens,   they    would    have    given    the    latter  a 
chance.       They  would  have  given  them  chances, 
and  regarded  their  first  failures  with  a  lenient  eye. 
When    Lord    Ripon    inaugurated   his  scheme   of 
local  self-government,  he  remarked  that  failures  on 
the  part  of  the  Indians  were  expected  and  that  the 
Government  should  make  ample  allowances  for 
such  shortcomings  in  the  beginning.    This  measure 
of  local  self-government,by  the  bye,  was  the  last  act 
of^the  Government  of  India  which  showed  any  sym- 
pathy for  the  people.  Lord  Ripon  was  hissed  out  of 
India  for  his  "  pro-native "   tendencies,    and  this 

187 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

suicidal  act,  by  the  Anglo-Indian  rulers  here,  was 
a  signal  for  the  inauguration  of  %  policy  of  repres- 
sion all  along  the  line, — repression  in  every 
direction. 

As  we  said  before,  no  chances  are  given  now; 
on  the  other  hand,  we  see  an  attempt  everywhere 
to  cry  down  everything  done  by  an  Indian.  Mr. 
— .Commissioner  of  the  Presidency  Division,  had 
to  deal  with  two  Indian  Civilians  when  writing 
his  Annual  Report ;  and  both  of  them  were  put 
down  by  him  as  worthless. 

The  hope,  however,  once  held  out  that  Indians 
would  be  treated  more  and  more  as 
fellow  subjects  as  they  advanced  in  the 
knowledge  of  European  methods,  was 
annihilated  by  the  attitude  of  the  rulers  of  the 
land  towards  the  National  Congress.  Here  was 
an  honest  attempt  on  the  part  of  Indians  to  extri- 
cate themselves  from  an  abject  condition.  Here 
was  an  honest  attempt  on  the  part  of  the  leaders 
to  throw  in  their  lot  with  the  British  nation  and 
stick  to  them  for  ever.  But  were  these  honest  and 
laudable  efforts  hailed  with  joy  by  their  rulers? 
No !  Every  effort  was  made  by  the  irresistible 
rulers  of  the  land  to  see  that  Indians  never  suc- 
ceeded. Dissension  was  sown  in  their  ranks; 
the  leaders  were  sought  to  be  won  over  by  offers 
of  reward  and  threats  of  punishment.  Everyone 
knows    that     now-a-days    no    man    of    property 

188 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

ventures  to  show    any  active   sympathy  for  the 
Congress. 

What  the  rulers  of  the  land  have  reserved  for 
the  Indians  is  not  only  British  sovereignty  but  an 
absolute  rule,  and  not  only  an  absolute  rule  but  a 
perpetual  one.  This  absolute  and  perpetual  rule 
must  endure  for  ever  and  ever;  and,  this  is  what 
the  present  policy  of  the  Government  clearly 
indicates. 

We  have  asked  several  Englishmen  of  a 
liberal  mind,  both  here  and  in  England,  to  explain 
what  their  real  intentions  are  as  regards  India. 
We  have  got,  however,  different  replies  from 
different  parties.  One  said  that  he  could  not 
justify,  on  moral  grounds,  the  ostracism  of  the 
natives  of  the  soil  from  all  share  in  the  govern- 
ment of  the  country;  but  he  is  only  one  out  of 
thirty  millions  of  Englishmen  who  rule  India,  and 
he  is  obliged  to  take  his  share  of  the  responsibility 
of  the  moral  wrong.  In  short,  he  had  no  hopes  to 
offer  us.  Another  said  that  such  a  state  of  things 
could  never  continue  for  ever,  and  that  relief  was 
bound  to  come  in  course  of  time.  His  reply  also 
did  not  contain  anything  definite;  he  left  every- 
thing to  chance.  Another  pious  Christian,  a 
philanthropist,  told  us,  in  reply  to  our  question, 
that  Indians  had  no  right  to  complain  ;  for,  they 
had  now  a  better  rule  than  they  had  ever  enjoyed 

before. 

189 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

Now,  this  is  exactly  what  we  are  told  often, — 
not  only  by  very  good  men  in  England  but  also  by 
a  large  number  of  Englishmen  here.  We  are  thus 
asked  to  accept  that  we  are  now  far  better  off 
than  we  ever  were  before.  But,  do  the  authorities, 
who  rule  India,  believe  it?  Let  them  first  believe 
it  themselves  and  then  it  will  be  time  for  them  to 
ask  us  to  accept  the  view  that  India  is  better  off 
now  than  it  was  ever  before. 

But  do  they  believe  the  statement  themselves? 
Why  do  they,  then,  entertain  such  a  profound 
distrust  for  the  Indians?  Their  actions  show  that 
they  have  no  faith  in  Indian  good-will, and  that  they 
entertain  the  notion  that  Indians  are  in  a  state  of 
deep  disaffection,  and  are  only  biding  their  time 
for  a  shaking-off  of  the  foreign  rule.  Every  action 
of  theirs  proves  this  suspicion  of  the  Indians.  Why 
did  they  disarm  Indians  if  they  had  any  faith  in 
the  good-will  of  the  people  ?  Can  the  annals  of  the 
world  show  another  instance  of  two  hundred  and 
fifty  millions  of  people  disarmed  and  practically 
emasculated  for  ever?  Why  this  terrible  and 
unparalleled  punishment?  Englishmen  are  too 
intelligent  not  to  know  that,  by  this  universal 
disarmament,  they  have  done  immense  mischief  to 
themselves.  Indians  could  furnish  ten  millions  of 
soldiers  to  the  rulers  of  the  land, — soldeirs,  efficient 
and  cheap.  With  such  a  horde,  and  with  their 
unparalleled   generalship   and    inexhaustible    re- 

190 


THE  PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  [NDIA 

sources,  Englishmen  could  have  defied  the  world. 
But  why  are  they  emasculating  their  own  people 
and  thus  undermining   their  own  strength  ? 

They  are  fully  aware  of  the  mischief  that  thev 
are  doing  to  themselves  by  this  emasculating 
process.  But,  their  unconquerable  suspicion  leads 
them  to  it.  This  suspicion  could  never  have  got 
such  a  strong  hold  of  their  minds,  if  they  had  any 
faith  in  their  own  contention  that,  Indians  have 
got  now  a  better  rule  than  they  ever  had  before, 
or  a  very  good  rule,  or  anything  like  a  good  rule. 

This  distrust  of  the  Indians  has  led  the  rulers 
of  the  land  to  undergo  many  such  immense 
sacrifices.  For  the  disarmament  of  the  natives  of 
the  soil  is  a  sacrifice,  both  to  the  ruled  and  rulers. 
Everyone  knows  that  it  is  the  forward  policy  of 
the  Government  which  has  almost  ruined  India. 
It  has  brought  upon  India  an  additional  burden 
of  twenty  thousand  British  soldiers.  To  this 
forward  policy  we  owe  all  our  inglorious  and  costly 
border  wars.  To  it  we  owe  roads  and  railways 
through  inaccessible  regions,  and  forts  and  for- 
tresses, maintained  at  immense  cost,  in  distant 
countries.  This  forward  policy  has  added  some- 
thing like  ten  millions  per  annum  to  the  burdens 
of  a  famished  people.  It  has  been  the  cause  of  the 
loss  of  lives  of  innumerable  men,  Indian  and 
European,    and    cattle,    the    chief  wealth  of  the 

Indians. 

191 


PICTURES   OK  INDIAN  LIFE 

And  do  you  know  to  what  mainly  we  owe 
this  forward  policy?  We  quote  the  following-  sen- 
tences from  the  comments  of  an  English  newspaper 
on    a  recent    paper    of   Col.  Hanna  : — 

''Colonel  Hanna  recommit* Is,  as  a  line  of 
defence,  Jacobabad,  Multan,  Peshawar.  As  the 
writerin  The  United  Service  Magazine  points  out, 
'with  Russia  established  in  Afghanistan,  we  should 
be  leaving  constant  intrigues  and  plots  going  on 
against  us  in  India,'  and  retreat  or  defeat  outside 
our  border  would  raise  a  horde  in  our  rear  of  every 
discontented  man  in  India.  Civil  and  Military 
Gazette  recently  shown  1  how  necessary  it  is  to  keep 
the  actual  fighting  away  from  India  itself.  This  is 
also  the  view  of  "  An  officer  of  the  Indian  staff 
corps,'  and,  we  heartily  endorse  it." 

So  we  owe  this  forward  policy  to  the  necessity 
of  "keeping  the  actual  fighting  away  from  India." 
Is    not  this   ridiculous?    Is   it    not   calculated    to 
produce  shrieks  of  laughter  amongst  Indians  ?  By 
marching  forward  to   meet  the    enemy,    we   take 
upon     ourselves    all    the    difficulties    which    an 
invading   army  will  have  to  overcome.  By  sustain- 
ing a  defeat  far  away  from  our  base  of  operations, 
we  risk  the  animosity  of  the  fierce  and    barbarous 
people  in  our  rear  through  whose  country  we  had 
marched.     But,    all   these    dangers   are   nothing 
compared  with  the  other.     And,  what  is  it  ?    The 
danger  is,  as  the    Civil  and  Military  Gazette  has  it, 

192 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

"if  the  English  sustain  a  defeat  on  the  border,  the 
whole  of  India  will  rise  against  them  !  "  So  the 
animosity  of  the  blood-thirsty  barbarians  is 
J  nothing  compared  to  the  animosity  of  the  gentle 
I  Indians,  who  are  alleged  to  be  enjoying  a 
rule  the  like  of  which  was  never  done  before!  Does 
not  such  'a  state  of  the  mind  show  that  suspicion 
has  made  sober  and  intelligent  Englishmen  lose 
their  senses  ? 

A  belief,  in  the   innate  goodness  of  the  rule 
given  to  India,  is  incompatibie    with  such  uncon- 
querable  and  profound  distrust  of  the  people.     It 
is  not  mere  suspicion  that   the  authorities  feel   for 
the  people  of  India  ;   it  is  something  like  a  mania. 
Mr.  Balfour,  in  his  speech  at  Glasgow,  said,  speak- 
ing in  regard  to  Chitral,  that  "the  day  we  lose  our 
prestige  will  be   the  fore-runner  of  the  loss  of  the 
Empire."  Mr.    Balfour,   a   master  of  the  Empire, 
echoes  but  a   generally-accepted  sentiment.     The 
belief  is  entertained  almost  universally,  and  it  is 
oftentimes   openly   declared    too,   that,  the  British 
Government  in  India  has  no  other  basis  to  stand 
upon  than  its  prestige.     Such  a  view  does  not  con- 
firm the  statement  that  Indians  have  got  a  better 
rule  now  than  they  ever  enjoyed  before.     On   the 
other  hand,  the  unusual  importance  given  to  what 
is     called  prestige,  goes    to  suggest  that    British 
Government    has   no  hold  whatsoever  upon   the 
people  on   account   of  its  intrinsic  merits.     So,  it 

193 
S— 13 


PICTURES   OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

owes  its  strength  and  existence  to  decep- 
tions ! 

What  does  this  ostracism  of  the  natives  of  the 
soil  from  the  military  service  prove,  except  that 
the  rulers  have  no  faith  in  them?  Mussalman 
Emperors  trusted  Hindu  Generals,  and  the 
Russians  trust  Mussalman  Generals  selected  from 
among  their  Mussalman  subjects;  but,  the  English 
rulers  of  India  will  not  trust  an  Indian  in  the 
military  service,  though  they  declare  that  they 
have  given  a  better  rule  to  India  than  the  Russians 
ever  gave  to  their  Mussalman  subjects,  or  Mussal- 
man Emperors  did  to  their  Hindu  subjects.  This 
does  not  show  that  they  have  any  sincere  faith  in 
the  excellence  of  their  own  rule.  Jealous  husbands 
oftentimes  act  in  a  ludicrous  manner;  but,  the 
persecuted  wife  does  not  find  anything  pleasant  in 
the  mad  pranks  of  her  lord.  The  steps  taken  by 
the  authorities  to  guard  the  Empire  from  their 
own  people,  have  a  ridiculous  aspect ;  only  they 
are  too  serious  for  the  people  to  derive  any  enjoy- 
ment from  them.  For  every  two  Sepoys,  one 
British  soldier  is  imported  to  keep  guard  !  The 
Sepoys  are  wanted  to  keep  the  people  under 
control,  and  the  British  soldiers  are  wanted  to 
keep  the  Sepoys  under  control ! 

Here  we  have  a  complicated  machinery, 
wheels  within  wheels,  which  not  only  make  the 
whole  thing    cumbrous    and    costly,  but   almost 

194 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY   OF  INDIA 

worthless  for  the  purposes  of  any  substantial  work. 
India  cannot  show  tangible  progress,  because  of 
this  complicated  machinery  which  leads  it  on. 

We  said  that  England  could  raise  ten  millions 
of  soldiers  from  India ;  but,  then  there  is  this  diffi- 
culty. Would  not  these  ten  millions  require  also 
the  services  of  five  millions  of  British  soldiers? 
But,  where  are  these  five  millions  to  be  got?  And 
so  England  cannot  utilize  the  forces  that  it  is 
capable  of  raising  in  India. 

Thus,  what  we  see  is  suspicion  everywhere, 
and  that  this  suspicion  is  eating  into  the  vitality 
of  the  nation.  It  is  emasculating  the  Indians, — it 
is  undermining  the  real  basis  of  this  gigantic 
Empire. 

And,  do  they  not  watch  with  a  jealous  eye  the 
sale  of  sulphur?  And,  why?  It  is  because  sulphur 
forms  a  component  part  of  gun-powder  !  How  is 
it  that  even  their  own  Indian  soldier  is  not  trusted 
with  artillery  ?  Are  not  these  ridiculous  precau- 
tions due  to  an  unconquerable  suspicion  owing 
to  an  unalterable  conviction  that,  Indians  do  not 
now  enjoy  as  good  a  rule  as  they  deserve  ? 

We  then  come  to  the  larger  question  of  the 
importation  of  seventy-five  thousand  British  «. 
soldiers.  We  implore  every  Englishman  to  think 
over  the  actual  condition  of  these  brave  English 
soldiers,  kept  confined  in  barracks.  John  Brown 
relates  in  the  Asian   a  story  that  he  had    heard 

195' 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

from  an  Indian  coachman.  This  is  what  the  coach- 
man, an  Indian,  told  him  : — 

"  The  most  curious  incident  during-  my  service 
occurred  when  I  was  on  the  Umballa-Kalka  Road. 
It  was  in  the  hot  weather  and  in  broad  day-light, 
when  I  took  up  a  passenger  at  the  Umballa 
Station  ;  he  threw  away  an  empty  bottle.  Presently 
he  produced  another  from  his  portmanteau,  and 
finished  half  of  it  at  a  draught.  A  few  miles 
further,  he  emptied  it  and  commenced  a  third 
bottle.  He  then  attacked  the  syce  with  his  sword 
and  the  man  jumped  off  the  tonga,  a:.d  bolted.  I 
felt  inclined  to  run  away  myself.  At  the  next 
stage,  which  was  half  way  to  Kalka,  he  left  the 
tonga  and  went  shrieking  into  the  jungle.  As  he 
did  not  return  for  a  long  time,  we  went  to  look 
for  him  and  found  him  gasping  for  breath  under  a 
tree.  We  gave  him  water ;  but,  he  died  before 
we  could  reach  the  tonga.  I  then  drove  the 
corpse  back  to  Umballa  to  the  Police  Station  ;  and 
the  Judge  Sahib,  who  held  the  enquiry,  was  very 
severe  with  me.  God  knows  why ;  for,  1  had 
done  my  duty  according  to  my  lights. 

"What  was  he  drinking?'' — asked  the  Judge 
of  me. 

"Khodavvand,"  I  said,  "lam  a  Brahmin,  and 
don't  drink  spirits,  I  don't  know." 

"Was  it  sweet?" 

"Was  it  bitter?" 

196 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

"I  am  a  Brahmin,  and  don't  know." 

"Was  it  sour  ?" 

"I  am  a  Brahmin,  and  don't  know.'' 

"Then  he  said  I  was  a  fool ;  and  when  asked 
why  didn't  I  take  away  the  bottles,  I  said  I  was  a 
coachman,  small  of  stature,  and  the  Sahib  was  a 
big  man  with  a  drawn  sword.  Then  they  said 
iau.  and  I  went.  Your  Honour  will  see  that  we 
are  already  at  Kalka,  and  in  good  time  for 
the  train.  When  your  Honour  comes  again, 
if  you  will  ask  for  Sarda  Ram,  it  will  give  me 
great  pleasure  to  drive  you  ;  there  is  no  one  I 
would  rather  drive  than  your  Honour,  not  even 
Lat  Brassfoot  himself  whom  your  Honour  much 
resembles.     Khudda  huzur  ho  Lat  Karel" 

And  said  the  coachman  :  "  How  can  I  tell 
what  he  was  drinking?  lam  a  Brahmin."  What 
a  commentary  this  upon  the  superior  enlighten- 
ment of  the  Christians  !  But,  it  is  not  the  fault  of 
the  officer  that  he  died  of  drinking.  In  India, 
British  soldiers, — even  officers, — have  to  drink,  in 
order  to  make  their  existence  bearable. 

Let  us  view  this  question  from  another  stand- 
point. There  are  42,000  soldiers  in  Bengal,  who 
are  unmarried  and  only  1,300  who  are  married. 
There  are  14,000  in  Madras  and  12,000  in  Bombay 
who  are  unmarried,  and  650  in  Madras,  and  360 
in  Bombay  who  are  married.  The  percentage 
of  married    to  the    actual  strength  in   the    three 

197 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

Presidencies  of  Bengal,  Madras  and  Bombay,  is 
thus  a  little  more  or  less  than  3.  4  and  2  respec- 
tively. So,  here  we  have  a  total  of  68,000  un- 
married British  soldiers  in  India.  It  is  a  pity 
that  the  significance  of  this  fact  is  ignored, 
nay,  sought  to  be  concealed.  And,  does  not 
this  perpetual  political  disability  of  Indians 
need  the  practical  banishment  of  seventy-five 
thousand  of  Englishmen  to  a  foreign  country  in  an 
uncongenial  climate?  We  see  here  seventy-five 
thousand  Englishmen,  who  are  young  and  un- 
married, kept  confined  in  barracks  in  the  deadly 
climate  of  India.  The  best  course  for  Englishmen, 
who  are  so  great  patriots  and  who  possess  such 
strong  humanitarian  principles,  is  to  send  these 
men  home  at  once. 

It  may,  however,  be  urged  that  if  these 
seventy-five  thousand  Englishmen  were  sent 
home,  there  would  be  none  to  guard  the  Empire. 
Why,  Indians  will  do  it !  Why  will  Indians  not 
do  it  when,  by  the  admission  of  the  rulers 
of  the  Empire  themselves,  the  people  of  this 
country  have  now  got  such  a  good  rule  as 
they  never  enjoyed  before?  If  Indians,  under 
such  circumstances,  rise  against  British  autho- 
rity,— if  Hindus  and  Mussalmans  can  forget 
their  mutual  differences,  which  is  an  impossible 
supposition ;  if  they  can  find  a  centre  to  rally 
round,  which  is  another   impossible   supposition, 

198 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

why  should  not  they  govern  the  country  them- 
selves ?  The  only  justification  for  the  occupation  of 
the  country  by  the  English  is  that  the  natives  of 
the  country  win  cut  one  another's  throats,  if  left 
to  themselves.  But  if  the  Indians  can  organize 
themselves  into  a  power  capable  of  governing 
themselves,  surely  England  would  have  no  excuse 
to  remain  in  the  country  at  all.  But  let  not  the 
big-Englander  have  any  fear  on  this  score;  there  is 
no  chance  whatever  for  Indians  for  an  existence 
separate  from  the  English. 

We  have  now  to  give  some  account  of  the 
people  of  the  country,  for  whom  the  rulers  of  the 
land  would  vote  eternal  disability.  Now,  Indians 
are  not  barbarians,  nor  are  they  worse  than  the 
Chinese,  Japanese,  Egyptians,  or  Persians.  It  is 
altogether  an  absurd  contention  that  Indians  are 
not  competent  even  to  be  entrusted  with  a  small 
share  in  the  management  of  their  own  affairs.  The 
Daily  News  of  London  says  : 

"  After  His  Highness  Ranjitsinhji,  no  triumph 
of  oriental  genius  in  a  novel  field  can  be  really 
surprising.  If  a  Rajpoot  is  our  master  at  cricket, 
a  Baboo  may  beat  us  in  the  less  difficult  art  of 
Romance.  And  this  is  exactly  what  has  occurred. 
According  to  Miss  Miriam  Singleton  Knight,  who 
expresses  herself  in  The  Indian  Magazine  and 
Review,  the  once-admired  author  of  the 
Waverley    Novels  must  strike  his   flag  to  '  Babu 

199 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 
Bankim     Chandra     Chatterjee,    now,    alas!     no 


more. " 


Who  knew  before  that  a  Hindu  would  excite 
the  admiration  of  the  English  people  for  his 
triumph  in  cricket,— the  national  game  of  the 
English?  Luckily,  Ranjitsinhji  had  a  chance.  It 
is  manifestly  unjust  to  vote  incompetence  without 
giving  a  fair  trial. 

For  thousands  of  years  Hindus  had  managed 
their  own  affairs  and  ruled  their  own  Empires. 
Alexander  found  that  Hindus  could  fight,  and  he 
had  to  give  up  his  attempt  to  penetrate  into  the 
country.  The  Hindu  power  was  brokeu  by  the 
Mussalman  hordes  from  the  West.  For  this  they 
have  no  need  to  be  ashamed.  If  the  Hindus  failed 
to  resist  the  advance  of  the  Mussalman  inroad, 
so  did  the  Christians  also  in  Europe.  It  is  true  that 
Christians  regained  what  they  had  lost  ;  but,  so 
also  did  the  Hindus.  When  the  English  came  into 
this  country,  the  Hindus  were  supreme.  They 
succeeded  in  regaining  what  they  had  lost  ;  and 
just  when  they  were  founding  their  Empire  on  a 
permanent  basis  they  were  disturbed  in  their 
arrangements  by  the  appearance  of  Europeans  in 
the  field.  The  English  had  to  fight  for  the  Empire 
of  India  with  the  Hindus  and  not  with  the  Mussal- 
mans. 

"Pahari"  thus  wrote  in  the  columns  of  the 
London  Spectator  in   1893  : 

200 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

Nominally,  we  took  over  the  Empire  of  Hindoostan  from 
the  Mahomedaus  ;  but  as  a  fact,  our  most  important  and  hard- 
won  conquests  were  from  Hindus,  such  as  the  Mahrattas, 
Goorkhas,  Rajpoots,  and  Sikhs.  The  Mahomedan  empire  was 
effete  and  a  mere  name  when  we  began  to  advance  far  inland, 
and  all  over  India  the  Hindus  had  got  the  upper  hand.  If  we 
had  not  stepped  in,  it  is  very  doubtful  whether  the  Mahometans 
would  have  ever  regained  power  ;  they  would  certainly  not 
have  done  so  without  the  aid  of  a  large  Mahomedan  invasion 
from  beyond  the  Indus,  and  the  chance  which  such  an  invasion 
would  have  had  of  success,  would  have  been  small.  The  old 
invasions  stzcceeded  because  undisciplined  hordes  fought  against 
undisciplined  hordes  of  poorer  material  •,  but  the  Mahrattas 
and  Sikhs  had  learnt  to  some  extent,  how  to  drill  and 
manceuver  troops  according  to  the  European  military  system: 
The  Sikhs  conquered  and  held  all  the  Afghan  country  outside 
the  mountains. 

It  is  not,  therefore,  quite  correct  to  say  that 
but  for  the  English  the  Mussalmans  would  have 
cut  the  Hindus  to  pieces! 

The  English  came  when  Hindus  had  not  been 
able  to  recover  completely  from  the  shock  of  the 
destructive  Mussalman  occupation.  This  second 
shock  broke  them  down  completely.  To  ascer- 
tain what  Hindus  were  like  in  the  early  days, 
we  have  to  see  whether  there  is  yet  any  State 
in  India  which  had  not  been  bled  and  weakened 
by  the  Mussalman  onslaught.  The  only  State 
which  escaped  this  destructive  flood  of  Mussal- 
man occupation,  was  Nepal.  So  when  the 
English  went  to  fight  with  the  Nepalese,  they 
found  what  the   Hindus   were   like  in  early  days, 

201 


PICTURES   OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

not  demoralized  by  defeat  and  disaster.  We  shall 
here  describe  that  first  brush  of  the  English  with 
a  handful  of  Nepalese,  some  three  hundred  in 
number,  badly  armed,  badly  protected,  and 
weighted  with  the  disadvantage  of  the  presence  of 
women  and  children. 

War  was  declared  against  Nepal  on  the  ist 
November,  1814.  A  little  before  this  declaration,  it 
was  resolved  to  make  a  grand  military  demonstra- 
tion for  the  purpose  of  over-awing  the  enemy.  For 
this,  four  separate  regiments  had  been  ordered  to 
march  simultaneously  from  four  different  military 
stations.  Major-General  Gillespi  commanded  one 
of  them. 

On  the  24th  October,  Gillespie's  regiment 
reached  Dehra  Dun.  Gillespie  was  not  with  his 
force.  Colonel  Mouli  had  the  command. 

About  three  miles  and  a  half  from  Dehra  Dun 
was  the  little  fortress  of  Kulunga,  situated  in  a 
nook  of  the  hills  of  Nalapani.  It  was  something 
like  a  stone-henge, — a  small  table-land  surroun- 
ded by  large  blocks  of  stone  which  acted  as  the 
fort- wall, — which  again  was  protected  by  a  thick 
range  of  sal  trees. 

Finding  the  British  force  at  his  doors,  Bala- 
bhadra  Singh,  nephew  of  Amar  Singh,  the  Chief 
of  Nahan,  had  taken  refuge  in  this  fortress  of 
Nature  with  a  few  chosen  followers,  not  exceeding 
three  hundred.     This   was  unbearable  to  Colonel 

202 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

Mouli, — the  hill-fortress  being  within  four  miles  of 
the  great  military  station  of  Dehra  Dun.  Colonel 
Mouli  had  reached  Dehra  Dun  on  the  24th.  On 
that  very  night,  he  had  written  to  Balabhadra  to. 
surrender,  and  had  received  a  proud  reply  of 
meeting  him  on  the  battle-field.  Next  morning, 
the  active  British  General  was  marching  up  hill. 
He  reached  the  base  of  the  Nalapani  Hills,  and 
fixed  his  battery  there  ;  but,  wrhen  he  saw  that, 
with  all  his  efforts,  he  could  make  no  impression 
upon  the  enemy,  he  sent  news  to  Gillespie  at 
Saharanpur,  and  the  Major-General  made  his 
appearance^  on  the  scene  the  next  day,  the  26th 
October.  In  two  or  three  days  he  completed  his 
preparations  for  the  siege.  Four  detachments, 
under  Colonel  Carpenter,  Captain  Faust,  Major 
Kelly  and  Captain  Campbell,  surrounded  the 
place  from  four  sides ;  and  a  regiment  under 
Major  Ludlow  was  kept  in  reserve. 

The  siege  began.  The  discharge  from  the 
British  battery  was  returned  by  volleys  of  musketry, 
which  wrought  immense  havoc  amongst  British 
forces.  Though  the  British  cannons  did  much 
harm  amongst  the  brave  three  hundred,  they 
showed  no  sign  whatever  of  giving  way.  The 
determined  manner  in  which  the  post  was  defended 
by  a  small  number  of  men  against  tremendous 
odds,  guided  by  the  best  Generals  of  the  age,  crea- 
ted a  mingled  feeling  of  surprise  and    indignation 

203 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

in  the  minds  of  the  besiegers.  The  leaders  of  the 
siege  forgot  themselves  ;  and,  in  attempting  to 
scale  the  walls,  Lieutenant  Ellis  and  Major-General 
Gillespie  lost  their  lives  ! 

The  command  then  devolved  on  Colonel 
Mouli  as  the  senior  officer.  He  found  that  it  would 
be  rashness  to  proceed  further  in  the  siege,  and 
that  his  prudent  course  would  be  to  make  a  hasty 
retreat.  This  he  did,  and  asked  for  reinforce- 
ments and  a  battering  train  from  Delhi.  It  took  a 
month's  time  for  the  train  to  arrive;  but,  there  was 
no  help  for  it.  The  expected  re-inforcements  and 
battering  train  reaching  him  on  the  24th  Novem- 
ber, a  second  attack  was  made  the  next  day,  and 
it  was  repulsed  for  a  second  time. 

Meantime,  the  water-supply  of  the  besieged 
had  fallen  short.  The  only  supply  was  from  the 
water-falls  outside  the  fortress  near  the  British 
encampment  at  Nalapani,  and  this  had  virtually 
been  cut  off.  In  the  midst  of  the  shots  which 
were  rapidly  decimating  their  numbers,  the 
groans  of  the  wounded,  the  cries  of  the  women  and 
children  for  water,  the  besieged  had  to  defend  their 
apology  of  a  fort  in  which  breeches  had  been 
made  on  all  sides,  from  an  overwhelming  force, 
thirsting  for  their  blood.  They,  however,  did  not 
•mind  the  shots  of  the  besiegers  as  the  burning 
thirst  which  overcame  them  and  all  their  depen- 
dants.    From  three  hundred  the  number  had  been 

204 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

reduced  to  seventy.  They  might  have  then 
surrendered  ;  and,  their  generous  enemy,  filled 
with  admiration  at  their  noble  conduct,  would 
have  warmly  accepted  it.  But  the  besieged 
heroes  disdained  to  yield,  and  admit  de- 
feat! 

On  the  last  day  of  the  month,  when  the 
batteries  of  the  British  troops  were  hurrying  on 
their  work,  and  volleys  after  volleys  from  the 
Gurkha  musketry  responded  to  them,  there  was  a 
pause  of  a  few  minutes  in  the  ranks  of  the  besieged. 
Suddenly,  the  iron  gates  were  flung  open,  and 
out  came  the  immortal  seventy  "  with  drawn 
swords  in  their  hands,  guns  on  their  arms,  the 
kukri  or  hhojali  hanging  from  their  belts,  and 
the  chakra  or  wheel  resplendent  on  their  head- 
dress, led  by  their  chief,  Balabhadra, — bravej  erect, 
cheerful,  and  in  his  measured  military  gait:"  and, 
before  the  astounded  British  force  had  time  to 
reflect,  they  had  cut  right  through  the  line,  drank 
to  their  hearts'  content  from  the  springs  of  Nala- 
pani,  and  in  no  time  disappeared  without  anyone 
of  them  being  hurt ! 

The  English  razed  Kulunga  to  the  ground. 
The  English  historian  01  Dehra  Dun,  R.  C. 
Williams,  B.  A.,  C.  S.,  thus  remarks  on  the  in- 
cident: "Such  was  the  conclusion  of  the  defence 
of  Kulunga, — a  feat  of  arms  worthy  of  the  best  of 
chivalry,  conducted  with  a  heroism  almost  suffici- 

205 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

entto  palliate  the  disgrace  of  our  own  reverses." 
And  in  the  silent  forests  at  Dehra  Dun,  on  the 
banks  of  the  river  Riechpana,  stands  a  small 
monument,  "as  a  tribute  of  respect  for  our  gallant 
Adversary  Balabhadra  Singh." 

The  heroism  of  Balabhadra  could  safely  be 
likened  to  that  of  the  English  in  Crimea.  And,  is 
it  generous  and  worthy  of  the  leading  nation  of  the 
world  to  reserve  for  this  unfortunate  race  perpetual 
disability  ? 

Dr.  Hunter,  in  his  "Rural  Bengal,"  says  that 
"  the  conception  of  the  Vedas  regarding  the 
immortality  of  the  soul,  is  beautiful  and  sublime." 
The  Vedas  were  written  many  thousands  of  years 
ago  when  the  races,  who  would  put  down  Hindus 
for  hewers  of  wood  and  drawers  of  water,  had  no 
existence  whatever.  There  are  many  eminent 
philosophers  in  Europe  who  are  of  opinion  that 
the  author  of  the  Geeta  is  the  greatest  philosopher 
that  the  world  has  ever  seen.  The  six  schools  of 
philosophy,  developed  in  India,  are  so  subtle  and 
so  deep  that  they  are,  according  to  Professor 
Cowell,  calculated  to  make  "the  European  head 
dizzy."  There  is  no  doubt  of  it  that  Hindus  gave 
religion  to  the  vast  majority  of  mankind.  It  is 
known  to  all  that  they  civilised  China  and  Japan, 
the  latter  of  which  is  now  considered  equal  to  any 
great  Power  in  Europe  in  all  those  resources 
which  make  a  nation  great. 

206 


THE   PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF   INDIA 

Let  us  see  how  our  forefathers  left  us,  and 
how  we  have  changed  by  contact  with  the  Western 
people.  This  is  what  that  eminent  philosopher, 
Professor  Max  Muller,  says  in  his  "Psychological 
Religion  "  : — 

So  far  as  we  can  judge,  a  large  class  of  people  in  India,  not 
only  the  priestly  class  but  the  nobility  also,  not  only  men  bnt 
women  also,  never  looked  upon  their  life  on  earth  as  something 
real.  What  was  real  to  them,  was  the  invisible, ---the  life  to 
come.  What  formed  the  theme  of  their  conversations,  what 
formed  the  subject  of  their  meditations,  was  the  real,  that  alone 
lent  some  kiud  of  reality  to  this  unreal  phenomenal  world. 
Whoever  was  supposed  to  have  caught  a  new  ray  of  truth,  was 
visited  by  young  and  old,  was  honoured  by  princes  and  peasants, 
nay,  was  looked  upon  as  holding  a  position  much  above  that  of 
kings  and  princes. 

In  the  above,  Professor  Max  Muller  describes 
the  Hindus.  Let  us  see  how  he  describes  the  rest 
of  the  world  : — 

Our  idea  of  life  on  earth  has  always  been  that  of  struggle 
for  existence,  a  struggle  for  power  and  dominion,  for  wealth 
and  enjoyment.  These  are  the  ideas  which  dominate  the  history 
of  all  nations  whose  history  is  known  to  us.  Our  own  sympa- 
thies also  are  almost  entirely  on  that    side. 

Below  the  philosopher  compares  the  Hindus 
with  the  rest  of  the  world  : — 

Was  it  so  very  unnatural  for  the  Hindus,  endowed  as  they 
were  with  a  transcedental  intellect,  to  look  upon  this  life  not 
as  an  arena  for  gladiatorial  strife  and  combat,  or  as  a  market 
for  cheating  and  huckstering,  but  as  a  resting-place,  a  mere 
waiting  room  at  a  station  or  a  journey  leading  them  from  the 
known  to  the  unknown,  but  exciting,  for  that  very  reason 
their  utmost  curiosity  as  to  whence  they  come  and  whither 
they  were  going  ? 

207 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

It  was,  we  believe,  Sir  Charles  Elliott  who 
was  pleased  to  confess  that,  "he  could  understand 
the  Mussalmans  but  he  could  not  understand  the 
Hindus.''  In  the  same  manner,  the  Hindus  cannot  - 
understand  their  fellows  in  other  parts  of  the  world. 
The  reason  is  that  the  instincts  of  the  Hindus  are 
quite  different  from  those   of  other   nations. 

The  Hindus,  however,  suffered  for  being  better 
than  their  neighbours.  We  quote  the  same  philo- 
sopher : — 

I  confess   it  has  always  seemed  to  me    one  of    the  saddest 
chapters  in  the  history  of   the  world  to  see  the  early  inhabit- 
ants   of     India,    who     knew  nothing   of  the  rest  of  the  world, 
of  the  mighty     Empires    of    Egypt   and  Babylon,   and     of  their 
wars  and  conquests, — who    wanted    nothing  from  the    outside 
world  and  were   happy    and  content  in  their    own  earthly  para- 
dise,— to  see  these  happy  people    suddenly    overrun  by  foreign 
warriors,  whether  Persians,     Greeks     or  Macedonians,  or,     at  a 
later  time,  Scythians,  Mahomedans,  Mongolians  and  Christians, 
and  conquered  for  no    fault    of  theirs,    except     that  they  had 
neglected  to  cultivate  the  art  of  killing  their  neighbours. 

Why  did  the  Hindus  suffer  when  they  harmed 
none?   Says  Professor  Max  Muller  : — 

They  themselves  never  wished  for  conquests, — they  simply 
•wished  to  be  left  alone  and  to  be  allowed  to  work  out  their 
view  of  life  which  was  contemplative  and  joyful,  thougli 
deficient  in  one  point,  namely,  the  art  of  self-defence  and 
destruction. 

From  the  above  it  will  be  made  plain  why 
Porus  was  surprised  when  Alexander  asked 
him  how   he    should   be  treated.     Porus   had  no 

208 


THE  PERPETUAL  SLAVERY  OF  INDIA 

idea  that  kings  fought  for  material  greed  like 
common  robbers.  The  Hindus  learnt  from  sad 
experience  that  it  would  not  do  to  grow  philosop- 
hers alone,  and  that  they  must  nourish  brute 
force  for  the  purpose  of  their  very  existence.  How 
they  succeeded  in  this  attempt,  will  appear  from 
the  letter  of  an  Englishman  who  called  him- 
self "a  Pahari,"  which  appeared  in  the  London 
Spectator,  and  which  is  quoted  in  page  201. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  when  the  present  rulers 
appeared  on  the  scene,  the  Hindus  were  the 
paramount  power  in  India.  So,  if  the  Hindu 
could  speculate,  they  also  subsequently  learnt  to 
fight. 

Now  we  must  say  that  the  Hindus  were  quite 
right  in  their  contention  that,  to  quote  Professor 
Max  Muller,  "this  life  is  not  an  arena  for  gladia- 
torial strife  and  combat,  or  a  market  for  cheating 
and  huckstering,  but  a  resting-place,  a  mere  wait- 
ing room  at  a  station.on  a  journey"  to  the  perman- 
ent home. 

When  the  vote  for  Simultaneous  Examina- 
tions in  England  and  India  was  rescinded,  it 
was  done  under  the  openly-declared  apprehension 
that,  if  Hindus  and  Englishmen  were  given  equal 
chance,  the  former  would  defeat  the  latter  all 
along  the  line. 

Would   it   not  be  a  great   pity  to  put  such  a 
nation  under  everlasting  disability?  WhatEnglish- 

209 

S— 14 


PICTURES   OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

man  can  contemplate,  without  a  shudder,  the  idea 
of  reducing  hundreds  of  millions  of  human  beings, 
fullv  his  peers  in  nobler  qualities  of  man,  to  eternal 
political  slavery  ?  The  act  would  be  a  stupendous 
wrong  and  a  piece  of  unparalleled  immorality. 
An  act  like  that  would  never  be  pleasing  to  the 
Father  of  all  nations,  whose  active  interference 
in  the  affairs  of  nations  is  proved  by  the  punish- 
ment which  inevitably  follows,  sooner  or  later, 
everv  act  of  national  immorality. 


MILITARY  EXAMINATION 

[The  Civilian  officials  are  said  to  belong  to  species 
sub-janta.  Which  means  that  they  are  conceitedy 
and  they  believe  that  they  are  not  only  competent 
to  perform  any  act,  from  casting  accounts  to  casting 
cannons,  but  they  can  do  it  better  than  even  those 
who  are  trained  in  the  particular  business.  Sir 
Ashley  Eden,  a  Civilian,  began  life  as  an  Assistant 
in  Bengal  but  for  some  time  he  was  put  in  charge  of 
the  salt  operations  in  Orissa.  Latterly  he  was  raised 
to  the  position  of  the  hieutenant-G- over  nor  of  the 
province.  And  when  an  army  commission  was  appoin- 
ted, Sir  A.  Eden  was  selected  as  its  President  and 
Captain  Collen  as  its  Secretary.  It  ivas  to  ridicule 
this  arrangement  that  the  following  skit  teas  written 
at  the  time,  that  is,  in  the  year  1879.^ 

Sir  Ashley  Eden  had  studied  all  night  and 
was  yet  poring  over  a  big  folio,  when  he  was 
interrupted  by  Captain  Collen  who  arrived  un- 
announced. The  Captain  had  interviewed  His 
Honor  the  day  before.  It  is  now  universally 
known  that  an  army  Commission  has  been  appoin- 
ted to  inquire  into  the  military  charges  of  the 
Empire  and  to  suggest  means  for  the  curtailment 
of  expenditure.  Sir  Ashley  Eden  has  been  ap- 
pointed President,  and  Captain  Collen,  Secretary 

211 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

to  the  Commission.  The  Captain  has  come  down 
from  Simla  to  arrange  matters  with  His  Honor, 
the  President. 

"Collen,  I  am  glad  you  have  come,''  says  His 
Honor.  "You  know  very  well,  as  I  told  you  yester- 
day, that  I  am  not  familiar  with  your  military 
matters."  Collen  silent.  His  Honor  continues : 
"I  have  sent  for  you  to  teach  me.  I  know  my 
duties  won't  require  much  technical  knowledge  of 
the  military  science,  but  yet  1  must  not  appear 
before  my  colleagues  as  an  ignorant  man,  do  you 
see.  1  have  also  no  mind  to  be  bullied  by  the 
witnesses  I  may  have  to  examine."  Collen  is  still 
silent.  His  Honor  continues  :  "I  have  already 
learnt  much,  and,  I  think,  I  am  now  quite  com- 
petent to  undertake  my  duties.  But  1  must  first 
pass  an  examination  before  a  military  man  clever 
like  yourself." 

Secretary. — Shall  I  commence  just  now? 

President. — No,  not  yet — give  me  another 
night.  Let  me  refresh  my  memory.  Come  early 
to-morrow,  and  you  shall  find  me  ready  to  receive 
you. 

Secretary. — Shall  I  come  with  a  written  set 
of  questions? 

President. — No,  no,  don't  do  that.  Let  the 
examination  be  viva  voce.  You  need  not  go  deep 
into  the  matter.  Ask  me  die  meanings  of  terms, 
etc.,  etc.,  and  that  will  do  for  my  purpose. 

212 


MILITARY  EXAMINATION 

Collen  withdrew  with  a  bow,  and  Sir  Ashey 
Eden  opened  Dumbleton's  military  spelling-  book- 
The  subject-matter  of  the  book  was  extremely  dry, 
and  His  Honor  found  it  a  hard  task  to  go  through 
it.  But  Sir  Ashley  Eden  was  a  man  of  resolution, 
and  he  summoned  all  his  patience  to  aid  him  in 
his  task.  Time  flew  rapidly.  The  clock  struck 
midnight,  and  he  fancied  that  Dumbleton  himself 
was  standing  before  him  with  a  cane  in  his  hand. 
But  suddenly  his  fancy  took  another  turn.  He 
fancied  that  he  was  surrounded  by  military 
officers,  with  colossal  figures  and  angry  faces, 
demanding  his  passport.  At  another  time  he 
fancied  that  a  witness  was  laughing  at  his 
ignorance.  In  short,  the  matter  was  that, 
though  His  Honor  fancied  he  was  awake  all 
along,  he  was  in  fact  sleeping,  though  not 
profoundly,  and  dreaming  upon  a  subject  nearest 
to   his   heart. 

Just  as  the  clock  struck  six,  His  Honor  awoke 
with  a  start.  He  found  Dumbleton  lying  before 
him  open  at  page  3.  He  was  rubbing  his  eyes  to 
collect  his  scattered  senses,  when  Collen  suddenly 
appeared  before  him.  There  was  confusion  and 
anxiety  visible  in  the  face  of  His  Honor,  though  he 
tried  to  conceal  them.  Collen  himself  was  silent. 
"Go  on,  Collen,  I  am  ready,"  said  His  Honor 
rather  nervously.  Collen,  who  said  nothing,  imme- 
diately put  the  1st  question. 

21? 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

Question. — What  is  the  number  of  officers  in  a 
regiment? 

President. — This  question  shews,  Collen,  that 
you  have  come  deliberately  with  the  intention  of 
confusing  me.  What  have  I  to  do  with  the  num- 
ber of  officers?     Ask  me  the  meanings  of  terms. 

Q. — State  the  relative  ranks  and  duties  of  the 
officers. 

A. — As  for  the  duties  of  officers  I  have  nothing 
to  do  with  them.  As  for  the  relative  ranks,  first 
comes  the  Commander-in-Chief  who  stands  in  the 
position  of  Governor-General,  at  the  head  of  all. 
The  second  in  rank  is  the  Lieutenant-General, 
who  like  myself,  is  the  Lieutenant-Governor 
of  the  army.  The  third  is  the  Colonel.  The 
fourth  is  the  Captain  who  sails  ships  like 
yourself. 

The  fact  is,  whenever  Sir  Ashley  Eden  came 
to  India  in  ships,  he  found  them  managed  by  an 
officer,  who  was  called  Captain.  He,  therefore, 
fancied  that  as  Collen  was  a  Captain,  he  was 
necessarily  in  charge  of  a  ship. 

Q. — What  position  does  a  Major  hold  ? 

A. — You  mean  Surgeon  Major?  He  ampu- 
tates arms,  and  extracts  bullets. 

Q. — What  is  a  regiment  ? 

A. — Regimen  is  a  grammatical  term.  It  also 
means  the  systematic  use  of  food  and  drugs. 

Q. — What  is  an  adjutant  ? 

214 


MILITARY  EXAMINATION 

A. — The  gigantic  crane.  We  have  plenty  of 
them  in  Calcutta. 

Q. — What  do  you  understand  by  a  company? 

A. — When  friends  assemble  together  I  call  it 
a  company,  let  others  say  whatever  they  like; 
and  when  there  is  good  liquor  I  call  it  boon 
company. 

Q. — What  do  you  understand  by  staff   corps  ? 

A. — Staff  means  a  stick,  and  corps  who  carry 
sticks  on  their  shoulders. 

Q. — What  is  a  battalion  ? 

A. — A  male  mare. 

Collen  is  a  silent  man,  and  very  respectful. 
Hitherto  he  had  heard  his  master's  answers  without 
any  comment  or  even  the  movement  of  muscle. 
But  when  his  master  described  a  battalion  to  be 
only  a  male  mare  he  could  contain  himself  no 
longer.  He  said  meekly : — "Hitherto  I  have  at 
least  understood  what  Your  Honor  said,  but  I  do 
not  understand  what  Your  Honor  means  by  a  male 
mare,  a  mare  being  always  female." 

President. — Quite  true.  I  mean  a  male  horse, 
though  the  adjective  male  is  unnecessary,  a  horse 
being  always  male.  But  stop,  what  is  the  term  ? 

Secretary. — Battalion. 

President. — Battalion?  Well  I  was  confound- 
ing it  with  the  term  "Stallion!"  Well,  I  shall  re- 
member the  word  and  see  if  Dumbleton  helps  me. 

Q. — What  is  a  brigade  ? 

215 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

A. — You  mean  a  brigand,  he  is  a  robber  like 
Arabi  Pasha. 

Q. — May  I  ask  Your  Honor's  idea  of  a   mess? 
A. — A   mess  is  a  confusion  or  an   embarrass- 
ment. 

Q. — Of  course,  Your  Honor  knows  the  differ- 
ence between  a  sharpnell  and  a  shell,  a  muzzle- 
loader  and  a  breech-loader. 

A. — Wait,  let  me  see.  A  shell,  of  course,  I 
know.  I  have  seen  plenty  on  the  sea-shore.  What 
a  sharpnell  is  I  don't  think  I  can  make  out.  I  shall 
consult  Dumbleton.  A  breach-loader  and  muzzle- 
loader  must  be  contradictory  terms.  For  while 
the  Bengalees  talked  of  breach  of  faith,  we  muzzled 
their  press. 

Q. — What  are  the  sappers  and  miners? 

A. — What  suppers  are  I  shall  show  you  this 
evening  if  you  come  hungry.  As  for  minors,  well, 
I  can't  make  out  what  connection  there  is  between 
suppers  and  young  men  who  have  yet  to  attain 
majority. 

Q. — What  does  Your  Honor  understand  by  a 
cadet  ? 

A. — A  younger  brother,  of  a    younger  son. 

Q—  Brevet? 

A. — I  fancy  it  is  a  musical  term  used  in  mar- 
tial music. 

Q. — Who  are  the  Field-Officers  ? 

A. — I  think  this   is   a  question  which   has  no 

216 


MILITARY  EXAMINATION 

bearing-  upon  the  subject.  A  magistrate  is  a  field 
officer  when  he  is  on  tour,  so  is  the  Divisional 
Commissioner,  and  so  is  myself.  And  so  are  also 
other  heads  of  departments  who  have  to  do  the 
duty  of  inspection  in  the  Muffasil.  But  a  Field- 
Officer  properly  so-called,  is  a  Surveyor  or  a 
District  Engineer. 

President. — Have  you  any  more  questions  to 
ask? 

Secretary. — No,  I  have  done. 

President. — But,  Collen,  you  did  not  make 
any  remarks  upon  my  answers.  I  think  I  shall 
do.    What  do  you  say  ? 

But  Collen  was  silent. 


ASIA,  THE  CHOSEN  PLACE 
OF  GOD. 

ONE  grand  idea  occupies  the  minds  of 
Western  nations,  namely,  how  to  kill  the  largest 
number  of  men  in  the  safest  manner,  and  in  the 
shortest  time.  Spencer,  the  great  English  aeronaut, 
has,  it  is  said,  beaten  his  Mexican  rival,  Santos 
Dumont,  and  given  evidence  of  his  perfect  control 
over  his  air-machine.  When  interviewed,  he  said 
that  "while  I  was  proceeding  in  my  balloon,  I 
was  throwing  balls  ;  and  I  was  convinced 
that  I  could  thus  throw  bombs  in  a  city  and 
destroy  it."  So  his  success  led  him  not  to  think 
of  the  goodness  of  God,  who  has  given  so  many 
valuable  privileges  to  man,  but  to  the  central  idea 
round  which  the  Western  minds  rotate.  Ordinary 
men  in  Eastern  countries  think  that  aerial  naviga- 
tion, when  it  becomes  an  accomplished  fact,  would 
mean  the  progress  of  humanity.  In  the  west  they 
are,  however,  perfecting  the  air-machine  for  the 
purpose  of  destroying  cities  by  throwing  bombs 
into  them  from  a  safe  distance  ! 

"Where  would  you  like  to  go,"  asks  the  pious 
priest  of  a  thoroughly  worldly-minded  and  hard- 
hearted layman,  whom  he  was  trying  to  lead  to 
God, — "to  heaven  or  to  hell  ?'' 

218 


ASIA,   THE  CHOSEN   PLACE  OF  GOD 

Layman  :  I  can't  answer  your  question  until 
you  answer  mine  :  Where  did  our  late  king  go, — 
heaven  or  hell? 

Priest :  Certainly  to  hell,  for  he  was  a  tyrant. 

Layman  :  Where  did  the  late  A.  B.,  (a  very 
rich  and  powerful  nobleman,)  go? 

Priest :  He  was  a  bad  man,  certainly  he  also 
went  to  hell. 

Layman  :  Where  have  Alexander,  Napoleon 
and  other  heroes,  who  deluged  the  earth  with 
human  gore,  gone  ? 

Priest :  I  am  sorry  to  say  that  they  must  have 
gone  to  hell,  for  God  commands  men  never  to  kill, 
and  this  command  is  unconditional. 

Layman  :  And  where  did  that  great  Spanish 
patriot  go,  who,  by  his  bold  feat,  wrested  Cuba 
from  its  native  chief?  He  was  received  as  a  friend 
by  the  chief  to  whom  he  had  gone  to  pay  a  visit 
on  horseback.  He  presented  a  pair  of  bracelets 
which  he  kindly  put  on  the  wrists  of  his  host,  the 
chief.  They  were  not,  however,  bracelets  but 
hand-cuffs.  He  then  forced  the  chief  to  mount  a 
horse  and  thus  carried  him  a  prisoner ;  and  in  this 
manner  Cuba  was  won.  Did  he  not  go  to  Heaven 
for  this  eminent  service  to  his  country,  for  he  won 
an  empire  for  his  people  by  this  bold  act  ? 

Priest :  No,  he  must  have  gone  to  hell. 

Layman  :  (Pondering)  It  seems  that  hell,  like 
America,  is  the  most  flourishing  place  in  God's 

219 


PICTURES    OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

creation.  Since  every  one  has  gone  there,  surely 
I  too  should  like  to  go  there,  and  Join  the  great 
men  of  the  country. 

Hell  is  no  doubt  a  flourishing  place  now. 
And  who  are  they  that  are  now  increasing  its 
population  ?  They  are  men  who,  when  they  have 
learnt  to  control  their  air-machines,  would,  with- 
out humbly  thanking  God  for  His  mercy  to  puny 
man,  utilize  the  discovery  for  the  destruction  of 
His  creatures.  It  is  Europe  mainly  which  is  send- 
ing colony  after  colony  to  the  internal  region. 

In  the  above,  we  only  echo  the  voice  of  one  of 
the  greatest  of  Englishmen,  Beaconsfield,  who  is 
now  no  more.  Eva  is  a  Jewess  and  Tancred  an 
English  youth,  a  Duke's  son.  These  are  the 
two  principal  characters  in  Lord  Beaconsfield's 
"Tancred"'.  The  Jewess  and  the  Duke's  son 
complain  of  their  respective  lots.  The  Jewess 
considers  the  lot  of  Asia  unhappy ;  the  young 
Englishman  considers  that  of  Europe  unhappy, 
and  hence  the  following  dialogue  ensues  : 

"Unhappy  Asia!"  said  Tancred,  "Do  you 
call  it  unhappy  Asia?  This  land  of  divine  deeds 
and  divine  thoughts  !  Its  slumber  is  more  vital 
than  the  waking  life  of  the  rest  of  the  globe,  as 
the  dream  of  the  genius  is  more  precious  than  the 
vigils  of  ordinary  men.  Unhappy  Asia,  do  you 
call  it  ?  It  is  the  unhappiness  of  Europe  over 
which  I  mourn." 

220 


ASIA,  THE  CHOSEN  PLACE  OF  GOD 

"Europe,  that  has  conquered  Hindustan, 
protects  Persia  and  Asia  Minor,  affects  to  have 
saved  Syria,'  said  Eva,  with  some  bitterness, — 
4,oh  !  what  can  we  do  against  Europe?" 

"Save  it,"  said  Tancred. 

'*  We  cannot  save  ourselves.  What  means 
have  we  to  save  others  ?  "    Said  Eva. 

"The  same,"  replied  Tancred,  "you  have 
ever  exercised,  Divine  Truth.  Send  forth  a  great 
thought,  as  you  have  done  before  from  Mount 
Senai,  from  the  villages  of  Gaillee,  from  the 
deserts  of  Arabia,  and  you  may  again  remodel 
all  their  institution,  change  their  principles  of 
action,  and  breathe  a  new  spirit  into  the  whole 
scope  of  their  existence.'' 

"I  have  sometimes  dreamed  such  dreams," 
murmured  Eva  looking  down.  "No,  no,"  she  ex- 
claimed, raising  her  head,  after  a  moment's  pause, 
"  it  is  impossible.  Europe  is  too  proud,  with  its 
new  command  over  nature,  to  listen  even  to 
prophets.  Levelling  mountains,  riding  without 
horse,  sailing  without  winds.  How  can  these  men 
believe  that  there  is  any  power,  human  or  divine, 
superior  to  themselves  ?  " 

"As  for  their  command  over  nature,"  said 
Tancred,  "let  us  see  how  it  will  operate  in  a  second 
deluge.  Command  over  nature  !  Why  the  humblest 
root  that  serves  for  the  food  of  man  has  mysteri- 
ously withered   throughout  Europe,  and  they  are 

221 


PICTURES   OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

already  pale  at  the  possible  consequences.  This 
slight  eccentricity  of  that  nature,  which  they  boast 
they  can  command,  has  already  shaken  empires 
and  may  decide  the  fate  of  nations.  No,  gentle 
lady,  Europe  is  not  happy.  Amid  its  false  ex- 
citement, its  bustling  invention,  and  its  endless 
toil,  a  profound  melancholy  broods  over  its  spirit 
and  gnaws  at  its  heart.  In  vain  they  baptize  their 
tumult  by  the  name  of  progress;  the  whisper  of  a 
demon  is  ever  asking  them,  'progress,  from  whence 
and  to  what?'  Excepting  those  who  still  cling  to 
your  Araban  creeds,  Europe,  that  quarter  of  the 
globe  to  which  God  has  never  spoken, — Europe  is 
without  consolation.'' 

Europe  is  powerful,  but  it  is  unhappy.  The 
soul  of  a  European  is  like  that  of  a  tiger  in  a 
cage,  always  trying  to  escape  through  unsuccess- 
fully— always  after  something,  what  he  does  not 
know.  At  present  European  nations  think  that 
it  is  the  conquest  and  maintenance  of  foreign 
territories  which  are  and  ought  to  be  the  sole  aim 
and  object  of  man  ;  while  the  individual  thinks 
that  it  is  money-making  which  is  the  work  of  his 
life.  And  in  the  pursuit  of  something  which  they 
do  not  know,  the  Europeans  have  forgotten  that 
they  have  a  soul  and  a  higher  destiny.  Unhappy 
Europe  ! 

Europe    is  an  armed  camp.     Thirty  millions 
of  its  strongest  men  are  trained  like  blood-hounds 

222 


ASIA,  THE  CHOSEN   PLACE  OF  GOD 

to  kill  their  fellow-beings.  The  greatest  statesman 
is  he  who  can  outwit  his  neighbour  by  fraud.  The 
greatest  hero  is  he  who  can  commit  the  greatest 
slaughter.  The  greatest  man  is  he  who  has  the 
largest  income. 

In  India  we  have  Europeans.  See  the  lot  of 
the  British  soldiers.  Would  any  native  of  India 
like  to  go  to  a  foreign  country,  in  an  uncongenial 
climate,  under  conditions  under  which  European 
soldiers  agree  to  live  in  India  ?  We  have,  then, 
Europeans  who  administer  the  affairs  of  the 
country.  They  have  absolute  power  and  the 
prospect  of  a  generous  pension,  and  it  is  for  these 
that  they  have  sacrificed  everyting  that  makes  life 
tolerable  or  enjoyable.  They  toil  and  moil  till 
their  heart  and  health  are  broken,  and  they  leave 
the  country  with  a  handsome  pension  (if  they  live 
till  then)  at  a  time  when  they  can  no  longer  enjoy 
its  fruits,  sighing  over  their  days  of  past  glory. 

In  India  they  are  banished,  far  away  from  old 
and  dear  associations.  The  climate  overpowers 
them ;  and  in  May  and  June,  they  are  roasted 
every  year  under  a  scorching  sun.  They  live 
without  society,  nay,  even  without  the  society 
of  their  wives  and  children  :  for  the  latter  have  to 
be  sent  home  for  the  sake  respectively  of  their 
health  and  education.  Again,  their  life  is  one 
round  of  incessant  toil  and  responsibility.  Yes 
they  have  no  time  even  to  read. 

223 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

Thus  according  to  Lord  Beaconsfield,  Europe 
is  a  continent  forsaken  by  God,  for  neither  God 
nor  His  Son  nor  His  Servant  ever  spoke  to  a 
European.  Europe  is,  therefore,  under  the  protec- 
tion of  the  other,  His  enemy,  who,  though  next 
to  him  in  power  and  importance,  is  yet  not  a 
friend  of  man  but  his  devourer. 


THE  LESSONS  TO  BE  LEARNED 
FROM  WILD  DOGS. 

THE  other  day,  we  were  talking  of  dogs  which 
hunt  in  packs.  These  dogs  are  to  be  found  in 
the  jungles  of  the  Central  Provinces  and  the 
Himalayas.  In  the  latter  place  they  are  called 
dholes  and  are  of  a  reddish  colour.  They  are  not 
big  animals  nor  fierce  in  look,  but  yet  it  is  said 
they  are  very  fond  of  tigers'  flesh.  It  is  not  known 
whether  they  have  ever  succeeded  in  hunting 
down  elephants,  but  they  have  been  seen  in  chas- 
ing buffaloes  with  success.  The  hungry  wolves 
in  Eastern  and  Central  Europe  attack  their  prey 
without  method  ;  and  when  the  quarry  is  big  and 
powerful  some  of  them  are  killed.  But  there  is  so 
much  method  in  the  way  the  dogs  alluded  to 
above  proceed  in  their  business  that  even  in  their 
rights  with  tigers  they  manage  to  despatch  their 
victims  without  a  scratch  on  their  bodies.  This  is 
because  they  are  led  by  an  irresistible  master,  a 
despot,  who  is  followed  implicitly. 

The  wild  dogs  are  subjected  to  a  severe  coarse 
of  training  during  their  early  age.  A  kind-hearted 
hunter  suddenly  found  himself  in  possession  of 
litter  of  wild  dogs,  seven  in  number,  whose  mother 
he  had  shot.     He   had  to   bring  these  helpless 

225 

S-15 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

creatures  home.  He  sought  suckling  bitches  and 
spent  some  money  to  procure  them.  But  the 
bitches  failed  ;  the  little  ones  emited  such  intoler- 
able stench  that  no  tame  dog  could  bear  it.  He 
at  last  found  a  bitch  to  serve  his  purpose.  When 
these  young  dogs  grew  up  they  began  to  fight 
among  themselves, constantly  without  intermission. 
Why  were  they  fighting  ?  They  were  fighting  to 
determine  which  was  to  be  the  leader?  One  by 
one,  however,  they  gave  up  the  struggle,  and 
eventually  the  fight  was  continued  between  two 
only — brothers.  Neither  of  them  was  willing  to 
yield.  When  they  fought  they  did  not  spare  the 
opponent ;  indeed,  they  fought  with  great  ferocity. 
Their  bite  was  so  severe  that  sometimes  the 
master  said  that  if  he  lifted  one  the  other  six 
would  be  found  lifted  with  it.  The  fact  is,  their 
tenacity  was  such  that  they  did  not  know  to  let  go 
their  hold. 

As  he  said  the  two  fought  for  mastery  for  a 
long  time  and  at  last  one  was  vanquished  and 
thus  the  victor  became  the  leader  of  the  seven. 
The  six  followed  him  implicitly  and  certainly  there 
was  no  longer  any  quarrel  among  them.  These 
dogs  never  barked  and  never  attacked  men,  but 
they  killed  all  the  dogs  in  the  neighbourhood. 
They,  however,  died  one  after  the  other  of 
dysentery. 

Let  us  now  describe  how  they  hunt  in  packs. 

226 


THE  LESSONS  TO  BE  LEARNED  FROM  WILD  DOGS 

What  they  do  is  to  pursue,  say,  a  tiger,  which 
never  shews  fight,  if  it  encounters  a  pack  of  these 
dogs,  and  then  to  try  to  catch  it  by  the  ear.  If 
one  succeeds  in  jumping  up  and  getting  at  one  of 
the  ears  of  the  tiger,  the  latter  is  done  for.  The 
persistent  enemy  will  hang  by  the  ear  and  never 
let  go  its  hold.  The  tiger  may  run  ten  miles,  but 
the  dog  will  yet  be  seen  hanging  by  its  ear.  Of 
course,  the  victim  makes  every  effort  to  extricate 
itself  from  its  obstinate  and  implacable  foe,  but  in 
vain. 

When  one  ear  of  the  tiger  has  been  secured 
by  a  bold  members  of  the  pack,  the  other  ear  is 
soon  after  seized  by  another.  So  the  tiger  has 
now  to  run  with  two  dogs  hanging  by  its  two 
ears.  Others  then  get  hold  of  its  tail,  and  though 
these  are  dragged  for  miles  they  never  relax 
their  grip.  Fancy  the  condition  of  the  poor  tiger. 
It  is  fleeing  with  two  dogs  hanging  by  itrUwo  ears 
and  half  a  dozen  sticking  to  its  tail.  Others  then 
jump  on  its  back.  In  this  manner  the  tiger  is 
never  given  an  opportunity  of  using  its  claws  or 
teeth,  and  is  soon  after  hunted  down. 

Our  Congress  leaders  should  follow  the 
methods  of  the  wild  dogs  in  hunting  down  their 
disabilities?  The  National  Congress  will  be  a  suc- 
cess only  when  it  has  been  able  to  develop  a  leader. 

The  patriots,  who  are  opposed  to  Police  rule 
as  it  prevails  here,  may  also  learn  from  the  strate- 

227 


PICTURES  OF    INDIAN   LIFE 

gy  of  these  wild  dog's,  when  hunting  a  quarry  too 
strong  for  them,  how  to  effect  their  purpose.  Ii 
the  pack  find  the  tiger  too  strong  for  them  they 
proceed  in  a  more  cautious  way:  in  short,  they 
try  to  starve  it.  Night  and  day  they  form  a  cordon 
round  the  unfortunate  beast,  and  allow  it  no 
chance  of  obtaining  food  or  rest,  while  every  time 
the  tiger  essays  to  break  through  the  cordon  this 
is  widened  as  the  pack  flees  before  it,  only  to  be 
relentlessly  narrowed  again  when  the  doomed 
animal  is  exhausted  ;  till  at  last  it  is  easily  des- 
patched. 

In  the  same  manner,  the  patriots,  who  are 
opposed  to  Police  rule,  can  manage  to  starve  the 
Police.  To  starve  the  Police  is  not  to  permit  it  to 
get  its  prey.  If  men,  who  run,  at  the  slightest 
provocation,  to  the  Police,  knew  their  own  inter- 
ests and  stayed  at  home  to  be  cooled  down,  the 
Police  would  soon  be  starved  to  submission.  So, 
what  the  patriots  should  do  is  to  prevent  people 
from  going  to  the  Police  when  they  quarrel  among 
themselves,  but  to  persuade  them  to  settle  their 
differences  by  mutual   forbearance. 

The  finest  story  of  dogs  hunting  in  packs  and 
in  a  methodical  way  came  from  an  Englishman, 
though  in  this  case  the  pack  consisted  of  only  two 
hounds.  Those  who  have  seen  an  American  black 
bear  know  that  it  is  a  terrible  fellow,  possessing 
vast  strength  and  an  unlimited  amount  of  pluck.  It 

228 


THE  LESSONS  TO  BE  LEARNED  FROM  WILD  DOGS 

was  his  formidable  animal  that  they  fought.    But 
let  the  Englishman  relate  his  story  : — 

I  was  staying  at  a  farm  in  Virginia,  and  I  was  soon 
introduced  to  the  "pets"  of  the  settlements.  They  were  two 
boar-hounds  named  Romeo  and  Juliet,  splendid  specimens  of 
their  race.  These  gentle  creatures  could  only  be  controlled 
by  their  keepers,   so  fierce  and  ungovernable  were  they. 

One  morning  a  Negro  rushed  into  the  house  with  the 
information  that  a  bear  had  killed  a  calf  and  had  escaped 
towards  the  mountains. 

Instantly  every  body  was  on  the  alert,  and  messengers  were 
sent  to  all  the  neighbours  round  about  to  give  the  news  and 
direct  them  to  the  meeting  place.  By  the  time  we  have 
despatched  a  hasty  breakfast  the  yard  was  full  of  men  and 
dogs,  but  the  "pets"  were  conspicuously  absent.  On  enquiring 
for  them,  I  was  told  not  to  worry  about  it  that  "they  would 
be  on  hand  when  wanted." 

The  trail  was  clear  and  we  pursued  it  hotly.  In  little  more 
than  half  an  hour  the  loud  barking  and  snarling  of  the  dogs 
told  us   that  Bruin  was    at    bay. 

I  was  the  first  at  the  spot.  At  the  foot  of  an  oak  sat  a 
magnificent  black  bear,  his  open  mouth  and  heaving  chest 
denoting  his  excitement.  About  him  were  lying  the  bodies  of 
eight  dogs  that  he  had  killed ;  the  rest  of  the  pack  had  drawn 
off.     They  had  had  quite  enough. 

In  five  minutes  more  most  of  the  hunters  had  come  up  and 
formed  in  a  semicircle  abont  the  bear,  which  made  no  further 
effort  to  escape,  but  sat  on  his  haunches,  slowl}'  swaying  his 
body  to   and  fro,    and  eyeing    us  intently. 

Suddenly  there  was  a  cry  of  "  Here  they  come!  "  and 
pushing  their  way  through  the  thickets  were  seen  the  forms 
of  the  two  great  boar  hounds.  I  had  fully  expected  the  dogs  to 
spring  upon  their  enemy  as  soon  as  they  were  unleashed,  but 
to  my  surprise  they  remained  quiet,  uttering  no  sound  and 
showing    no    excitement.     They    looked    at    each    other,     then 

229 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

I  to  the  left  anil  right,  they  walked  some  distance  from 
each  other.  After  this  they  quietly  advanced  towards  Bruin 
and  stood   on  either   side  of  him    about   20  feet    away. 

The  dogs  now  flattened  themselves  to  the  earth  and  slowly 
v  their  groat  bodies  forward  until  within  about  8  feet  Of 
their  prey,  when  again  rising  to  their  full  height,  and  trombling 
with  suppressed  excitement,  they  looked  past  the  bear  and 
npon  each  other.  Aprain  they  crouched,  but  this  time  for  a 
leap  and  in  an  instant  they  liurlol  themselves  on  their 

Bravo  old  Bntin  !  He  fought  for  exactly  :?  minutes,  and 
then  died.  It  was  not  a  sight  T  should  care  to  witness  again. 
A   rifle-shot  is  speedier  and  more   mercifal. 

We  said  above  that  it  is  not  on  record  that  an 
elephant  was  ever  hunted  down  by  wild  dogs. 
Hut  we  had  yet  the  pleasure  of  witnessing  an 
elephant-and-dog  fight.  The  elephant,  however, 
was  a  tame  one,  and  the  dog  an  ordinary  pariah 
which  was  called  Soda.  An  elephant  was  passing 
by  guided  by  its  mahoot,  when  the  master  of  the 
dog  set  it  upon  the  huge  animal.  The  dog  at 
first  could  not  believe  that  its  master  was 
serious  in  urging  it  to  such  a  hazardous  enter- 
prise, but  it  felt  to  its  dismay  that  there  was 
no  mistaking  about  the  intention  of  its  food 
giver.  So  girding  up  its  loins,  as  it  were,  it 
attacked  the  elephant  from  behind.  Now,  the 
latter  had  never  been  followed  by  such  an  enemy 
in  its  life,  and,  therefore,  not  taking  any  notice  of 
its  puny  tormentor,  was  proceeding  on  its  way  in 
its  usual  calm  and  sedate  way.  But  the  intention 
of  Sada  became  quite  clear.     It  not  only  barked 

230 


THE  LESSONS  TO  BE  LEARNED  FROM  WILD  DOGS 


from  behind  but  touched  the  hind  legs  of  the  ele- 
phant with  its  teeth.  This  impertinence  from  such 
a  quarter  was  too  much  for  the  proud  animal,  and, 
in  disgust,  it  actually  turned  round  to  meet  its 
foe.  And  they  stood  face  to  face  !  Sada's  strength 
lay  in  its  legs,  and  that  of  the  elephant  in  its  trunk 
which  it  stretched  out  to  catch  hold  of  the  enemy. 
But  Sada  was  on  guard  and  gave  such  a  run  with 
a  defiant  bark  that  the  elephant  realized  the 
hopeless  task  of  pursuing  it,  and  thus  retreated  in 
good  order.  It  was  a  sight  to  see  the  elephant 
trembling  with  rage  when  encountering  the  tiny 
foe,  especially  when  the  latter  insulted  it  with  bite 
and  bark.  Sada  yet  pursued  the  elephant  for 
sometime,  but  the  latter  had  no  help  in  the  matter, 
and  had  to  suffer  the  insult. 


THE  GREAT   INVENTOR   OF  A 
NATION. 

Sri  Krishna  is  the  God  of  Love.  He  is  the 
Supreme  Deity  and  does  not  interfere  with  the 
administration  of  mundane  affairs  of  the  universe. 
He  leaves  that  task  to  some  inferior  deities.  He 
first  evolved  Brahma  out  of  Himself,  and  command- 
ed him  to  create  the  material  world.  Brahma 
began  the  work  in  right  earnest,  and  when  he  had 
proceeded  so  far  as  to  create  the  animal  kingdom, 
his  two  sons,  Rup  and  Sanatan,  prayed  to  their 
father  to  allow  them  the  privilege  of  helping  him 
in  the  business,  and  Brahma  agreed.  As  soon  as 
the  two  brothers  had  created  some  animals, 
Brahma  wanted  to  see  the  result  of  their  labours, 
whereupon  they  first  brought  forward  the  elephant 
before  him  for  inspection. 

Brahma  could  not  help  smiling  at  the  sight  of 
this  huge  mass  of  flesh.  "What  is  this  trunk  toff* 
he  enquired.  The  sons  replied,  that  they  had 
created  the  animal  in  haste,  and  afterwards  dis- 
covered that  the  neck  of  the  animal  had  been 
made  so  stiff  and  short  as  to  incapacitate  it  from 
putting  its  food  in  its  mouth  ;  they  had,  therefore, 
given  it  a  trunk  to  enable  it  to  do  so.  Brahma 
said  :  "My  children,  this  is  the  result  of  hasty  work. 

232 


THE  GREAT   INVENTOR  OF  A  NATION 

Before  you  had  constructed  his  body,  you  should 
have  thought  how  he  was  to  secure  his  food  and 
preserve  his  life/ 

The  giraffe  was  brought  in  next.  Its  four 
legs  of  unequal  length  made  Brahma  smile 
again :  "How  did  this  happen  my  children  ?' 
he  asked.  They  gave  him  the  same  reply : 
"This  too  is  the  result  of  haste,  father.  We 
first  constructed  its  two  hind  legs,  but  came  to 
find  that  if  we  made  its  two  front  legs  but  of  the 
same  length,  the  animal  would  not  be  able  to 
reach  the  branches,  the  leaves  of  which  are  to 
nourish  it,  and  keep  it  alive."  "My  children,"  said 
Brahma,  "you  should  have  thought  of  this  when 
you  took  up  the  construction  of  the  hind  legs." 

The  kangaroo,  when  exhibited,  created  equal 
surprise.  The  children  explained  that  they  had 
made  the  front  legs  of  the  giraffe  longer  than  the 
hind  ones.  To  make  up  for  this  defect,  they  had 
made  the  hind  legs  of  the  kangaroo  longer  than 
the  front  ones.  "We  have  only  sought  harmony 
and  equilibrium,"  said  Rup  and  Sanatan. 

The  sight  of  the  ass,  with  its  two  long  ears, 
made  Brahma  laugh  out-right.  Said  the  god  to 
his  sons  :  "You  would,  I  see,  make  me  an  object 
of  laughter  to  the  world.''  The  explanation  of  the 
children  was  that  it  was  the  result  of  the  joint 
efforts  of  the  two  brothers — that  one  had  made  the 
body,  the  other  the  head,  and  when  the  latter  was 

233 


HCTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

stuck  to  the  former  it  was  found   to  have   been 
made  too  ridiculous! 

It  was,  in  this  manner,  the  came],  the  monkey 
etc.,  were  brought  before  Brahma  and  criticized 
by  him.  He  said:  "Before  creating-  the  animals 
you  ought  to  have  carefully  thought  whether  the 
parts  would  harmoniously  agree  with  each  other, 
and  suit  the  whole.''  In  order  to  humour  his 
children  Brahma  had  to  accept  what  they  had 
done,  and  hence  we  have  these  unseemly  and 
laughter-producing  animals  noted  above.  We 
are  informed  that  the  duck-billed  quadruped  of 
Australia  is  one  of  the  creations  of  the  children  of 
Brahma. 

Brahma  had  not  then  created  man,  but  he  had 
already  concieved  the  idea.  He  told  his  sons  that 
they  had  made  their  creations  clumsy  and  ugly. 
As,  for  instance,  they  had  no  reason  to  give  the 
animals  four  legs.  Saying  this  the  god  shewed 
them  the  sketch  of  a  man  as  he  had  conceived 
him.  "You  see",  said  Brahma,  "he  will  have  only 
two  legs." 

Rup  and  Sanatan. — "But  the  elephant  is  very 
heavy,  while  your  man  is  very  light." 

Brahma. — "Why  have  you  given  four  legs  to 
the  mouse  which  is  lighter  than  man?  You  have, 
besides,  made  the  ostrich,  which  is  heavier  than 
man,  a  two-legged  creature  and  one  of  the  fleetest 
creatures  on  earth? 

234 


THE  GREAT  INVENTOR  OF  A  NATION 

"The  fact  is,  father,"  said  they,  "we  found  it 
very  irksome  to  form  a  full  conception  of  the 
whole  in  the  beginning-.  We  began  with  the  parts. 
When  we  found  the  body  of  the  elephant  too 
heavy,  we  had  to  give  it  thick,  column-like  legs; 
when  two  legs  were  found  not  sufficient  we  gave 
four ;  we  should  have  given  five  if  necessary. 
In  the  same  manner,  we  gave  it  a  trunk 
when  we  found  that  otherwise  it  would  die  of 
hunger." 

Lord  Curzon,  the  supreme  ruler  of  India, 
loves  the  Indians,  as  every  one  knows.  He  has 
left  the  administration  of  the  country  to  his 
subordinates.  One  of  his  subordinates,  Mr  Risley, 
wanted  permission  to  evolve  a  new  country  with 
a  new  nation,  and  obtained  it. 

The  country  was  easily  evolved.  He  kept  a 
map  before  him ;  he  had  compasses  and  pencils, 
and  the  country  was  marked  out.  He  then 
followed  exactly  the  way  Rup  and  Sanatan  had 
adopted  to  do  their  work.  The  cost  of  the 
administration  was  too  heavy  for  Assam  alone, 
and  hence  he  would  add  Chittagong,  Dacca  and 
Mymensing  to  it.  Rup  and  Sanatan  might  have 
reduced  the  bulk  of  the  elephant  as.  Mr.  Risley 
might  have  lightened  the  cost  of  the  administration 
so  as  to  make  Assam  bear  it  easily.  Thus,  if  the 
brothers  had  given  two  more  legs  to  the  elephant, 
Mr.  Risley  added  the  two  districts  of    Dacca    and 

235 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

Mymensing  to  Assam,  besides  the  three  districts  of 
the  Chittagong  Division. 

In  the  same  manner,  if  the  brothers  made  the 
kangaroo  as  it  is,  to  remove  the  defect  they  made 
the  giraffe.  Mr.  Risley  also  amalgamated  the 
Bengalee-speaking  peoples  with  those  who  speak 
the  Assamese,  and  fastened  two  Uriyaspeaking 
districts  of  other  provinces  upon  Orissa,  in  order 
to  secure  equilibrium.  Besides,  did  not  the  brothers 
bring  forth  the  creature  which  was  a  quadruped 
but  had  the  bill  of  a  duck?  Under  the  same  prin- 
ciple, Mr.  Risley  thought  he  was  justified  in 
fastening  a  Bengalee-speaking  people  upon  an 
Assamese-speaking  province.  The  brothers  created 
the  parts  first  without  taking  into  consideration 
whether,  when  stuck  together,  they  would  look 
hideous  or  beautiful.  Similarly  Mr.  Risley  con- 
ceived the  parts  first,  without  considering  whether, 
when  put  together,  they  would  form  a  harmonious 
or  an  incongruous  whole. 

As  for  evolving  a  new  nation,  Mr.  Risley  has 
yet  something  more  to  do.  The  people  of  Assam 
have  a  distinct  trace  of  the  flat  nose  of  the  Mongo- 
lian race.  The  nose  of  the  Bengalee  is  of  a 
Caucasian  type.  For  the  purposes  of  harmony, 
Mr.  Risley  will  have  to  flatten  it  a  little  ;  or,  if  he 
chooses,  he  can  correct  the  nasal  defect  of  the 
Assamese.  Here  parenthetically  we  can  suggest 
a  way  how  this  can  be  done.  Let   the   noses  of  the 

236 


THE  GREAT   INVENTOR  OF  A  NATION 

Assamese  be  held  by  pincers  firmly,  and  in  this 
manner  they  can  be  lengthened.  If  the  Assamese 
make  wry  faces  under  the  process,  he  can  console 
them  with  the  remark  that  his  great  idea  necessi- 
tated it. 

Then  there  is  the  language  difficulty.  Mr 
Risley  will  have  to  create  a  language  which  will 
suit  both  the  Assamese  and  the  Bengalees.  We 
could  here  "make  some  suggestions,  but  as  Mr. 
Risley  possibly  does  not  know  the  Assamese,  we 
think  it  would  be  difficult  for  us  to  be  intelligible 
to  him. 


PELTING  OF  STONES   BY-GHOSTS. 

Popular  notion  in  India  is  that  ghosts  pelt 
stones  and  I  had   an  ocular  demonstration  of  the 
fact.  It  was  in  the  month  of  December,  eight  years 
ago,  that  I  witnessed  a  scene  which  proved  that 
there  are  many   things  in  earth  and  heaven  that 
are  not  dreamt  of  in  our  philosophy.  I  was  in  the 
town  of  Deoghur  in  my  own  house  situated  in  an 
open   place.     Close  to  my  house  was  that  of  one 
Gonori  Mahato  which  also  was  situated  in  an  open 
place.  It  came  to  my  notice  that  ghosts  had  appear- 
ed in  his  house.  Shortly  after    I  had  heard  this,   I 
saw  Gonori  himself.  I  asked    him  about  the  ghost 
and  he  said,  "Yes,   sir,  it    is  a   'pichash'"    which 
means  a  ghost  of  very  low  degree.    I  was   a  little 
surprised  to  hear  this  from  him.  For  Gonori  had 
become  a  Christian,  and  was  not  likely  to  put  faith 
in  the  existence  of  ghosts,  lower  or  higher.  I  asked 
him  what  the  ghost  was  doing  in  his  house,  but  he 
was  not  communicative  and  went  his  way.  I  forgot 
all  about  it,   when   a  strange  incident  brought  the 
pranks  of  this  ghost    again  to  my   notice.  Gonori, 
being  a  milk-man,  supplied  me  with  milk,  and  an 
Ooria  servant    of  mine   wTent  to  fetch  it.  He  was 
brought  back  almost  in  an   unconscious  state  by  a 
friend    of    Gonori    just   before    evening.   I  asked* 

238 


PELTING  OF  STONES  BY — GHOSTS 

Shiva,  the  servant,  to  explain  the  reason  of  the 
sorrowful  plight.  He  said,  after  great  effort,  for  he 
could  scarcely  utter  a  word,  that  hearing  that 
ghosts  were  playing  mad  pranks  in  the  house 
of  Gonori  he  had  gone  to  fetch  milk  a  little 
before  the  usual  time  he  used  to  bring  it,  that  is, 
before  the  sun  had  gone  down.  Evening  was  just 
setting  in,  and  he  was  coming  with  the  milk  when, 
no  sooner  had  he  left  Gonori's  house,  than  a 
black  and  hideous  "thing"  pounced  upon  him 
and  inflicted  a  blow  upon  his  breast,  so  that 
he  fell  senseless  with  a  groan.  Gonori  had 
invited  a  few  friends  to  his  house  to  pass  the  night 
with  him  to  protect  him  from  the  "pichash,"  and 
thus,  when  they  heard  his  groan,  they  came  to 
his  rescue  and  brought  him  home. 

On  the  following  morning,  I  went  to  Gonori's 
house,  which  was  about  two  minutes'  walk  from 
mine,  accompanied  by  two  friends,  both  of  them 
highly  educated  and  intensely  intellectual.  His 
house,  as  I  said  before,  was  situated  in  an  open 
space  only  on  one  side  of  which  there  was  a 
cluster  of  bamboo  trees  where  the  ghost  might 
conceal  himself,  but  even  this  would  be  impossible 
in  day  time  if  he  was  a  fraud.  On  entering  the 
house  we  found  a  girl  of  about  twelve  sweeping 
the  yard  with  a  broom-stick,  the  yard  being  sur- 
rounded with  huts  and  walls.  The  other  inmates 
of  the  house,    Gonori  himself,   his  mother  about 

239 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

seventy,  his  wife  about  forty-five,  were  all  absent. 
Seeing-  that  the  girl  was  the  only  inmate  of  the 
house  doing  household  work,  we  went  outside 
chatting  at  random,  nearly  forgetting  all  about  the 
ghost.  My  friends  were  a  few  yards  from  me 
talking  together,  and  I  took  this  opportunity  of 
addressing  the  ghost  in  these  words  :  "Sir  Ghost, 
if  you  are  here,  please  shew  yourself  to  us,  for  we 
are  highly  respectable  gentlemen  and  you  should 
behave  properly  with  us.''  No  sooner  had  I  said 
this  than  a  clod  of  earth  came  rolling  down  the 
slope  of  the  hut  near  which  I  was  standing!  This 
amused  me  greatly,  for  I  could  not  believe  that  it 
was  actually  a  ghost  that  had  responded  to  my 
call.  So  I  asked  my  friends  to  note  the  politeness 
of  the  ghost  which  had  actually  listened  to  my 
request.  They  had  heard  the  sound  of  the  fall  of 
the  clod,  but  had  not  seen  it  coming  down.  So 
they  came  close  to  me  to  examine  the  clod.  I 
again  addressed  the  ghost,  I  said  :  "  Sir  Ghost, 
this  is  highly  improper,  you  should  be  impartial 
in  the  treatment  of  your  guests.  You  have 
satisfied  me  but  not  my  friends.  Please  shew 
yourself  to  them  also."  No  sooner  had  I  said 
this,  than  there  rolled  down  another  clod,  and 
this  time  we  all  three  saw  it.  Let  me  confess,  this 
time  we  were  all  surprised.  But  was  that  girl 
doing  it?  No,  we  could  see  from  our  position 
that   she  was  busy  doing    her  work   of  sweeping. 

240 


PELTING  OF  STONES   BY — GHOSTS 

I  again  addressed  the  ghost,  "Sir  Ghost,  re- 
move all  our  doubts  and  do  favour  us  again."   No 
sooner  said  than  done.     Another  clod   of  earth 
came  down  rolling,  following  the  other  two.     We 
were  petrified  with  astonishment.     It  was  about 
9  in  the  morning,  the  sun  was  up  in  the  skies,  and 
there  was  not  a  speck  of  cloud.     And  we  three 
saw  this  before  our  eyes  in  an  open  field  where 
there  were  none  besides  the  girl  who  was  sweep- 
ing the  yard.     But  no  time  was  allowed   us  by 
the  good  ghost  to  speculate  upon  what  we  had 
witnessed,  for  the  merry  thing  now  began  to  roll 
down  stones  of  its  own  accord,  one  after  another, 
in  rapid  succession.    Then  clods  and  stones  began 
to  f all  in  the  y a:  d   which  the  giri  was  sweeping. 
We  ran  there,  and  then  commenced  as  it  were  a 
perfect  rain  of  stones,  pieces  of  burnt  brick  and 
clods  of  earth.    Where  did  they  come  from?  From 
the  skies?  Perhaps,     Perhaps  not;   for,  some  of 
them  struck  the  mud-walls  of  the  huts  horizontally. 
Of  course,  we  were  afraid  .of  being  struck  by  these 
missiles  but  luckily  we  escaped  unhurt,  but  some 
were  hurt  subsequently  though  slightly.     For,  the 
fact  of  this  strange   occurrence  had  gone  abroad, 
and  people  were  running  to  the  house  from  all 
sides,  even  from  the  town,  which  was  about  half- 
a-mile  distant  from  the  place.      The  house  was 
thus  filled  by  hundreds  of  men  in  a  short  time. 
As  I  said,  it  was  broad   daylight  and  though 

241 
S— 16 


PICTURES  OK  INDIAN  LIFE 

there  were  hundreds  present,  none  could  tell 
whence  the  stones  came.  The  inmates  of  the  hou 
had  come  back  and  they  were  kept  in  one  place 
hud (  I  led  together  so  that  they  might  play  no  tricks. 
Rut  the  scene  that  presented  itself  (it  was  literally 
hailing  stones)  convinced  every  one  that  there 
could  be  no  trick  at  the  bottom.  The  yard  was 
soon  filled  with  these  clods,  stones,  &c,  and  they 
became  almost  knee-deep  in  a  short  time. 

But  the  most  wonderful  feats,  performed  by 
the  ghost,  yet  remain  to  be  told.  A  big  piece  of 
stone,  weighing  over  a  hundred  pounds  (more 
than  amaund) — which  it  would  be  difficult  for  one 
strong  man  to  carry,  was  brought  out  from  the 
bottom  of  the  well  which  stood  on  one  side  of  the 
yard  and  thrown  in  the  yard.  A  little  before  this 
we  had  heard  a  splashing  of  water  in  the  well,  and 
the  big  stone  was  brought  out  and  made  to  fall 
in  the  yard  with  a  thud.  This  so  terrified  the  sight- 
seers, that  while  some  fled  others  took  shelter  in 
the  huts. 

I  had  a  notion  that  the  girl  was  a  medium  and 
it  was  through  her  that  the  ghost  was  playing  his 
pranks.  This  notion  I  gathered  by  observing  one 
fact.  It  was  this.  The  clods  fell  most  where  the 
girl  stood.  So,  1  led  her  and  Gonori's  wife  to  the 
Eastern  side  of  the  house  in  a  field  where  mustard 
had  been  grown,  but  gathered.  It  was  an  open 
field,  filled  with  clods  of  earth  among  which,  no 

242 


PELTING  OF  STONES   BY— GHOSTS 

doubt  the  ghost  had  found  some  of  his  missiles.  I 
made  the  girl  and  the  woman  sit  in  the  field. 
There  they  sat,  and  wonder  of  wonders,  the  clods 
round  them  began,  as  it  were,  to  dance  !  Thus  a 
clod  would  rise,  say,  four  or  five  feet  from  the 
earth  and  fall  down.  At  times  more  than  one 
clod  would  thus  rise  up  and  fall  down.  Here  then 
we  had  the  scene  of  clods  of  earth  in  the  midst  of 
the  field  dancing,  as  if  they  were  imbued  with  life, 
and  this  at  about  eleven  in  the  day  and  in  the 
presence  of  hundreds.  It  seemed  to  me  that  in  the 
field  the  ghost  had  not  power  enough  to  be  able 
to  throw  the  clods  to  any  distance. 

The  intellectual  critic,  after  he  has  read  so 
far,  might  exclaim,  aui  bono  ?  "What  do  you 
prove  by  the  incident ?"  Well  we  have  not  done 
yet,  we  have  yet  to  record  more  wonderful  doings 
of  this  ghost.  Indeed,  I  succeeded  eventually  in 
making  it  talk  to  me  in  its  ghostly  way,  but  of 
this  in  our  next.  Yet  does  not  the  incident,  so  far 
as  described  above,  prove  anything  ?  Does  it  not 
prove  that  there  are  more  things  in  earth  and 
heaven  than  are  ever  dreamt  of  in  our  philosophy, 
and  that  the  scientists  have  yet  much  to  learn?  It 
proves  that  a  thing  which  lias  no  material  body  can 
pelt  stones  and  can  also  possess  gleams  of  reason. 
Did  not  the  thing,  by  listening  to  our  request  in 
the  beginning,  shew  that  it  could  hear  and  under- 
stand us?     Does  not  the  incident   of  bringing  the 

243 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

big  stone  from  the  bottom  of  the  well  prove  that  it 
had  method  in  its  mad  pranks?  So  the  incident, 
so  Ear  as  has  been  described,  proves  that  there  is 
no  impossibility  in  a  man  losing  his  body  yet 
retaining  his  physical  powers  and  reasoning 
faculties.     But  wait  till  you  have  heard  the  end. 

In  the  midst  of  this  scene,  the  thought 
troubled  me  that  it  was  my  duty  to  make  the 
most  of  the  occasion,  for  such  experiences  do  not 
fall  to  the  lot  of  every  man.  But  I  was  be-wilder- 
ed,  I  could  not  think  of  a  plan  how  to  utilise  the 
occasion,  or  how  to  experiment  with  the  ghost 
who  was  playing  the  mad  pranks.  He  was  no 
doubt,  we  thought,  one  of  a  low  degree,  that  is,  an 
earth-bound  and  gross  soul.  Was  he  dense  enough 
to  be  visible  to  the  naked  eye?  I  tried  and  tried 
a^ain  to  see  him  but  I  could  see  nothing.  I  then 
came  to  the  o  inclusion  that  I  must  take  time  to 
think  over  the  matter  and  should  commence  my 
experiments  on  the  next  day.  Yet  I  could  not 
leave  the  spi  t — I  was  so  enthralled  that  I  had  to 
wait  to  see  the  end. 

Suck  enly  a  thought  struck  me  that  I  might  as 
well  take  the  giri  to  a  closed  room,  and  see  what 
the  result  would  be.  So  I  took  her  and  Gonori's 
v  ite  to  a  roo.n,  which  had  walls  on  all  sides  but  no 
\  ows  -\  haiever  and  only  a  small  door  to  enter 
b  \\  i.  sai  all  three  together  and  kept  the  door 
open.     Those    who   stiil  remained— it    was    then 

244 


PELTING  OF  STONES  BY— GHOSTS 

about  2  p.  m.  and  most  having  left  the  place — 
stood  outside,  bewildered.  For  five  hours  the 
ghost  had  been  pelting  stones,  and  when  I  took 
the  woman  and  the  girl  in,  I  saw  that  its  power 
had  got  a  little  weakened. 

Well,  we  three  sat,  facing  one  another.  There 
was  almost  as  clear  a  light  in  the  room  as  there 
was  outside.  I  then  addressed  the  ghost,  and 
requested  him  that  now  was  the  time  for  him  to 
shew  wonders.  Saying  this  we  remained  quiet. 
Of  course,  our  people  know  what  a  shikd  is — it  is 
a  contrivance  made  of  jute,  like  a  sling  to  hang 
pots  and  cups  on.  A  shika  was  hanging  behind 
me,  on  which  was  placed  a  cup  made  of  sal  leaves, 
containing  a  small  quantity  of  a  sort:  of  coarse 
pulse  grown  in  those  parts,  called  Kutthi.  I  heard 
a  rustling  sound  behind  me,  and  on  turning  my 
eyes  I  saw  that  the  leaf  cup,  was  trying,  as  it  were, 
to  leave  its  place.  After  some  slight  efforts  it 
succeeded  in  raising  itself  and  pouring  its  contents 
(the  Kurthi)  upon  my  "devoted"  head.  Of  course, 
I  was  amused  a  little  at  this  prank  though  1  was 
also  frightened  a  bit.  So  the  ghost  was  a  wag. 
1  told  him  "You  have  soiled  my  head."  But  the 
ghost,  of  course,  could  not  speak,  and  so  I  got  no 
answer.  A  minute  or  so  later,  I  heard  a  noise 
proceeding  again  from  the  same  spot.  This  time 
I  saw  it  was  a  wooden  bowl  which  produced  it. 
The  bowl,  which  had  also  been  put   on  the  shUc  <, 

245 


PICTURES    OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

shewed  signs  of  life,  and  it  seemed  that  it  was  also 
trying  to  come  out  of  its  place  of  confinement. 
After  some  efforts  it  succeeded  in  realeasing  itself 
and  coming  towards  me.  And  the  bowl  now 
poured  its  contents  upon  my  head  ! 

All  this  while  the  girl  and  the  woman  were 
sitting  before  me  in  bread  daylight.  And  what 
did  this  bowl  cuntain  ?  It  was  salt !  So  Mr.  Ghost 
poured  all  the  salt  that  the  bowl  contained  upon 
my  head  ! 

This  '  was  joke  number  two'  And  we  all  three 
laughed.  "Can  you  speak,  even  in  whispers?" — 
I  asked  the  ghost.  No  answer.  There  was  a  bam- 
boo stick — a  lathi,  in  short,  a  bamboo  club  about 
5  ft.  in  length — in  the  room,  leaning  against 
a  corner.  This  was  the  third  object  which  was 
seen  to  shew  signs  of  life.  It  trembled  a  little, 
as  if  some  one  was  shaking  it ;  then  it  stood 
« rect.  Next  it  began  to  move  and  approach 
me  by  short  jumps  as  seme  birds  would  do,  when 
hopping  !  And  then  it  seemed  to  me  as  if  somebody 
had  grasped  it  with  both  hands  and  was,  in  that 
manner,  carrying  it  towards  me  ;  then  it  struck 
the  earth  with  great  force.  My  head  escaped  by 
few  inches  only!  If  the  club  had  fallen  upon  my 
head,  it  would  have  received  a  serious  hurt.  It 
seemed  to  me  that  the  ghost  was  giving  me  a  hint 
to  depart  and  thus  escape  worse  treatment.  I  had, 
indeed,  to  put  an   end  to    my  experiment  imme- 

246 


PELTING   OF  STONES   BY— GHOSTS 

diately,  and  come  out.  It  was  then  about  half  past 
two  the  ghost  had  begun  its  manifestations  a  little 
before  9  a.  m.  I  came  home  exhausted  in  body  and' 
mind,  though  with  a  deep  determination  to  con- 
tinue the  experiments  the  following  day.  On  the 
following  morning,  I  went  to  the  place  and 
found  that  the  girl  had  fled  with  her  husband. 
They  were  Gonori's  relations,  and  were  staying 
with  him  as  guests.  They  were  told  by  some 
mischievous  people,  that  the  police  would  punish 
them  ;  and  this  frightened  them  so  much  that  they 
fled.  I  searched  for  them  and  at  last  found  their 
whereabout.but  could  not  induce  them — rather  the 
husband — to  come  back. 

We  thus  witnessed  what  may  be  called  an 
occult  phenomenon.  We  saw  it  along  with  many 
hundred  others  in  broad  daylight.  Any  tricks, 
under  the  circumstances,  would  be  impossible. 
Now  the  reader  is  left  to  draw  his  own  con- 
clusions. 

We  saw  an  invisible  thing  giving  proofs  that 
it  possesse  1  enormous  physical  powers;  that  it 
had  conscious' less,  nay,  that  it  understood  a  joke. 
Was  it  the  sou!  of  a  dead  man  that  was  acting 
in  that  way  ?  Of  course,  the  evidence  is  not  con- 
clusive that  it  was  a  dead  man  who  was  doing  it. 
For  to  prove  this  conclusively  the  "thing"  ought 
to  have  declared  that  it  had  been  a  man  before, 
and  then  proved  his  identity  by  other  unimpeach- 

247 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFE 

able  evidence.  But  yet  the  incident  carries  with- 
it  a  moral  conviction  which  is  irresistible,  that  it 
was  done  by  a  man  who  had  lived  on  this  earth 
before. 


. 


■ 
* 

( 
L 


THE   AGRICULTURAL 

SCHOLARSHIPS. 

[In  Three  Acts.] 
ACT  I. 

(The  Secretary  of  State  receiving  a  deputation 
from  Manchester  Merchants.) 

Deputation. — The  true  interests  of  India  are 
thus  neglected.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  India  to  make  India  rich  and  contented. 

Secretary  of  State. — We  are  always  very 
glad  to  receive  practical  suggestions  from  you. 

Deputation. — We  are  all  practical  men,  my 
Lord.  We  shall  prove  to  your  lordship  how  the 
resources  of  India  have  been  frittered  away.  First, 
then,  India  is  an  agricultural  country.  Do  you 
admit  that,  my  Lord  ? 

Secretary. — Certainly. 

Deputation. — Your  lordship  will  also  admit 
that  cotton  is  indigenous  in  India. 

Secretary. — Yes,  there  cannot  be  any  manner 
of  doubt  in  that. 

Deputation.— That  being  soa  is  it  not  clear 
that  India  should  grow  cotton,  only  cotton,  and 
nothing  but  cotton? 

Secretary. — I  am  all  attention. 

Deputation. — Our  second  proposition  is  that, 

249 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

England  is  a  manufacturing  country.  Can  there 
be  any  doubt,  therefore,  that  India  should  grow 
cotton  and  England  should  weave  ?  Is  not  this 
a  providential  arrangement  ? 

Secretary. — I  am  hearing  you  with  absorbing 
interest. 

Deputation. — A  fish  must  not  run,  nor  a  dog 
fly ;  Nature  does  not  permit  it.  You  must  not, 
therefore,  permit  India  to  weave.  India  has  a 
destiny  of  its  own — a  great  destiny.  We  have 
conquered  India  for  benevolent  purposes.  We 
must,  therefore,  grant  her  the  inestimable  privilege 
of  growing  as  much  cotton  as  we  want.  We 
must  also  grant  her  the  additional  privilege  of 
purchasing  the  clothes  manufactured  in  our  mills. 
How  is  it  that  our  manufactures  are  not  more 
largely  consumed  in  that  country  ! 

Secretary. — The  men  there  are  poor. 

Deputation. — So  you  must  first  of  all  make 
them  rich  by  developing  the  resources  of  the 
country.  A  thorough  agricultural  education 
must  be  given.  India  should  grow  cotton,  only 
cotton,  and  nothing  but  cotton,  and  that  will 
make  India  rich. 

Secretary. — You  forget  the  second  part  on 
your  proposition,  that  India  should  use  cotton 
manufactured  by  you  only,  use  nothing  but 
cotton,  and    use  more  cotton. 

Deputation. — Just  so. 

250 


THE  AGRICULTURAL  SCHOLARSHIPS 

Secretary. — We  shall  issue  instructions  to 
India  and  we  hope  they  will  prove  satisfactory 
to  you. 

ACT  II. 
(Present  two  Indian  rulers.) 

Ruler  ist. — We  must  do  something  to  please 
Manchester,  at  least  so  we  are  ordered  to  do. 

Ruler  2nd- — It  is  not  a  hard  task,  for  with 
all  their  wisdom,  nothing  is  easier  than  to  be  foot 
them. 

Ruler  ist — But  the  difficulty  is  to  please  them 
without  creating-  a  howl  here  in  India. 

Ruler  2nd. — That  can  be  done  easily  enough. 
We  can  spend  a  few  thousands  upon  some  agri- 
cultural scholarships.  It  will  help  nobody  ;  but 
it  will  cost  little,  please  Manchester  and  enligh- 
tened native  public  opinion  in  India. 

Ruler  ist. — What  do  you  mean  by  enlighten- 
ed native  public  opinion? 

Ruler  2nd. — The  leading  men  in  chief  cities, 
who  have  never  seen  a  blade  of  grass  in  their  lives- 

Ruler  2nd. — Let  it  be  done  then. 
ACT  III. 
(An  England-returned     Agricultural    Professor  and 

his  pupils.) 

Pupil  ist. — Sir,  is  it  time  that  we  should  sow 
paddy  ? 

Professor. — Don't  ask  me  that,  you  can  inquire 
about  it  of  a  common  cultivator.     That  is  not  a 

251 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN   LIFJ 

scientific  question.  I  did  not  go  to  England, 
interview  Mr.  Gladstone,  and  study  chemistry  to 
be  pestered  with  such  petty  matters.  Bring  soils 
and  I  shall  analyse  them  for  you. 

Pupil  2nd. — 1  gave  some  the  other  day,  for  the 
purpose  of  analysis. 

Professor. — Yes,  I  found  in  them  silica, 
allumina,  vegetable  and  animal  matter.  Ask  the 
cultivators  of  the  country  to  come  to  me  with 
specimens  of  soil,  and  1  shall  analyse  them, — for 
a  reasonable  consideration. 

Pupil  2. — What  will  they  gain  by  your 
analysis,   Sir? 

Professor. — That,  is  again,  a  foolish  question. 
They  will  gain  knowledge.  What  is  more  valua- 
ble than  knowledge  itself? 

Pupil  2. — You  have  analysed  the  soils  that  I 
brought ;  what  are  they  fit  for  ? 

Professor. — Well,  1  have  thrown  them  away 
after  analysis. 

Pupil  2. — I  don't  mean  that.  You  have 
analysed  the  soil.  What  crops  will  grow  best  in 
them  ? 

Professor. — That,  of  course,  you  must  learn 
by  experiments.  First,  you  sow  the  lands  with, 
say,  paddy.  If  paddy  fails,  sow  wheat.  If  it  fails, 
sow  sugar-cane.  And  in  this  manner  within  the 
course  of  twenty  to  twenty-five  years  you  shall  be 
able    to  know,    of   course,   if  you   conduct  your, 

252 


THE  AGRICULTURAL  SCHOLARSHIPS 

experiments  with  care,  what  your  lands  are  fit  for. 

P.  3. — Sir,  we  have  come  here  to  learn. 
Some  of  us  would  like  to  learn  how  to  cure 
tobacco,  some  to  learn  how  to  grow  long-stapled 
cotton,  and  good  tea.  Some  are  for  improving 
jute,  and  some  sugar-cane.  There  are  others  who 
are  for  the  improvement  of  silk,  and  some  are  for 
tussar,  lac  and  rhea. 

P.  4. — My  ambition  does  not  go  so  far.  I 
would  like  to  learn  how  to  make  my  lands  yield 
more  paddy,  wheat  pulses,   etc.,  than  it  does  now. 

Prof. — Well,  you  mention  crops  which  I  have 
never  seen  in  England,  and  some  of  them  I  have 
never  heard  of  in  my  life.  Neither  the  savants  in 
England,  nor  men  like  Bright  and  Gladstone 
could  give  me  any  hint  as  to  the  existence  of  the 
crops  you  mention.  I  cannot  call,  therefore,  all 
these  crops  respectable.  If  you  want  to  learn 
from  me  how  to  grow  any  respectable  crop,  I 
can  teach  you  how  to  grow  scotch  beans  and 
oats.     I  saw  them  grown  in  Scotland. 

P.  4. — Will  you  then  let  us  know  what  you 
will  teach  us,  besides  the  process  by  which  soils 
are  analysed  ? 

Prof. — Well,  if  you  want  to  know  how  to 
grow  jute,  and  such  other  things,  you  can  go  and 
ask  a  common  cultivator.  But  I  shall  teach  you 
the  curious  process  how  the  plant  draws  its  mois- 
ture from  the  soil,  and  how  the  sap  is   beautiful  ;y 

253 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN   LIFE 

carried  through  meandering  veins.  I  shall  explain 
to  you  how  the  leaves  and  flowers  get  their  colour. 
I  shall— 

P.  5. — (Suddenly  appearing).-The  new  plough 
that  you  gave  me  does  not  work. 

Prof.— What,  that  splendid  plough  constructed 
on  scientific  principles  designed  after  the  model 
of  the  latest  inventions  in  America  ! 

P.  5  — They  are  too  heavy  for  the  cattle  to 
<lrag. 

Prof. — Is  that  all  ?  Then  indent  for  a  pair  of 
bullocks  from  Ayrshire  or  Kentucky,  and  the 
plough  will  work  beautifully. 

P.  6. — My  father,  Sir,  has  asked  me  to  return 
you  the  harrowing  machine.  He  says  that  he 
prefers  his  4-anna  harrow  to  yours  which,  you  say, 
is  worth  Rs.  25.  The  4-anna  implement  works 
less  effectually,  but  then  it  costs  only  4  annas. 
We  cannot  afford  to  pay  Rs  25  for  a  harrow. 

P.  7. — Talking  of  implements,  Sir  the 
winnowing  machine  is  broken. 

Prof. — Then  have  it  repaired. 

P.  7. — They  cannot  repair  it  here. 

Prof. — Well,  then,  in  that  case  you  must  send 
it  to  England. 

P.  7. — My  father  says  very  hard  things  of 
you. 

Prof. — What  does  he  say  "t 

P.  7. — He  says  that  you  are  a — humbug. 

254 


THE  AGRICULTURAL  SCHOLARSHIPS 

Prof. — (Solus)  I  feel  that  I  have  yet  something 
more  to  learn.  I  am  extremely  doubtful  whether 
my  pupils  will  stick  to  me  to  learn  only  vegetable 
physiology,  and  the  analysis  of  soils. 


THE  DETERIORATION  OF  THE 
INDIANS. 

ONE  of  the  most  painful  and  absorbing  topics 
of    conversation,    amongst    the    Indians,    is    the 

physical  deterioration  of  the  races  in   this  country. 
The  following  startling  telegram  came  from  Madr 
some  years  ago  : 

Madras,  March   21. 

'The  Hon'ble  Genston,  presiding  at  the  annual 
meeting"  of  the  Physical  Training  Association, 
alluded  to  the  startling  fact  that,  out  of  22  native 
candidates  for  Entrance  to  the  Civil  Service 
recently,  70  per  cent,  were  rejected  as  physically 
unfit.' 

Thus  70  per  cent,  are  unfit  for  civil  employ  ; 
how  many  more  must  be  unfit  for  military  employ? 
It  is  a  fact  that  the  races  are  deteriorating  all 
along  the  line.  The  Government  has  been  obliged 
to  a  mit  this  fact  partially.  It  is  now  i  ely 
nvtted  that  fighting  materials  are  disappearing 
fast  from  the  land.     Said  the  Pi  some  years 

ag":— 

The  long  reign  of  internal  peace  has  directly 
ai<  ed  the  character  of  the  population;  the 
tr;.  usui  military  supremacy  among  the  Shikhs 
arc     ^  ing  out ;  the  Punjabi  Mohamedans  are  more 

256 


THE   DETERIORATION  OF  THE   INDIANS 

intent  on  the  cultivating  of  their  lands,  secure  in 
the  possession  of  such  property  as  they  can 
accumulate ;  while  the  once  restless,  Pathan 
tribes  within  the  border  are  not  allowed  to  follow 
the  example  t'hus  set  them. 

The  same  paper  continued  :  "  Officers  of  long 
experience  in  Punjab  have  noticed  the  change 
with  regret,  for  they  cannot  now  choose  and 
pick  their  men."  And  then  it  is  very  properly 
argued  that  if  this  be  the  case  with  people, 
"who  were  at  the  height  of  military  strength,  fifty 
years  ago,  how  much  more  must  be  with  others '' 
whose  powers  were  broken  long  before  !"  It  comes 
to  this  that  in  the  whole  of  India,  in  a  population 
of  250  millions,  it  has  been  found  difficult  to  find 
men  who  are  capable  of  fighting.  Is  this  not  a 
serious  matter,  both  for  the  people  and 
the  Government?  Does  not  this  mean  the 
practical  emasculation  of  the  vast  majority  of 
entire  nation  ? 

That  the  people  are  now  utterly  helpless,  is  a 
patent  fact  to  all.  A  dacoit,  with  half-a-dozen 
following,  may  commit  depredations  for  years 
together,  and  the  people  will  find  themselves 
unable  to  defend  their  homes  and  persons.  A  tiger 
makes  the  inhabitants  desert  their  villages,  and  a 
leopard  will  compel  them  to  go  in-doors  every 
evening,  before  the  sun  sets.  Nay  the  Indian 
newspapers  contain   appeals  to  Government  and 

257 
S-17 


OF    IN  MI  AN   Ui 

to  sh  sportsmen  t"  protect  the  people  Erorri 

m::  1  i  ja<  k  lis. 

But  only  less  than  a  hundred  years  ago, 
the  {-•  pie  of  India  were  as  strong  as  an- 
other race  in  the  world.  It  is  said  that  the 
Bengalee  e  the   weakest  race  in  India,  and 

the  Pun  jabees  the  strongest,  except  the  Gurkhas. 
But  that  is  not  it.  The  Bengalees  were  as  strong 
as  any  in  India  ;  only  being  secure  from  external 
inv..  .  which  the  Punjabee  was  not,  the  inhabi- 
tants oi  Bengal  had  not  been  able  to  develop  their 
material  instincts  to  the  same  extent  as  the 
border  tribes  had. 

Only  forty  years  ago  we  have  seen  plenty  of 
fighting  materials  in  Bengal,  twenty-five  in  a 
hundred  ;  but  it  is  now  impossible  to  find  half-a- 
dozen  in  a  million  ! 

The  Bengalees  have  proved  themselves  to  be 
an  intellectual  race  and  in  this  intellectual  prog- 
ress they  are  indebted  vastly  to  British  rule. 
Intellectual  they  had  always  been  even  before 
the  British  came.  But  then,  in  'pre-British 
days,  learning  was  confined  almost  to  the  Brah- 
mins, and  the  other  castes  had  no  opportunity 
of  improving  themselves  to  the  utmost  of  their 
capacity-  But  under  British  Rule,  the  Bengalees 
have  now  obtained  this  privilege ;  and  if  the 
Brahmins  yet  continue  to  hold  the  first  place,  they 
have  found  formidable  competitors  in  other  castes, 

258 


THE   DETERIORATION  OF  THE    INDIANS 

such" as  Kayesthas  and  Yaidyas.  This  intellectual 
superiority  of  the  Bengalees  has  created  for  them 
enemies  amongst  Europeans  who  call  them 
cowardly,  effeminate,  and  so  forth. 

We  shall  now  show  that  even  the  Bengalees 
were  a  powerful  race  only  less  than  a  hundred 
years  ago. 

The  Mussalman  invaders  and  conquerors  of 
India  found  it  to  their  advantage  to  leave  the 
administration  in  the  hands  of  Hindus.  In  Bengal, 
the  country  was  divided  and  put  into  the  charge 
of  Zemindars  who  were  sovereign  Princes.  And 
thus,  at  one  time,  Bengal  was  under  twelve  such 
Zemindars. 

The  Moghul  Sovereign  exacted  military 
service  from  these  Zemindars.  Thus  says  the 
Ayeen  Ahbary  : — 

"  The  soubah  of  Bengal  consists  of  24  Sircars 
and  487  mahals.  The  revenue  is  14,961,482  Sicca 
rupees,  and  the  zemindars  (who  are  mostly 
Kayesthas)  furnish  23,330: cavalry,  801,158  infantry, 
170  elephants  4,260  cannons  and  4,400  boats  '' 

Thus  the  Moghul  Emperors  could  raise  lakhs 
of  men  from  Bengal  to  light  for  them,  but  the 
present  rulers  have  not  one  single  Bengalee 
soldier ! 

The  Mussalman  rule,  being  barbarous  and 
oppressive,  did  not  meet  with  the  approval  of  the 
country  ;   and  Protap  and  Shankar,  two  Bengalee 

259 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIKE 

tilths,  formed  the  plan  of  expelling-  the  Maho- 
medans  from  India.  Protap  was  the  son  of  a 
wealthy  Zemindar,  residing-  in  the  Sunderbans 
near  Takee  ;  and  Shankar  was  a  Brahmin  youth, 
his  friend.  They  both  proceeded  to  Delhi  to  study 
the  Moghul  army  and  their  mode  of  warfare- 
They  found  that  the  superiorty  of  the  Moghuls  lay 
in  their  artillery. 

The  Feringhees  (Portuguese)  also  infested 
India,  and  they  were  invincible  because  of  their 
fleet  and  cannons.  Protap  enlisted  the  services  of 
a  Portuguese  General,  who  is  called  Ruda 
in  Sanskrit  books  and  Bengalee  legends.  Batteries 
of  artillery  and  a  fleet  were  thus  constructed  in  the 
Sunderbans.  Protap  then  declared  his  indepen- 
dence. 

Now  it  was  a  most  foolhardy  thing  for  Protap 
to  do  it,  for  the  Moghuls  then  were  in  the  hey- 
day of  their  glory.  He  declared  his  independence 
while  yet  the  great  Akbar  ruled  ! 

In  the  beginning,  Protap  and  Shankar  carried 
on  a  guerilla  warfare.  They  offered  no  direct 
resistance  to  the  Moghuls  but  fled  before  them, 
only  to  expel  them,  when  the  rainy  season  had 
set  in. 

But  gradually  Protap  became  bolder.  He 
took  Gaur,  the  then  capital  city  of  Bengal,  and 
became  the  absolute  master  of  Bengal  and  Behar. 
Then  he  gave  up  gueri  la  warfare  altogether,  and 

260 


THE   DETERIORATION  OF  THE   INDIANS 

began  to  wage  pitched  battles  with  the  Moghuls. 
And  in  every  one  of  them,  he  defeated  and 
sometimes  exterminated  the  invaders  of  his 
country.  This  is  what  we  find  in  the  proceedings 
of  the  Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal  for  December 
1868  with  regard  to  the  brave  doings  of  Protap: — 
"The  first  general  sent  was  Abram  Khan  whose 
army  was  nearly  annihilated  near  the  fort  Mutlar 
(Mutlah,  now  Port  Canning).  Twenty-five  other 
generals  are  stated  to  have  been  defeated  in 
succession." 

Now  mind,  these  were  not  skirmishes  but 
regular  battles,  between  huge  armies,  made  up  of 
infantry,  artillery  and  cavalry. 

Protap's  commanders  were  mostly  Bengalees, 
and  some  of  them  have  their  descendants,  but 
they  are  now  scarcelv  over  five  feet  in  height  and 
are  doing  the  business  of  either  village  school- 
masters or  clerks. 

Short  accounts  of  their  battles  are  found  in 
Sanskrit  History.  There,  we  read  that,  in  a  battle 
the  Moghul  General,  Azim,  with  twenty  thousand 
of  his  men,  was  killed.  In  another  battle,  ten 
thousand  men  of  the  Moghuls  were  destroyed. 
These  details  will  give  one  an  idea  of  the  severe 
nature  of  the  battles  fought. :; 

Of  the  twelve  Zemindars,  referred  to    above 


*    See   Satya  Charan    Shastri'a   "Life  of    Protapaditya."     The 
author  is  a  descendant  of  the  great  Shankara  himself. 

26l 


PICTURES  OF   INDIAN  LIFE 

who  ruled  Bengal,  one  had  his  capital  city  in 
Bishnupore,  now  in  the  district  of  Bancoora.  In 
going  there,  one  can  see  even  now  traces  of  exten- 
sive fortifications  and  a  huge  cannon,  perhaps  the 
biggest  in  the  world.  This  country  was  visited  by 
a  French  traveller,  and  this  is  what  he  says  of 
what  he  saw  : 

"  This  fortunate  spot,  which  extends  about  a 
hundred  and  sixty  miles,  is  called  Bissenpoore.  It 
has  been  governed  time  immemorial  by  a  Bramin. 
family  of  the  tribe  of  Rajahputs.  Here  the  purity 
and  equal  of  the  ancient  political  svstem  of  the 
Indians  is  found  unadulterated.  This  singular 
Government,  the  first  and  most  striking  monu- 
ment in  the  world  has,  till  now  been  beheld  with 
too  much  indifference.  We  have  no  remains  of 
ancient  nations  but  brass  and  marble,  which  speak 
only  to  imagination  and  conjecture,  those  un- 
certain interpreters  of  manners  and  customs  that 
no  longer  exist.  Were  a  philosopher  transported 
to  Bissenpore,  he  would  immediately  be  a  witness 
of  the  life  led  by  the  first  inhabitants  of  India  many 
thousand  years  ago;  he  would  converse  with  them 

would  trace  the  progress  of  this  nation 
relebrated,  as  it  were,  from  its  very  infancy  ;  he 
would  see  the  rise  of  a  Government,  which  being 
founded  in  happy  prejudices,  in  a  simplicity  and 
purity  of  manners,  in  the  mild  temper  of  the  people 
and  the  integrity  of  the   chieftains,  has  survived 

262 


THE   DETERIORATION  OF  THE    INDIANS 

those   innumerable  systems    of   legislation,  which 
have  made  only  a  transitory  appearance  upon  the 
stage  of  the  world  with  the  generations  they  were 
destined    to   torment.     More    solid   and   durable 
than    those   political     structures,     which,     raised 
by  imposture    and    enthusiasm,   are  the  scourge 
of    human    kind,    and     are    doomed,    to    perish 
with  the  foolish  opinions  that  gave  them  birth,  the 
Government  of  Bissenpore,  the  offspring  off  a  just 
attention  to  order  and  the  laws  of  nature,  has  been 
established    and  maintained    upon   unchangeable 
principles,  and  has  undergone  no  more   alteration 
than   those    principles  themselves.     The  singular 
situation    of   this    country    has    preserved  to  the 
inhabitants    their    primitive    happiness   and    the 
gentleness  of  their  character,  by    securing  them 
from  the  danger  of  being  conquered,  or    imbruing 
their  hands  in  the  blood  of  their  fellow-creatures. 
Nature  has  surrounded  them  with  water;  and  they 
need  only  open  the  sluices  of  their  rivers   to  over- 
flow  the    whole    country.     The    armies    sent    to 
subdue  them    have  so   frequently  been   drowne  d 
that    the  plan   of   enslaving  them   has   been  laid 
aside  ;  and  the  projectors  of  it  have  thought  proper 
to    content    themselves    with  an    appearance    of 
submission. 

Liberty  and  property  are  sacred  in  Bissenpore 
Robbery,  either  public  or  private,  is  never  heard 
of.     As  soon  as  any  stranger  enters  the  territory  he 

263 


PICTURES  OF  INDIAN  LIFE 

comes  under  the  protection  of  the  laws,  which 
provide  for  his  security.  He  is  furnished  with 
guides  at  free  cost,  who  conduct  him  from  place  to 
place,  and  are  answerable  for  his  person  and 
eflects.  When  he  changes  his  conductors,  the  new 
ones  deliver  to  those  they  relieve  an  attestation  of 
their  conduct,  which  is  registered  and  afterwards 
sent  to  the  Raja.  All  the  time  he  remains  in  the 
country  he  is  maintained  and  conveyed  with  his 
merchandise,  at  the  expense  of  the  State,  unless 
he  desires  leave  to  stay  longer  than  three  days  in 
the  same  place.  In  that  case  he  is  obliged  to 
defray  his  own  expenses,  unless  he  is  detained  by 
any  disorder,  or  other  unavoidable  accident.  This 
beneficence  to  strangers  is  the  consequence  of  the 
warmth  with  which  the  citizens  enter  into  each 
others'  interests.  They  are  so  far  from  being 
guilty  of  an  injury  to  each  other,  that  whoever 
fin' K  a  purse  or  other  thing  of  value,  hangs  it  upon 
the  first  tree  he  meets  with,  and  informs  the 
nearest  guard,  who  gives  notice  of  it  to  the  public 
by  beat  of  drum.  These  maxims  of  probity  are  so 
generally  received,  that  they  direct  even  the  opera- 
tions of  Government.  Out  of  between  seven  and 
eight  millions  (about  430,000?.  on  an  average)  it 
annually  receives,  without  injury  to  agriculture  or 
trade,what  is  not  wanted  to  supply  the  unavoidable 
expenses  of  the  State,  is  laid  out  in  improvements- 
The  Raja  is  enabled  to   engage    in  these  humane 

264 


THE  DETERIORATION  OF  THE   INDIANS 

employments,  as  he  pays  the  Moguls  only  what 
tribute,  and  at  what  times,  he  thinks  proper.* 

But  a  still  greater  authority,  Mr.  Holwell,  who 
was  governor  of  Calcutta,  speaks  in  the  same  way 
of  Bishnupore  in  his  "  Interesting  Historical 
Events,"  which  was  printed  in  1765: — 

"To  the  west  of  Burdwan,  something  northerly 
lie  the  lands  belonging  to  the  family  of  Raja  Gopal 
Singh,  of  the  Rajpoot  Bramin  tribe  ;  they  posses 
an  extent  of  sixteen  days'  travel,  this  district 
produces  an  annual  revenue  of  between  thirty  and 
forty  lacs;  but  fromthe  happiness  of  his  situation  he 
is  perhaps  the  most  independent  Raja  of  Indostan, 
having  it  always  in  his  power  to  overflow  his 
country,  and  drown  any  enemy  that  comes  against 
him;  as  happened  at  the  beginning  of  Sujah  Khan's 
Government,  who  sent  a  strong  body  of  horse  to 
reduce  him,  these  he  suffered  to  advance  far  into 
his  country,  then  opening  the  dams  of  the  rivers 
destroyed  them  to  a  man;  this  action  deterred  any 
subsequent  attempts  to  reduce  him ;  but  if  the 
frontiers  of  the  district  were  so  invested,  as  to 
prevent  the  exit  of  die  merchandise  of  his 
country,  which  might  easily  be  done,  he  iwould 
be  presently  brought  to  obedience,  and  glad  to 
compound  for  a  tribute  of  twenty  lacs  per  annum; 
as  it  is,    he  can    hardly  be  said  to   acknowledge 

*Abbe  Eajnal  on  East  and  West  Indies.      Translated  from  the 
French  by  J.  Justamond,  M.  A.— 1777,  Vol.  L,  pp.  405  to  406. 

265 


PICTURES  OF    INDIAN  LIFE 

any  allegiance  to  the  Moghul  or  Sabah,  he  some 
years  deigns  to  send  to  the  Subah  an  acknow- 
ledgment by  way  of  salaamy  (or  present)  of  15,000 
rupees,  sometimes  20,000,  and  some  years  not 
anything  at  all,  as  he  happens  to  be  disposed. 

But  in  truth,  it  would  be  almost  cruelty  to 
molest  these  happy  people,  for  in  this  district,  are 
the  only  vestiges  of  the  beauty,  purity,  piety, 
regularity,  equitv  and  strictness  of  the  ancient 
Indostan  Government.  Here  the  propertv  as  well 
as  the  liberty  of  the  people  are  inviolate,  here  no 
robberies  are  heard  of,  either  private  or  public  ; 
the  traveller,  either  with,  or  without  merchandise, 
on  his  entering  this  district,  becomes  the  immediate 
care  of  Government  which  allots  him  guards 
without  any  expense,  to  conduct  him  from  stage  to 
stage,  and  these  are  accountable  for  the  safety  and 
accommodation  of  his  person  and  effects.  At  the 
end  of  the  first  stage  he  is  delivered  over  with 
certain  benevolent  formalities  to  the  guards  of  the 
next,  who  after  interrogating-  the  traveller,  as  to 
the  usage  he  had  received  in  his  journey,  dismisses 
the  first  guard  with  a  written  certificate  of  their 
behaviour,  and  a  receipt  for  the  traveller  and  his 
effects,  which  certificate  and  receipt  are  returnable 
to  the  commanding  officer  of  the  first  stage,  who 
registers  the  same,  and  regularly  reports  it  to  the 
Rajah. 

i    n  this  form  the    traveller  is   passed   through 

266 


THE   DETERIORATION  OF  THE   INDIANS 

the  country,  and  if  he  only  passes,  he  is  not  suffered 
to  be  at  any  expense  for  food,  accommodation,  or 
carriage  for  his  merchandise  or  jpaggage;  but  it  is 
otherwise,  if  he  is  permitted  to  make  any  residence 
in  one  place  above  three  days,  unless  occasioned 
by  sickness,  or  any  unavoidable  accident.  If  any* 
thing  is  lost  in  this  district,  for  instance,  a  bag  of 
money  or  other  valuable,  the  person  who  finds  it 
hangs  it  upon  the  next  tree,  and  gives  notice  to 
the  nearest  chowkey  or  place  of  guard,  the  officer 
of  which  orders  immediate  publication  of  the  same 
by  beat  of  tomtom  or  drum.  ■* 

There  are  in  this  precinct,  no  less  than  three 
hundred  and  sixty  considerable  Pagodas,  or 
place  of  public  worship,  errected  by  this  Raja,  and 
his  ancestors.  The  worship,  of  the  cow  is  here 
carried  to  so  great  an  extreme,  that,  if  that 
animal  meets  with  a  violent  death,  the  city 
or  village  to  which  it  belonged,  go  to  a  general 
mourning  and  fast,  for  three  days,  and  are  obliged 
from  the  Rajah  to  the  meanest  of  the  people,  to 
remain  on  the  spot,  where  they  first  heard  the 
publication  of  the  accident ;  and  are  employed 
during  that  space  in  performing  various  expiations 
as  directed  in  the  Shastra ;  but  more  of  this  under 
a  subsequent  general  head. 

Bishunpore,  the  capital,  and  chief  residence 
of  the  Rajah,  and  which  gives  a  name  to  the  whole 
district,  is  also  the  chief  seat  of  trade ;  the  produce 

267 


PICTURES  OK   INDIAN   LIFE 

of  the  country  consists  of  Sal  timbers  (a  wood 
equal  in  quality  to  the  best  of  our  oak),  dammer 
laccas,  an  inferior  sortment  of  raw  silk,  and  coposs, 
and  grain  safficient  only  for  their  consumption; 
it  is  from  this  district  that  the  East  India  companies 
are  chiefly  supplied  with  the  article  of  shell 
lacco. — Pages  197  to  200,  Part  I" 

When  the  English  came  here,  they  found  the 
country  inhabited  by  a  strong  race.  So  they  en- 
listed Bengalees  as  soldiers  and  put  them  under 
Bengalee  officers.  With  this  army  of  Bengalees 
and  with  a  sprinkling  of  British  soldiers,  the 
British  conquered  Bengal  and  Behar.  They  then 
enlisted  the  Beharees  and  conquered  the  North- 
West.  They  next  availed  of  the  Pandays  of  the 
North-West  and  conquered  the  Punjab.  The 
Punjabees  were  enlisted  and  Afghanistan  was  in- 
vaded. It  was  thus  India  was  conquered  for 
England  by  the  Indians  themselves  and  originally 
with  the  help  of  the  Bengalees.  Mr.  Hohvell  says, 
"  It  would  be  almost  cruelty  to  molest  these  happy 
people."  We  are  further  told  that  Bishnupore 
gives  evidence  of  ,;the  beauty,  piety,  regularity, 
and  equity  of  ancient  India.''  All  have  been  des- 
troyed, of  course,  with  the  best  of  motives,  by  the 
present  rulers  in  their  zeal  for  reform. 


JUST  PUBLISHED 

INDIA  FOR  INDIANS 


BY 

C.  R.  DAS 


THIS  IS  A  COLLECTION  OF  THE 
SPEECHES  DELIVERED  BY  .  .  . 
Mr.  C.  R.  DAS  ON  HOME  RULE  . 
FOR  INDIA  WHEREIN  HE  HAS  . 
ALSO  TELLINGLY  EXPOSED  THE 
FALLACY  OF  ANGLO-INDIAN  .  . 
AGITATION  AGAINST  INDIAN  .  . 
ASPIRATIONS.  THE  BOOK  OPENS 
WITH   AN  INTRODUCTION  BY  .    . 

BABU  MOTI  LAL  GHOSE 

Editor  :  Amrita  Bazar  Patrika. 


Price  As.  12. 
Ganesh  &  Co.,  Publishers,  Madras. 


THE  GARLAND  OF  LIFE 

POEMS  WEST  AND  EAST 

James  Ei  cousins. 

The  Book  contains  tb<  last  Poems  the  author 

wrote  fa  England  and  a  group  written  since  he 
came  to  India,  including  English  versions  of  Lyrics 
from  Mirabai,  Tukaram,  Bharati  and oilier  Indian 
poets- 


CONTEN T5 


PART  T:  WKST 


The  Higher  Stoicism. 

Plight. 

-\  one-sided  Conversation  vfith 

■  Kieldra^Jn.S',. 
The  Haunt' . 1    Eonse  :  An 

Legend. 
T.ive  in  • 

itivo  Love. 
The  Spendthrift 
To   the    Still-Urn   Chil 

Frien.l. 
Sonnets : 

i.  The  Shadowy  Comr .. 
ii.  The  Sword  of  fch<    I. 
Castles  In  Spain, 
Birds  at  ^ea. 


:   II  :  BALT 


jini  Naidn 
■    Praise  of  Karth. 
Dswn, 
■  >••  Banj  an.. 
Balance. 
Li 

■  b.  TagOte. 
Aft<-r  a    ( . -> ■  i y  had    played  oa 
aa. 

rases, 
i.  A  Goj  i-xong  i<>  Sri  Kris 
ii.  .    sti<-  Churn. 

iii.  Th     Bargain. 

•    knows. 
v.  Sals  Makes  a  Mistake, 
vi  lerotee. 

vii.    J't     iuly  Dance. 
v'.\,  rod  of  Life. 


D.  C.  16  M.  0.  Printed  on  Antique  paper  and  cloth 

bound. 


PRICE  Be.  1. 


HIS  LIFE,  WRITINGS,  AND  SPEECHES 

WITH  A  FOREWORD  BY 

Mrs.  Sarojini  Naidu 

In  this  volume  of  the  Life,  Writings  and  Speeches  of 
Mr  M.  K.  GANDHI— over  eighty  pages  are  devoted  in 
giving   a   true    picture   cf   the   life  and   services  of  Mr. 
GANDHI   to    India   in  particular  and  to  Humanity  in 
general  since   the  commencement  of  the  South  African 
Struggle  upto  the  present  day  and  in  vividly  describing 
the  stroy  of  that  struggle  with  its  shining  roll  of  Martyrs 
both  men  and  women,  its  thrilling  incedents.  marvellous 
pathos  and  divine  inspiration.     The  life  of  this  apostle  is 
an  example  and  a  demonstration  of  what  one  man  can  do 
by  the   sheer   force   of   his   character  and  is  likewise  a 
demonstration     of     how   masses  of    men   and    women 
apparently   lifeless     and    down   trodden    can     develop 
astounding  heroism  under  the  inspiration  of  a  truly  great 
and  selfless  leader.     The  life  is  followed  by  his  Writings 
and    Speeches   delivered   in  South  Africa,   England  and 
India    not  only  on  the  South  African  Struggle   but  they 
cover  a  range  of  subjects,  social,  educational, and  political 
which   are   of   permanent  value   and   worth   treasuring. 
There  is  an  appendix  to  the  book  containing  appreciations 
by  several  distinguished  persons  including  Lord  Ampthil, 
Lord  Gladstone.  Sir  Henry  Cotton,  Mrs.    Besant,  Mrs. 
Sarojini  Naidu.    Charles  Roberts  and  others  and  also  the 
History  of  the  South  African  strgggle.  Tolstoy's  views  on 
Passive  resistance  and  Mr.  Gandhi's  work  in  connection 
with  the  Indigo  labour  in  Behar  are  appended  to  the  book. 
The  value  of  the  book   is  considerably  enhanced  by  the 
touching  Foreword  written  by  Mrs  SAROJINI  NAIDU 
and  several  portraits,  over  TWENTY  in  number  of  those 
connected   with  the   South  African   Struggle   adorn   the 
pages  of  the  book.     The  volume  has  an  exhaustive 
index  and  is  bound  in  full  cloth. 

PRICE  RS.  18 


INDIA'S  CLAIM  FOR  HOME  RULE 

A  comprehensive  collection  of  the  speeches  and 
writings  of  eminent  English  men  and  women  and 
representatives  of  the  princess  and  the  peoples  of 
India 

A  Telling  Case  for  Grant  of  Home  Rule  for  India. 
OUR   SPOKESMEN. 


1  Dadabhai  Naoroji. 

2  Surendranath  Bauer jee. 

3  Lord  Bishop  of  Madras. 

4  Mrs.  Annie  Besant. 

5  Hon.   Mr.  Ibrahim  Rahim- 

tnlla. 

6  L.  A.  Govindaragava  Iyer 

7  Mrs.   Sarojini  Naidu. 

8  R.  N.  Mudholkar. 

9  Pandit  Jagat  Narain. 

10  Ambikacharan  Muzunider. 

11  Bal  Gangadar  Tilak. 

12  Hon.  Mr.  Mazarul  Haquo. 

13  Sir  Dinshaw  Petifc. 

14  Babu  Bepin  Chandra  Pal. 

15  Joseph  Baptista. 

16  Dr.  Tej   Bahadur  Sapru. 

17  Jehangir  Petit. 

18  Hon.  Mr.  B.  N.  Sarma. 

19  Hon.  Mr.   Abdul  Rasul. 

20  Sir  Rabindranath  Tagore. 

21  H.  H.  Maharaja  of  Vlwar. 

22  H.  H.  Maharaja  of  Bikanir 

23  Hon.  Pandit   M.    M.    Mala- 

viya. 


24  Hon.  Mr.  Nabiulla. 

25  Hon.  Mr.   M.  A.   Jininh. 
2b'  Lord  Bishop  of  Calcutta. 

27  Hon.  Rajah  Mahamndabad. 

28  Mr.  Mahomed  Ali. 

29  Mr.  Syed  wazir  Haaau. 

30  Lala  Lajpat   Rai 

31  Mr.  Hasan  Imam. 

32  Sir  S.  P.  Sinha. 

33  Babu  Arabinda  Ghose. 

34  Sir   Krishna  Gnpta. 

35  Lord  Hardinge. 

36  Mr.  ,T.  S.  Cotton. 

37  Sir  William  Wedderburn. 

38  The     Rt.     Hon.     Mr.    E.    S. 

Montagu. 

39  Commander  Wedgewood. 

40  Dr.  John  Pollen. 

41  Dr.  Rutherford. 

42  Mr.  Webb. 

43  Mrs.  Webb. 

44  Mr.  S.  H.  Swinny. 

45  Mr.  Herbert    Burrows. 

46  Dr.      Sir     S.     Subramanya 

Aivar.  &c.  &c. 


The  Publishers  hope  that  the  historic  Introduction  with 
which  the  volume  opens  and  the  Appendix  at  the  end  of  the 
book  containing  the  memorable  documents  mentioned  below 
will  be  of  special  interest. 

1.  The    Memorandum  of  the  Nineteen. 

2.  The  Scheme  of  the  Congress    and  Muslem  League. 

3.  The  Programme  of  the  British  Congress  Committee. 

4.  The  Aims  of  the    Indian  National  Congress  of  expressed 
by  the  31    Presilents  of  the  Indian  National  Congress. 

5.  Representative    views      of      several      Englishmen     and 
Indians  of  all  shades  of  opinion  on  Self-Government   for  India. 

Over  6oo  pages  PRiCE  Rs.  2. 
Gaaesh  &  Co.,  Publishers,  39,  Thambn  Chctty  St.,  Madras, 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


DS  Ghose,   Shi shir  Kumar 

421  Pictures  of  Indian  life 

G4